THE  COMING 

ESTER 


<I 


BAN  K.BAIRD 


L  OF  CAUF.  LIBRARY.  LOS  ANGELES 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 


SHE  LOOKED  PROFESSOR  SANDERSON  SQUARELY  IN  THE  FACE. 
Page  104. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 


BY 

JEAN   K.   BAIRD 


ILLUSTRATED  BY  ARTHUR  0.   SCOTT 


BOSTON 
LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARP  CQ, 


Published,  August,  1909. 


COPYRIGHT,  1909,  BY  LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  Co. 


All  Rights  Reserved. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTEB. 


NortoooB 

J.  8.  Oushing  Co.  —  Berwick  <fe  Smith  Co. 
Norwood,  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


ILLUSTRATIONS 
• 

SHE  LOOKED   PROFESSOR   SANDERSON  SQUARELY 

IN  THE  FACE.     (Page  104)        .        .         Frontispiece 

FACING    PAGE 

THE  CHILD  LAY  ASLEEP  IN  HER  ARMS  ...      18 
"  AUNT  DEBBY,  YOU  ARE  PERFECTLY  BEAUTIFUL  "      80 

HE   DID   NOT  WAIT   TO   REMOVE   HIS   SKATES   .  .      184 

"HOW  DARE   YOU!"   SHE   CRIED        ....      254 

"I  KNOW  MORE    ABOUT    HESTER'S    PEOPLE    THAN 

YOU   SUSPECT  " 310 


2125532 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

CHAPTER  I 

T^VEBBY  ALDEN  was  hanging  out  the 
r^rr  last  piece  of  the  weekly  wash.  It  was 
not  yet  eight  o'clock,  but  Debby  was  not 
one  to  be  slack  about  her  work.  She  hated 
"slop  "  work,  as  she  termed  washing,  to  hang 
on  until  the  middle  of  the  morning,  so  she 
was  out  of  bed  at  daylight  and  about  it. 
She  was  a  tall,  slender  woman,  with  clear- 
cut  features  inclined  toward  being  sharp. 
She  was  wiry  and  quick  of  movement,  with 
a  voice  that  carried  far  when  she  put  it  to 
use ;  which  was  not  frequent,  for  she  was  a 
woman  of  few  words.  She  was  strong  in 
her  likes  and  dislikes  and  fearless  in  the 
expression  of  her  opinion.  She  was  in- 
dependent in  thought  and  action,  no  one 
in  her  little  world  being  able  to  force  his 
opinion  upon  her. 

i 


2          THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

She  was  a  woman  of  good  judgment, 
with  a  large  fund  of  practical  common  sense 
which  so  far  had  never  failed  her.  Her 
mind  had  not  received  a  great  amount  of 
culture,  but  it  was  keen  in  its  perceptions, 
and  logical  in  its  reasoning.  Had  she  been 
a  man,  she  might  have  been  a  criminal 
lawyer  or  a  great  financier.  She  had  a  fine 
appreciation  of  humor,  although  she  her- 
self was  far  from  being  humorous.  She  was 
more  inclined  toward  a  sarcastic  wit,  which 
stood  her  in  need  when  curiously  inclined 
neighbors  ventured  too  far  upon  her  private 
domains. 

She  had  sprung  from  a  long  line  of  thrifty, 
honest,  unpretentious,  plain-speaking  folk, 
and  she  was  the  epitome  of  all  her  forebears. 

Her  manner  was  undemonstrative  —  al- 
most stern.  If  affection  or  love  made  a 
part  of  her  composition,  she  kept  them  well 
in  the  background,  and  only  a  few  who  really 
understood  her  knew  the  depths  of  sacrifice 
and  devotion  of  which  her  love  was  capable. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER         3 

Her  house,  though  barren  of  any  sugges- 
tion of  luxuries  or  articles  of  finer  taste,  was 
the  picture  of  cleanliness  and  good  sense. 
She  had  everything  needed  for  her  comfort 
and  convenience.  Her  furniture  was  old- 
fashioned,  but  well-kept  and  utilitarian. 
She  saw  no  reason  to  discard  an  excellent 
article  because  present  fashions  declared  it 
out  of  date. 

Her  logical  mind  showed  itself  in  her  dress 
as  it  did  in  her  house.  Her  dark  wrapper 
was  whole  and  clean,  and  quite  short  enough 
to  escape  the  ground.  Her  sleeves  were 
rolled  above  the  elbow,  and  the  front  of 
her  dress  was  protected  by  a  large  apron  of 
blue  and  white  check.  Her  great  mass  of 
brown  hair  was  braided  tightly  and  wound 
about  her  head  until  it  looked  like  a  crown. 
There  was  a  suggestion  of  waves  about  it, 
but  she  kept  it  so  tightly  braided  that  the 
waves  never  went  further  than  a  suggestion. 

When  the  last  article  had  been  hung 
plumb  and  straight  on  the  line,  Debby 


4         THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

took  up  her  basket  preparatory  to  returning 
to  the  wash-house.  But  the  morning  ap- 
pealed to  her.  She  paused  to  draw  in  a 
breath  of  air  and  to  look  about  her. 

A  choice  of  views  was  before  her.  Near 
at  hand  was  her  own  little  place,  too  small 
to  be  called  a  farm,  yet  large  enough  to 
provide  her  living  for  her.  There  was  her 
early  garden  with  hotbeds  for  the  young 
plants;  her  field  of  sweet  corn,  and  to  the 
left  of  this,  an  acre  laid  out  in  potatoes. 

Then  close  at  hand  was  the  great  rambling 
old  house  built  to  hold  a  large  family;  and 
before  this  was  the  yard  with  its  grass  plots, 
its  beds  of  flowers,  and  the  old-fashioned 
shrubs  and  plants  which  her  grandmother 
had  placed  there.  It  was  a  peaceful  scene. 
She  gave  a  sigh  of  contentment  as  her  eyes 
rested  upon  it. 

At  the  edge  of  the  place  and  across  the 
public  road  were  the  signs  of  the  noise  and 
hurry  of  business  life.  A  half-dozen  tracks 
of  railroad  came  together  here.  The  public 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER        5 

driveway  crossed  them  almost  at  right 
angles,  and  ascended  a  steep  hill,  where  it 
cut  out  its  course  close  to  the  foot  of  the 
mountain  —  a  dangerous  position,  with  the 
rocky  barriers  on  one  side  and  the  railroad 
on  the  outer  edge  —  a  hundred  feet  below. 

Less  than  a  mile  away  was  another  wall 
of  mountains,  at  whose  foot  the  river  ran 
like  a  hem  to  the  great  skirt  of  green.  In 
the  valley  between,  rose  the  smoke  and  noise 
from  the  great  railroad  shops  where  hun- 
dreds of  men  worked  day  after  day,  and 
year  after  year,  to  keep  the  engines  and  cars 
ready  to  carry  their  great  traffic  of  lives 
and  freight. 

The  stir  and  bustle  of  this  view  did  not 
please  her.  Her  people  had  been  quiet, 
rural  folk,  and  from  them  she  inherited  a 
taste  for  the  old  homestead  and  pastoral  life. 

There  had  been  a  large  family  of  them, 
but  one  by  one  they  had  gone  their  way, 
until  she  alone  kept  up  the  old  place.  She 
had  not  found  her  life  a  lonely  one,  for  she 


6        THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

had  had  no  scenes  of  gayety  with  which  to 
compare  it.  She  had  attended  the  country 
school  until  she  had  conquered  the  " large" 
arithmetic,  the  "big"  geography,  and  had 
worked  a  few  examples  in  algebra.  She 
had  had  her  season  of  sleigh-rides,  spelling 
schools,  and  taffy  pulls.  But  when  she  had 
reached  the  twenties  and  was  yet  Miss 
Debby,  she  dropped  from  this  social  life, 
for  it  was  the  custom  of  this  country-side 
that  a  spinster  of  twenty-five  should  be 
retired  from  active  social  life. 

With  the  sleigh-rides  and  taffy  pulls  and 
spelling-bees  went  her  smart  dressing  and 
fluffy  hair  and  little  fixings  of  the  toilette 
dear  to  the  heart  of  a  belle. 

She  had  but  passed  her  twenty-fifth  birth- 
day, yet  to  an  indifferent  observer  she  ap- 
peared much  older,  for  although  her  hair 
was  as  brown  and  satiny  as  the  inside  of 
the  ripe  chestnut  burr,  and  her  face  as 
unwrinkled  as  a  child's,  the  rigid  straight 
lines  of  her  dressing  brought  into  relief  all 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER         7 

the  angles  of  her  form  and  features,  robbing 
her  of  every  girlish  grace. 

After  a  few  minutes  of  contemplation, 
she  aroused  herself  to  the  present.  "Stand- 
ing so  when  my  tubs  are  not  emptied  and 
the  wash-house  is  yet  to  be  scrubbed!" 

Turning  about  quickly,  she  walked  briskly 
back  to  the  house.  A  neighbor  sat  on  the 
wash-house  steps,  a  folded  newspaper  in 
her  hand. 

"Why,  Kate  Bowerman!  how  did  you 
ever  slip  in  without  my  hearing  you?  Why 
didn't  you  call?" 

"I  wasn't  in  a  hurry.  I  peeped  in  here, 
and,  seeing  your  tubs  standing,  supposed  you 
were  hanging  out.  You're  late  to-day.  I  was 
all  hung  out  and  scrubbed  out  an  hour  ago." 

"I'd  been,  too,  but  I  washed  some  spreads, 
and  the  blankets  that  were  on  my  bed. 
Blankets  take  so  many  rinsings.  But,  some- 
how, this  summer  the  nights  get  so  cold  I 
can't  sleep  comfortably  without  them. 
There's  always  a  dampness  from  the  river." 


8         THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"You  coddle  yourself  too  much.  The 
nights  have  been  none  too  cool.  Blankets 
from  the  first  day  of  October  to  the  first  of 
May  is  my  rule,  and  I  keep  to  it.  Blankets 
in  one  day  and  out  the  next  hain't  my  way. 
It's  too  slack." 

"I'm  going  by  no  rules  as  long  as  the 
weather  don't.  It's  reasonable  to  suppose 
the  nights  will  be  at  least  comfortable  from 
the  last  of  May  to  the  middle  of  September. 
That's  what  folks  used  to  count  on.  But 
there's  no  telling  any  more.  As  long  as 
the  weather  has  no  laws,  I  hain't  having 
none  about  using  blankets." 

Her  guest  laughed.  Yet  the  result  of  her 
facial  contortions  could  scarcely  be  graced 
by  such  a  name.  It  was  a  mirthless  cackle 
in  which  ill  humors  and  ugly  spirit  were 
manifest.  Her  voice  was  sharp  and  so 
accustomed  to  ill-natured  speech  that  even 
her  well-meant  words  savored  of  malice  and 
ill  feeling. 

Debby  went  on  about  her  work,  emptying 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER         9 

her  tubs  as  she  continued  the  conversation. 
She  was  wondering  why  Mrs.  Bowerman 
had  seen  fit  to  run  over  at  this  unusual  hour 
of  the  day.  She  knew  that  some  reason  lay 
behind  the  visit;  it  was  not  mere  chance. 
She  saw  the  paper  in  her  caller's  hand,  and 
rightfully  supposed  it  held  some  relation  to 
the  visit,  but  she  would  not  have  asked  for 
the  world. 

Mrs.  Bowerman  chatted  of  indifferent 
matters  for  some  moments,  and  then  said 
abruptly,  "I  suppose  you  are  wondering 
why  I  ran  over  Monday  morning?" 

"No,  I'm  not." 

"You  seemed  so  absent-minded,  I  took  it 
for  granted  you  were  trying  to  think  why  I 
came." 

"I  was  wondering  whether  I'd  have  fruit- 
cake or  raisin  pie  for  dinner.  I'm  a  little 
uncertain  about  the  fruit-cake.  I'm  afraid 
it  won't  hold  out  until  I  make  more." 

"Shouldn't  put  it  on  for  every  Tom,  Dick, 
and  Harry  that  comes  in.  I  set  my  table 


10       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

according  to  the  people  that  eat  at  it. 
There's  only  a  few  get  fruit-cake." 

Now,  deep  in  her  heart,  Debby  Alden 
approved  of  such  theories,  but  never  had 
she  carried  them  into  practice.  It  was  not 
her  way  to  commend  any  of  the  theories 
or  plans  of  Mrs.  Bowerman.  She  hung  up 
her  tubs  in  silence  and  took  down  the  mop 
from  its  place  on  the  wall  of  the  wash-house. 

Mrs.  Bowerman,  feeling  that  nothing 
could  be  gained  by  further  reticence,  held 
out  the  folded  paper,  saying,  as  she  did  so, 
"I  saw  an  item  in  last  night's  paper  which 
I  knew  you'd  prick  up  your  ears  at." 

"You  talk  as  though  I  was  a  badly  broken 
colt." 

"It's  about  a  friend  of  yours."  Here 
Mrs.  Bowerman  gave  her  malicious  laugh. 
"It  says  that  Doctor  James  K.  Baker  has 
gone  to  Europe  for  a  three  months'  visit. 
There's  a  long  piece  about  him.  It  seems 
that  he's  been  overworking,  and  his  con- 
gregation gave  him  this  trip  as  a  present." 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       11 

"That's  nice."  Debby's  lips  were  closed 
tightly  as  she  made  a  strenuous  effort  to 
insert  the  cleaning  rag  into  the  clasps  of 
the  mop. 

"It's  too  bad  you  and  him  didn't  make  it 
up.  It  would  have  been  a  nice  trip  for  you. 
Of  course,  his  congregation  wouldn't  have 
sent  one  without  the  other." 

"You're  talking  about  something  you 
don't  know  anything  about,  Kate.  You've 
bothered  yourself  a  good  deal  about  me 
lately  with  your  wondering  and  guessing. 
Now  I'll  tell  you  the  truth  right  here,  and 
it  will  save  you  asking  any  more  questions. 
Jim  Baker  and  I  never  quarrelled.  We  never 
had  anything  to  make  up  about.  He  took 
me  sleigh-riding  a  few  times  when  we  went 
to  school.  That  was  all.  He  came  here 
to  visit  after  he'd  gone  through  college. 
But  why  shouldn't  he?  If  he  hadn't  have 
come,  the  folks  would  all  have  been  saying 
that  he  was  thinking  himself  better  than  the 
rest  of  us,  and  had  slighted  us  dreadfully. 


12      THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Jim  Baker  and  I  are  as  good  friends  as  we 
always  were,  and  there's  not  a  man  in  this 
country  I  admire  as  much.  I'm  glad  he's 
getting  along.  I  hope  he  always  will.  He's 
worked  hard  for  all  he's  getting,  and  he 
deserves  every  bit  of  it.  Take  that  home 
with  you,  Kate.  It  will  set  you  thinking 
and  give  you  something  to  talk  about." 

By  this  time  her  mop  had  been  properly 
adjusted,  and  she  fell  to  work  upon  the 
floor  with  an  unnecessary  expenditure  of 
energy. 

Kate  stuck  out  her  tongue  —  a  little 
mannerism  of  hers  which  was  far  from 
pleasing  —  and  laughed  scornfully. 

"What  a  fuss  to  make  over  nothing.  I 
say  something  jokingly,  and  you  fly  at  me 
as  though  I  had  been  insulting  you.  There 
must  be  something  back  of  all  this,  or 
else  you  wouldn't  be  so  touchy.  You  must 
feel  hard  on  the  subject,  or  you  wouldn't 
fly  up  so."  She  arose  from  the  doorway 
and  made  ready  to  depart.  But  before 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       13 

going  she  delivered  one  of  the  old  saws 
of  the  locality,  laughing  scornfully  as  she 
did  so.  "You  know,  Deb,  what  your 
own  grandmother  used  to  say,  'It's  the 
" healed"  place  that  won't  bear  touching.'" 
She  threw  the  paper  toward  Debby.  "I'll 
leave  the  paper.  You  might  want  to  read 
about  Jim." 

"Don't  bother.  I  know  he's  getting 
along,  and  I'm  not  much  given  to  par- 
ticulars." 

She  kept  close  to  her  work  with  the  mop, 
and  not  so  much  as  turned  her  head  toward 
the  departing  guest. 

"Well,  I'll  leave  it,  anyhow.  You  might 
think  better  of  it."  With  this  speech  she 
turned  and  made  her  way  under  the  or- 
chard trees  to  the  lane  which  led  to  her  own 
home. 

Debby  worked  steadily  until  there  was 
no  chance  of  her  visitor's  returning.  Then, 
laying  aside  her  mop,  she  took  up  the  paper 
and  read  each  word  of  the  article  which  told 


14       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

of  the  departure  of  Doctor  James  Baker  for 
Europe,  and  which  lauded  his  work  above 
other  men  of  his  day. 

Then  she  folded  and  laid  the  paper  away, 
and  went  back  to  her  work.  It  was  not 
the  Alden  way  to  day-dream  or  to  grieve 
over  what  had  gone,  and  Debby,  in  whom 
all  the  strongest  traits  of  her  ancestors 
were  epitomized,  kept  her  emotions  well 
under  control.  She  had  not  acknowledged 
to  herself  how  much  of  her  interest  had 
been  centred  in  the  boy,  Jim,  of  her  school 
days.  They  had  been  brought  up  together, 
sharing  in  common  each  thought  and  pleas- 
ure. Then  Jim  had  gone  away  for  six 
years.  When  he  came  back  with  the  ways 
of  college  and  city,  Debby  was  constrained 
and  shy.  She  felt  ill  at  ease  in  his  presence, 
and  treated  him  with  a  cold  courtesy  which 
he  had  misunderstood. 

She  had  not  done  herself  justice.  She 
had  hidden  beneath  her  frigid  manner 
all  the  noble  traits  of  her  character.  She 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER       15 

was  brusque  and  scornful  of  tongue,  and 
awkward  in  manner. 

Jim  had  lingered  about  the  old  place  for 
several  weeks,  and  then  went  off.  He 
had  written  once  to  her,  a  letter  of  courtesy, 
merely,  for  performing  her  duties  of  hostess 
in  the  home  while  he  had  been  guest.  That 
had  been  eight  years  before,  when  she  was 
almost  eighteen  and  he  twenty-five.  She 
had  heard  of  his  successes.  But  she  would 
not  acknowledge  to  herself  or  to  her  little 
world  that  Jim  Baker  held  a  place  in  her 
life  or  her  thoughts. 

There  were  neither  regrets  nor  tears  as 
she  set  about  her  work  in  the  preparation  of 
dinner.  She  ate  alone,  but  prepared  each 
meal  as  though  there  were  others  to  partake 
of  it.  She  had  no  tolerance  for  those  peaky, 
delicate  women  who  pieced  instead  of  eating 
three  substantial  meals  each  day.  She  pre- 
pared her  dinner  of  meat  and  vegetables, 
with  a  piece  of  pie  for  dessert.  She  was 
about  to  sit  down  when  there  came  to  her 


16      THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

ears  the  sound  of  footsteps  upon  the  kitchen 
porch.  A  caller  at  this  hour  was  unusual. 
The  tin  pedler  in  search  of  rags  and  old 
iron  was  the  only  one  who  timed  his  visits 
at  the  midday  meal.  He  had  made  his 
rounds  but  the  week  before,  so  it  could  not 
be  he.  She  waited  an  instant  and  then 
went  to  the  door,  flinging  it  wide  open  with 
her  characteristic  vehemence. 

The  sight  which  met  her  eyes  was  not 
one  to  cause  alarm.  A  young  woman,  ex- 
hausted by  a  long  walk  and  the  burden  of 
a  year-old  child  in  her  arms,  was  sitting  on 
the  porch  steps  to  rest.  She  was  older  than 
Debby  Alden,  but  so  plump  and  round  of 
face  and  body  that  she  seemed  but  a 
child.  She  was  neatly  dressed  in  a  dark 
skirt  and  white  shirt-waist.  Her  eyes  were 
large  and  dark,  while  her  dark  hair  waved 
and  curled  about  her  face.  Her  skin  was 
dark,  but  clear.  She  made  a  beautiful 
picture  as  she  leaned  against  the  white 
pillars  of  the  porch,  with  the  soft  spray 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER       17 

of  the  wild  cucumber  vines  swaying  about 
her. 

The  child  lay  asleep  in  her  arms.  Debby 
Alden  had  been  the  youngest  child  in  her 
own  family,  and  knew  little  of  the  ways  of 
children.  She  had  not  cared  for  them. 
The  daily  sacrifices  and  duties  of  a  mother 
were  a  surprise  to  her.  She  had  often 
wondered  how  any  woman  could  give  up 
her  own  comfort  and  convenience  for  the 
welfare  of  a  child.  It  was  not  strange, 
then,  that  the  beautiful  child  made  no  ap- 
peal to  her.  Her  quick  glance  rested  for 
a  moment  upon  the  woman  and  the  babe, 
and  in  an  instant  had  grasped  each  detail 
of  face  and  dress.  The  woman  at  once 
began  an  explanation.  She  had  come  on 
the  train  which  had  passed  an  hour  before. 
She  had  mistook  the  trainman's  words. 
She  thought  the  train  had  reached  the 
station,  and  she  had  gotten  ofif.  She  had 
found  that  the  town  was  fully  three  miles 
distant  and  that  the  train  had  stopped 


18       THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

merely  for  orders.  She  had  no  wish  to  dis- 
turb the  lady,  but  the  road  was  so  hot  and 
dusty  and  the  sleeping  child  had  been  very 
heavy.  She  wished  to  rest  but  a  moment. 
If  the  lady  could  give  them  a  little  to  eat,  - 
a  piece  of  bread  for  herself  and  a  glass  of 
milk  for  the  child,  —  she  would  be  glad  to 
pay  anything  within  reason. 

Debby  Alden  reared  back  her  head 
haughtily.  "The  Aldens  have  not  yet 
reached  the  place  where  they  set  a  price  for 
a  piece  of  bread  to  a  stranger.  Come  in." 
She  flung  wide  the  door.  Then,  with  native 
hospitality,  she  took  the  child  in  her  own 
arms  and  carried  her  into  the  darkened  liv- 
ing-room, where  she  laid  her  upon  the  couch. 

"She  can  have  her  sleep  out,"  she  said, 
returning  to  the  kitchen.  "She  can  have 
her  milk  when  she  gets  awake.  You  can't 
go  on  in  the  heat  of  the  day." 

"But  I  must.  I  mean  to  take  the  flyer 
going  north.  I  shouldn't  have  missed  one 
this  morning." 


THE   CHILD   LAY   ASLEEP   IN   HER  ARMS. — Page    17. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       19 

"There's  no  north-going  flyer  until  after 
five  o'clock.  It's  about  a  mile  and  a  half 
to  the  station." 

"I  thought  there  was  one  at  three." 

"There  is,  but  that  goes  east.  It  comes 
from  Buffalo.  That's  why  it's  called  the 
Buffalo  flyer.  You've  time  to  cool  off  and 
escape  the  heat.  The  dinner's  on.  I  was 
about  to  sit  down  when  I  heard  your  step. 
You'd  better  sit  here.  You'll  not  be  so 
near  the  stove.  I  don't  generally  heat  up 
this  stove,  but  I  was  hungry  for  huckle- 
berry pie,  and  the  shanty  stove  doesn't 
bake  well.  It  needs  to  be  cleaned  out." 

She  pushed  a  chair  toward  her  visitor, 
who  grew  profuse  in  her  thanks.  Her  voice 
was  rich  and  full,  with  an  accent  unlike 
any  which  Debby  Alden  had  ever  heard. 
To  her,  all  who  did  not  speak  English  as 
she  spoke  it  were  foreigners.  In  this  class 
she  at  once  placed  her  stranger  guest,  whose 
mellow  liquid  tones  were  music  in  themselves. 

"French,"  said  Debby  to  herself.    "I've 


20       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

been  told  that  they  have  such  a  soft,  pretty 
way  of  speaking." 

Her  guest  was  eating  heartily.  Debby 
passed  her  the  platter  of  meat.  "Help 
yourself,"  she  said,  with  great  open-hearted- 
ness.  "  You'll  have  a  walk  before  you,  and 
a  long  journey  besides.  You  must  eat  if 
you  want  strength  to  go  on." 

The  woman  reached  forth  her  hand  for 
the  dish.  The  act  brought  her  long  taper 
fingers  into  prominence. 

Debby  Alden  started.  In  the  hand  she 
recognized  the  racial  marks  and  standing 
of  the  woman  before  her. 

The  prejudices  and  dislikes  of  genera- 
tions of  Aldens  came  to  the  front.  Draw- 
ing herself  up  rigidly,  she  arose  from  the 
table  and  let  her  guest  finish  her  meal  alone. 


CHAPTER  II 

rflHE  stranger  finished  her  dinner  in 
-•-  silence.  She  may  have  understood 
the  thoughts  which  had  flashed  through 
the  mind  of  her  hostess.  It  was  evident 
that  she  was  used  to  such  treatment  as 
was  accorded  her  here. 

The  child  awakened,  and  she  hurried  to 
it,  crying  out:  "Mammy's  coming.  Don't 
cry,  honey." 

Debby  brought  out  a  pitcher  of  morning's 
milk  and  cut  a  generous  slice  from  the  loaf 
of  bread. 

"You  had  better  feed  her  now,"  she  said. 
"Perhaps  you  had  better  take  a  bottle  of 
milk  with  you  if  you  have  a  long  journey. 
The  milk  bought  in  cities  isn't  always  as 
pure  as  it  might  be." 

"It  would  be  so  much  trouble —  "  began 
the  woman;  "and  you  are  tired." 
21 


22       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"What  if  I  am?  Being  tired  has  harmed 
no  one  yet,  as  far  as  I  know."  She  was 
already  rinsing  a  small  bottle  and  filling  it. 
"I'll  set  it  on  the  ice  on  the  porch.  You 
can  get  it  when  you  are  ready." 

The  child  was  devouring  its  bowl  of 
bread  and  milk  with  a  good  healthy  ap- 
petite. Debby  could  not  but  look  at  it. 
The  child  was  beautiful,  with  soft,  dark 
eyes  fringed  with  long  lashes,  and  soft,  wav- 
ing hair,  which  clung  in  rings  to  the  white 
forehead. 

The  guests  lingered  until  the  heat  of  the 
midday  had  passed.  Debby  made  ready 
a  lunch  for  the  child,  and  hastened  them 
on  their  way. 

"If  you  cross  the  tracks  up  there  by  the 
wagon  road,"  she  said,  indicating  the  end 
of  the  yard,  "you  will  have  better  walking, 
and  it  won't  be  so  long." 

"But  the  trains —  "  began  the  woman, 
timidly. 

"There's  no  danger.    There's  no  shifting 


THE   COMING   OF   HESTER       23 

now,  as  you  can  see.  They're  only  empty 
box  cars  that  are  standing  on  the  siding. 
The  regular  trains  come  in  about  five  o'clock, 
and  then  there's  freights  all  night  long. 
I've  lived  here  all  my  life,  and  I've  seen 
precious  little  shifting  this  time  in  the  day." 

The  woman  took  up  the  child  and  set  out 
for  town.  Debby  Alden  went  with  her  to 
the  gate,  and  then  turned  to  take  in  the 
clothes  on  the  line.  A  grocery  wagon  was 
driving  up  with  her  supplies.  She  told  the 
man  to  put  them  on  the  kitchen  table  while 
she  gathered  together  the  clothes  and  took 
down  the  line. 

The  man  did  as  he  was  requested,  and  then 
turned  his  team  toward  town.  Debby  had 
about  finished  her  work,  when  she  heard 
the  whistle  of  the  east-bound  flyer. 

"I  declare !  I  forgot  all  about  that  train," 
she  said  aloud.  "But  'twon't  be  no  differ- 
ence. If  she's  any  kind  of  a  walker,  she'll 
be  a  considerable  distance  in  town  by  this 
time." 


24       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Despite  her  words,  an  uneasy  feeling  was 
with  her.  She  walked  to  the  front  fence 
and  looked  up  the  road.  The  clothes-line 
was  wound  about  her  arm  from  thumb  to 
elbow. 

She  saw  the  groceryman  whip  his  horses 
and  tear  down  the  road  at  a  reckless  rate. 
The  flyer  had  entered  the  yard,  but,  con- 
trary to  custom,  was  moving  slowly  back. 

Quick  as  a  flash  Debby  Alden  grasped 
what  had  happened.  She  turned  from  the 
yard  and  ran  down  the  hot,  dusty  road, 
regardless  of  heat  and  dirt.  She  came  to 
the  crossing  almost  as  soon  as  the  train 
reached  there.  The  trainmea  were  bending 
over  the  body  of  the  woman,  which  had  been 
hurled  against  the  slope  of  the  mountain. 
She  was  past  help. 

" She's  a  stranger  hereabouts,"  said  some 
one.  "I  know  every  one  that  lives  here, 
but  I  never  saw  her  before.  Where  shall 
we  take  her?" 

Here  Debby  Alden  pushed  to  the  front. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       25 

"Take  her  to  my  house/'  she  said.  "It's 
my  fault  that  she's  dead.  I've  killed  her. 
Bring  her  along." 

Some  had  a  stretcher  in  readiness.  Debby 
waited  until  all  was  ready,  and  then  started 
to  lead  the  way.  She  stopped  suddenly 
and  looked  about  her.  "But  the  child! 
There  was  a  child!  Where  is  it?" 

"She  threw  something  from  her  just  as 
the  train  struck,"  said  the  engineer.  "I 
don't  know  what.  I  knew  I  couldn't  stop, 
—  we  were  going  so  fast,  —  so  I  shut  my 
eyes.  I  didn't  want  to  see  the  end." 

The  others  were  looking  about  for  the 
child.  They  found  her  deep  in  the  clump 
of  elder  bushes,  where  she  had  been  thrown. 
She  was  quite  unharmed,  and  was  reaching 
out  to  clutch  the  clusters  of  bloom  about 
her. 

Debby  Alden  seized  her  from  the  train- 
man's arms  and  looked  her  over.  "There's 
not  a  scratch  on  her!  It  was  Providence 
that  she  lighted  on  the  bushes." 


26       THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

With  the  child  in  her  arms,  she  started 
homeward,  and  the  men  who  had  gathered 
about  took  up  their  burden  and  followed 
her. 

"You'd  better  send  Doctor  Heins  down, 
and  the  undertaker,"  she  called  to  the 
groceryman,  as  he  drove  away. 

When  she  entered  her  home,  she  de- 
posited the  baby  on  the  couch  and  set  about 
to  assist  the  men.  She  brought  out  her 
best  linen  and  cared  for  the  dead  woman 
as  though  she  was  near  kin. 

The  baby  cried,  and  she  cared  for  it.  The 
men  went  on  about  their  own  affairs,  except 
two,  who  awaited  the  coming  of  the  doctor. 
Debby  kept  busy  from  room  to  room,  and  all 
the  while  her  mind  was  filled  with  thoughts 
of  the  peculiar  position  in  which  she  was 
placed.  She  questioned  how  much  of  her 
knowledge  would  best  be  kept  to  herself, 
and  how  much  it  was  right  and  proper  for 
her  to  tell. 

The  doctor  came,  and,  close  at  his  heels, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       27 

—  for  the  news  of  the  accident  had  taken 
wings,  —  was  Mrs.  Bowerman  with  her  baby 
in  her  arms,  and  the  other  women  of 
the  neighborhood,  some  curious  and  some 
actuated  in  their  coming  by  a  desire  to  be 
helpful. 

They  sat  about  in  the  kitchen  and  living- 
room.  Debby  herself  went  with  the  doctor 
into  the  parlor,  where  the  woman  lay.  Each 
woman  was  curious  and  anxious,  and  wished 
to  see  the  stranger.  But  Debby  did  not 
invite  them  to  enter  the  front  room,  and  they 
stood  so  in  awe  of  her  that  they  could  not 
venture  of  their  own  accord. 

Doctor  Heins  was  a  genial  little  Dutch- 
man, with  shoulders  hunched  up,  and  blink- 
ing, near-sighted  eyes.  He  examined  the 
dead  woman. 

"I  knew  there  was  no  use  of  your  com- 
ing," said  Debby.  "She  was  quite  dead 
when  the  men  took  her  up.  But  the  folks 
would  be  sure  to  say  something  if  I  hadn't 
sent  for  you." 


28       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"Yes,  it's  better  to  have  a  doctor  here, 
though  I'm  really  of  no  use.  It's  a  case  for 
the  coroner.  But  I'll  attend  to  that,  Debby." 
He  had  caught  her  expression  of  perplexity. 
"I've  done  it  before,  and  I'll  see  to  it  now. 
It  isn't  work  for  a  woman." 

He  was  bending  over  the  dead  woman, 
trying  to  discover  in  her  features  a  likeness 
to  some  one  he  knew. 

"She  was  certainly  a  fine-looking  woman. 
Have  you  any  idea  who  she  was  or  where 
she  was  going?" 

"She  came  from  a  distance,  and  she 
meant  to  go  a  long  way  off.  That's 
all  I  know.  I  didn't  ask  her  any  ques- 
tions, and  she  didn't  tell  me  of  her  own 
accord." 

Mechanically  the  doctor  took  the  woman's 
hand  in  his  own.  It  was  the  hand  of  one 
not  accustomed  to  work.  His  near-sighted 
eyes  blinked  nervously  as  he  examined  it. 

"This  is  unusual,"  he  said.  "She's  been 
dead  less  than  three  hours,  yet  mortification 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER       29 

has  set  in.  The  tops  of  her  finger  nails  are 
quite  purple." 

He  looked  up  at  Debby,  expecting  her  to 
reply.  But  she  had  moved  to  the  end  of 
the  room,  where  she  stood  by  the  door  as 
though  waiting  for  him  to  leave. 

"There  comes  Hallers,  now;  I  hear  the 
sound  of  wheels."  She  opened  the  door 
and  passed  into  the  living-room,  and  the 
doctor  followed.  She  knew  that  her  neigh- 
bors were  waiting  to  hear  her  story.  She 
did  not  wish  to  discuss  it,  but  she  thought 
it  best  to  tell  them  enough  to  satisfy  them. 
With  this  purpose  in  mind  she  passed  into 
the  kitchen  and  became  the  centre  of  the 
group  gathered  there.  One  woman  arose  and 
pushed  her  into  a  chair,  saying,  as  she  did  so, 
' '  There,  sit  down !  I  should  think  you'd  be  all 
wrought  up  and  of  a  tremble,  Debby  Alden  I" 

"Well,  I'm  not,"  she  replied.  "This  all 
came  so  sudden  that  I  haven't  had  time 
to  be  in  a  tremble.  I've  had  no  time  to 
think  of  myself." 


30       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"They  say  that  she  stopped  here,"  said 
a  shrill-voiced  little  woman  by  the  window. 
"Did  you  know  her,  Debby?  Seeing  that 
she  was  here  and  you  took  her  in,  I  thought 
maybe  you  knew  her." 

"No,  I  didn't.  She  was  walking  toward 
the  station."  Then  she  repeated  the  in- 
cidents of  the  morning,  omitting  no  detail. 
Her  listeners  sat  breathless,  drinking  in 
each  word  of  her  story.  There  were  ex- 
clamations of  surprise,  and  sighs  suggestive 
of  their  regret  at  the  sad  turn  of  affairs. 
Now  and  then  Kate  Bowerman's  nervous, 
hysterical  laugh  rang  over  all;  and  the 
little  child  lay  in  the  living-room  and  gurgled 
and  laughed,  unconscious  of  the  tragedy 
close  at  hand. 

"What  kind  of  a  woman  did  she  appear 
to  be?  Did  she  look  as  though  she  might 
be  some  one?"  It  was  Kate  Bowerman 
who  asked  the  question.  Debby  Alden  knew 
what  she  meant.  Throughout  the  valley 
the  old  residents  rated  family  high.  To 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER      31 

say  that  he  belonged  to  "good  stock"  was 
the  highest  compliment  they  ever  paid  to 
any  man. 

Debby  evaded  a  direct  answer.  "  She 
seemed  able  to  pay  her  way  and  was  well- 
dressed.  She  was  not  a  bad-looking  woman. 
I  know  you'll  all  say  that  when  you  come 
to  look  at  her." 

"What  sort  of  a  spoken  woman  was 
she?"  asked  the  nervous  shrill-voiced 
woman  sitting  near  the  window.  The 
women  were  all  talking  at  once,  expressing 
themselves  as  to  the  possible  identity  and 
destination  of  the  stranger,  but  the  voice 
of  this  one  rose  above  all. 

Debby  Alden  hesitated.  She  was  one 
who  spoke  the  truth  even  to  the  merest 
detail.  She  wondered  at  herself  that  she 
now  had  a  desire  to  keep  something  back. 
It  may  have  been  that  telling  ill  of  the 
dead  restrained  her. 

"She  was  as  nicely  spoken  a  woman  as 
you'd  want  to  hear,  although  she  had  an 


32       THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

odd  way  of  saying  her  words.  She  must 
have  come  from  far  off,  for  no  one  about 
here  talks  any  way  like  her." 

"A  foreigner,  likely,"  said  the  shrill- 
voiced  woman. 

"Yes,  she  wasn't  an  American.  I'm  sure 
of  that,"  said  Debby. 

"Do  you  think  she  might  be  German? 
There's  a  German  settlement  in  the  eastern 
part  of  the  State.  Did  she  talk  anything 
like  the  help  that  Mrs.  Stevenson  had? 
Her  girl  Ricka  was  Dutch." 

Debby  shook  her  head.  When  she  spoke, 
it  was  with  her  usual  vehemence. 

" Dutch!  She  talked  no  more  like  Ricka 
than  I  do.  Her  words  were  soft  and  full, 
and  her  voice  was  low.  Mine  sounded  like 
bellowing  alongside  of  it." 

"French.  They  talk  so,"  said  Mrs. 
Bowerman.  "They're  not  a  bad-looking 
set  as  a  whole,  and  they're  neat.  You  said 
this  woman  looked  trim  and  neat.  Had 
she  dark  eyes  and  hair?" 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER       33 

"Very.    Black.    I've  never  seen  blacker." 

"Likely  French."  She  arose,  and,  passing 
into  the  living-room,  brought  out  the  child. 
It  went  from  the  arms  of  one  to  another, 
who  examined  it  critically  until  each  detail 
of  dress  and  feature  was  known. 

The  child's  dress  was  sheer  and  fine  and 
without  adornment  of  any  kind  except  the 
daintiest  bits  of  handwork.  It  bore  the 
marks  of  the  best  care  and  taste. 

The  little  woman  by  the  window  held  it 
close  to  her  for  an  instant.  "Poor  child," 
she  said,  and  her  voice  came  down  the 
scale  until  her  words  were  scarcely  audible. 
"You're  laughing  and  cooing  now,  for  you 
don't  know  what  it  means  to  lose  a  mother." 

But  her  tenderness  was  swept  before  the 
clamor  of  the  others'  tongues. 

The  women  lingered  until  called  home 
by  household  duties.  Several  came  back  in 
the  evening,  bringing  their  husbands,  and 
together  they  sat  with  Debby  the  long 
night  through,  it  being  considered  a  show 


34       THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

of  disrespect  for  any  one  to  sleep  in  the 
house  where  the  dead  lay. 

The  third  day  after  the  accident,  the 
woman  was  buried,  and  Debby  Alden,  who 
censured  herself  for  advising  the  stranger 
to  cross  the  tracks  at  the  danger  point, 
paid  the  funeral  expenses,  and  saw  to  it  that 
she  was  not  laid  in  the  plot  reserved  for  the 
friendless  dead.  The  question  of  caring  for 
the  child  now  came  up.  Debby  was  willing 
to  give  it  a  home  until  the  relatives  could 
be  found.  A  notice  of  the  accident  with 
all  the  details  was  published  far  and  wide. 

But  by  Debby 's  holding  back  a  little  of 
her  knowledge,  a  false  coloring  was  given 
to  these  newspaper  reports.  They  described 
the  woman  as  French.  The  accounts  left 
no  doubt  in  the  minds  of  the  reader  that 
the  unfortunate  stranger  was  the  parent  of 
the  child.  These  reports  were  copied  far 
and  wide.  More  than  one  person  to  whom 
the  child  was  dear,  glanced  at  the  head- 
lines and  then  read  eagerly,  only  to  toss  the 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       35 

paper  aside,  having  no  vital  interest  in  this 
French  mother  and  her  babe. 

Several  weeks  passed,  and  the  child  was 
yet  with  Debby  Alden.  This  additional 
care,  with  the  housework,  the  cow  and 
chickens,  kept  her  busy.  But  the  child 
had  but  one  change  of  clothing,  and  she 
set  to  work  to  make  others  for  it. 

Such  was  her  sense  of  duty  that  she 
selected  for  this  little  stranger  the  same 
material  and  style  of  garment  that  she 
would  have  done  had  the  child  been  her 
own.  She  was  awkward  in  the  use  of  the 
needle.  So  she  studied  each  detail  of  the 
little  dress  which  the  child  wore,  and  copied 
it  as  closely  as  she  was  able.  The  rolled 
hems  were  beyond  her  comprehension,  yet 
not  beyond  her  conquering.  When  she  found 
that  she  could  not  make  the  hems  in  the  new 
dresses  as  they  were  in  the  old,  she  walked 
into  town  and  called  upon  Miss  Richards. 

This  Miss  Richards  was  a  spinster  of 
middle  age  who  had  opened  a  free  kinder- 


36       THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

garten  for  the  mere  love  of  the  work,  and 
who  did  needlework  after  the  fashion  of 
gentlewomen  of  generations  passed.  She 
was  a  refined,  wholesome  woman,  who  had 
spent  her  life  among  the  beautiful  things 
of  the  world. 

She  took  up  Debby's  work.  "A  rolled 
hem  is  what  you  wish,"  she  said.  "It  is 
easily  done  when  once  you  know  how  to 
start  it."  She  set  Debby  right,  and  Debby, 
who  was  neither  dull  nor  lazy,  carried  the 
baby  and  work-bag  home,  where  she  sat  up 
half  the  night  until  she  had  made  a  hem  as 
smooth  and  fine  as  a  cord. 

She  was  not  alone  during  these  first 
weeks  with  the  baby.  The  curious-minded 
of  her  neighbors  came  often  to  see  her. 
Mrs.  Bowerman  was  among  these.  She  was 
a  dozen  years  older  than  Debby  Alden. 
She  had  married  late  in  life,  and  had  but 
one  child,  a  puny  little  daughter,  but  a  few 
months  older  than  the  little  visitor  at  the 
Alden  home. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       37 

Mrs.  Bowerman  was  bitter  toward  all  the 
world  and  critical  of  all  that  came  within 
her  range,  except  Mary,  her  own  little 
child. 

" Don't  she  walk  yet?"  she  asked  one 
day,  as  she  watched  the  baby  creep  about. 
"Why,  my  Mary  walked  everywhere  before 
she  was  as  old,  and  she  was  into  every- 
thing." 

"An  inheritance,  perhaps,"  said  Debby, 
grimly,  " — her  being  into  everything." 

At  every  point  Debby  met  her  criticism 
with  a  touch  of  sarcastic  wit.  From  early 
girlhood  days,  Kate  Bowerman  had  tried 
to  form  her  opinions  and  mark  out  her 
course  of  action;  but  Debby  would  have 
none  of  her.  It  was  not  that  Kate's  sugges- 
tions were  not  often  most  excellent,  but, 
as  Debby  expressed  herself,  "It  was  not  in 
the  Aldens  to  be  druv." 

She  had  not  thought  of  keeping  the 
strange  child  as  her  own,  until  Kate  Bower- 
man  touched  on  the  subject,  when  she  ran 


38       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

across  lots  one  afternoon  to  see  how  affairs 
at  the  Alden  home  were  moving  along. 

"Doctor  Heins  was  up  at  Earners'  last 
evening.  Grandmother  Earner  had  another 
one  of  her  spells,  and  I  ran  over  to  see  if  I 
could  help  Eliza  out.  When  the  old  lady 
got  easy,  we  fell  to  talking  of  this  tramp's 
child.  Doctor  Heins  said  he  knew  you'd 
end  in  keeping  it.  But  I  sent  him  off  with 
a  bee  in  his  bonnet.  'You  don't  know  the 
Aldens,'  I  said.  'They're  great  hands  for 
standing  by  their  own  flesh  and  blood, 
but  when  it  comes  to  giving  to  an  out- 
sider, they're  close.  If  some  of  the  child's 
own  folks  don't  turn  up  to  claim  her, 
you'll  see  her  sent  off  to  the  poorhouse. 
You  don't  know  the  Aldens  like  I  know 
them,  root  and  branch.'  That's  what  I 
told  him." 

While  she  was  talking,  Debby  kept  her 
needle  busy  on  some  little  petticoats  she 
was  making.  A  nervous  jerk  showed  as 
she  took  a  stitch.  Not  until  that  moment 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       39 

did  she  make  up  her  mind  what  to  do  with 
the  child. 

"It  looks  as  though  you  didn't  know 
them  as  well  as  you've  counted  on,"  she 
said.  "You  never  heard  tell  of  one  of  the 
Aldens  turning  a  stranger  from  his  door. 
Have  you?  I've  never  heard  of  them  doing 
that,  and  I  know  their  history  for  genera- 
tions back.  Debby  Alden  won't  be  the 
first  to  do  such  a  thing.  If  her  folks  don't 
come  to  claim  her,  she'll  stay  here." 

"But  what  will  you  call  her?  You  can't 
have  a  child  about  the  house  without  a 
name."  Kate  laughed  maliciously. 

"I'll  call  her  Alden.  It's  a  good  name. 
There's  never  been  no  shame  touched  it.  I'm 
the  last  of  my  folks,  and  I  mean  to  give  my 
name  to  this  child.  She'll  have  a  good  name. 
I  defy  any  one  to  say  a  word  against  it." 

Kate  sank  back  in  her  chair.  "Debby 
Alden!  You've  gone  crazy.  You're  gone 
clean  out  of  your  head.  You  don't  mean  — " 

"Yes,  I  do.    I  mean  to  call  her  Hester 


40       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Palmer  Alden,  after  my  own  mother.  I 
was  always  fond  of  the  name  Hester." 

"But  if  her  folks  should  come  and  take 
her  after  you've  had  her  and  grown  fond 
of  her !  A  baby  does  get  on  the  soft  side 
of  a  person,  say  what  you  will." 

"I  hain't  going  to  trust  to  chance.  I 
mean  to  make  her  mine  by  law.  The 
Aldens  never  were  slack  about  business. 
Not  one  of  them  even  died  without  having 
his  will  drawn  up  and  signed  years  before 
it  was  needed;  and  I  don't  intend  to  be 
the  first  to  leave  affairs  to  chance.  I  mean 
to  go  in  to  the  county-seat  and  have  the 
papers  drawn  up,  so  that  there  never  can 
be  any  trouble." 

She  carried  out  her  intentions  before  the 
week  had  gone.  She  took  the  unknown  child 
before  the  court,  and  returned  with  it  bearing 
the  name  of  Hester  Palmer  Alden ;  but,  with 
the  Alden  characteristic  of  keeping  their 
affairs  to  themselves,  she  told  no  one  except 
her  legal  adviser  what  she  had  done. 


CHAPTER  III 

T  ITTLE  HESTER  thrived  and  grew 
^-^^  after  a  new  and  remarkable  way  all 
her  own,  if  Debby's  statements  could  be 
taken  as  unbiassed  ones.  Never  before  in 
all  the  valley  had  a  child  lisped  her  first 
words  as  prettily  as  little  Hester  Alden; 
and  never  had  another  child  had  such  sweet, 
attractive  ways  as  she.  She  stole  into 
Debby  Alden's  heart  before  the  woman  was 
aware,  —  for  she  had  meant  only  to  do  her 
duty  by  the  child,  —  and  had  filled  it  to  the 
exclusion  of  all  else. 

Debby  began  to  study  the  manner  and 
dress  of  other  children  the  age  of  Hester. 
She  wished  Hester  to  stand  equal  to  any  of 
them.  Her  spare  moments  were  given  to 
making  dainty  '  garments  for  the  child. 
She  had  even  subscribed  for  a  magazine 
which  made  a  specialty  of  child-life,  and 
pored  over  its  pages  most  assiduously. 

41 


42       THE  COMING   OF  HESTER 

Before  Hester  was  three  years  old,  she 
had  accomplished  some  excellent  results, 
for  she  had  made  of  Aunt  Debby  an  excel- 
lent needlewoman,  and  throughout  the  coun- 
try-side had  given  her  a  reputation  of  being 
an  authority  on  the  proper  care  of  a  child. 
Aunt  Debby,  as  Hester  had  been  taught 
to  call  her,  had  fed,  bathed,  and  trained 
the  child  according  to  the  rules  of  the 
magazine.  The  results  were  all  that  could 
be  desired.  Hester  was  a  dimpled,  healthy, 
active  child,  as  happy  and  contented  as  one 
could  wish. 

Debby  Alden  was  uncertain  regarding 
the  age  of  the  child.  But  feeling  that  to  be 
without  a  birthday  was  quite  as  great  an 
affliction  as  being  without  a  name,  she  set 
aside  the  first  day  of  June,  and  taught 
Hester  to  look  upon  it  as  the  anniversary 
of  her  birth. 

"The  child  must  have  a  birthday,"  she 
explained  to  Miss  Richards,  who  was  the 
only  person  with  whom  she  discussed  her. 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER       43 

"I  took  the  first  of  June  because  those 
days  are  generally  warm  and  bright,  and  I 
mean  her  to  have  picnics  and  birthday 
cakes  whenever  she's  old  enough  to  under- 
stand." 

Hester's  fourth  birthday  was  celebrated 
by  a  picnic  in  the  orchard.  Again  had 
Debby  gone  by  the  book,  inviting  four  little 
girls  to  spend  the  afternoon  and  having  a 
cake  with  four  pink  candles  burning  on  it. 

Mary  Bowerman  was  among  the  guests. 
The  sight  of  the  birthday  cake  with  its  tiny 
lights  aroused  in  her  little  breast  the  same 
envious,  malicious  feelings  which  were  the 
striking  characteristics  of  her  mother.  The 
child  was  almost  five  years  old,  and  had 
never  had  such  a  fuss  made  over  her  birth- 
day as  Hester  was  having.  She  sat  down 
under  the  sweet  apple  tree,  quite  a  dis- 
tance from  the  others,  refusing  to  take  part 
in  the  festivities. 

Debby  was  spreading  the  table,  and 
called  to  her  to  come  and  play  Ring-a- 


44       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

round-Rosy  with  the  children.  But  she 
would  not.  Then  Jane  Orr;  dimpled,  pudgy, 
and  beaming  with  good-will  and  good- 
humor,  broke  from  the  circle  and  ran  to 
Mary  to  beg  her  to  take  part  in  the  fun. 

" You'd  better  come,"  she  whispered, 
"or  maybe  Miss  Debby  will  not  let  you 
come  to  the  table.  She's  made  ice  cream. 
I  saw  the  freezer  hid  under  the  berry  bushes. 
You  had  better  come,  Mary.  It's  the 
nicest  party  I  was  ever  at.  I  wish  I  was 
Hester  Alden  and  could  have  a  birthday 
cake  with  candles.  Don't  you  ?  Aren't  you 
glad  she  is  having  it?" 

"I'm  glad  she  has  something,  if  it  is  only 
a  party.  But  I'd  rather  have  a  father  and 
mother.  She  hasn't  either." 

Her  childish  voice  carried  far.  Little 
Hester  heard,  and  for  the  instant  was  on 
the  verge  of  tears.  She  had  never  thought 
of  that  before,  yet  it  was  quite  true,  she 
had  neither  father  nor  mother.  She  might 
have  cried,  had  not  Jane  cried  out,  "Yes, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       45 

but  she  has  her  Aunt  Debby,  and  she's 
better  than  lots  of  fathers  and  mothers." 

Hester  smiled  through  her  tears.  She 
did  have  Aunt  Debby.  That  was  true. 
Perhaps  if  little  girls  have  aunts,  they're 
not  supposed  to  have  mothers,  she  reasoned, 
and  for  the  time  was  satisfied  with  her  con- 
clusions. 

Debby  Alden  caught  the  import  of  Mary's 
speech.  She  was  not  vexed  with  the  child, 
for  she  saw  that  she  did  not  understand  the 
meaning  of  her  own  words.  She  had  caught 
the  idea  from  overhearing  the  speech  of 
her  elders  at  home. 

Debby  spoke  to  her  sharply.  "Come 
and  play  with  the  others,  Mary  Bowerman, 
and  don't  talk  about  things  that  a  little 
girl  can't  understand."  Then  she  turned 
about  and  whispered  so  that  the  others 
could  not  hear,  "If  I  ever  know  of  your 
speaking  to  Hester  about  having  no  father 
nor  mother,  I'll  shake  you  until  I  break 
every  bone  in  your  body."  Then  she  said 


46      THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

aloud:  "Now  run  and  play  with  the  others. 
Hester,  let  Mary  have  the  handkerchief  to 
drop.  She's  company." 

For  Mary's  speech  concerning  Hester, 
Debby  cared  little.  They  were  children. 
One  could  not  expect  much  of  babies  five 
years  old,  yet  Debby  realized  that  this 
speech  was  a  forerunner  of  many  which 
Hester  must  meet  either  from  the  malicious- 
minded  or  from  the  thoughtless.  She 
dreaded  the  time  when  Hester  must  be 
sent  to  school.  Yet  when  she  thought  of 
these  matters,  she  added  grimly,  "But  there's 
one  thing  not  one  of  them  can  ever  tell  her. 
I'm  glad  I  kept  a  close  tongue  in  my  head 
the  day  the  child's  mother  was  buried." 

She  watched  the  child  with  jealous  eye, 
fearful  always  that  she  would  show  some 
trace  of  her  parentage. 

"Blood's  bound  to  tell,"  she  would  say 
to  herself.  "I  know  that's  true,  and  I 
won't  try  to  deceive  myself  by  saying  it 
hain't;  but  if  there's  anything  in  training, 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER      47 

I'll  see  to  it  that  she's  trained  out  of  every 
low  trait  that  might  have  been  born  in  her." 

Miss  Richards  was  her  greatest  help  at 
this  time.  She  went  to  her  for  suggestions 
whenever  her  own  natural  wit  failed  her. 
The  high-bred,  cultivated  woman  was  always 
ready  to  help,  and  her  suggestions  were 
ones  that  Debby  Alden  knew  were  worthy 
of  acceptance. 

"Hester  is  over  to  Bowermans',"  she 
said  one  afternoon,  as  she  came  into  Miss 
Richards'  living-room.  "I've  come  to  an- 
other place  in  the  road  where  I  don't  know 
which  way  to  turn." 

"And  no  sign-boards  pointing  anywhere, 
Debby?"  Miss  Richards  asked  with  a  smile. 

"Not  a  one.  If  there  had  been,  I  would 
not  have  bothered  you  by  coming." 

"You  never  bother  me.  You  know  that, 
Debby.  I'm  interested  in  Hester's  welfare 
almost  as  much  as  you  are.  I  will  not  say 
as  much,  for  you  hold  a  place  in  her  life 
that  no  one  else  can  hold. 


48      THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"I  have  just  a  little  business  to  attend 
to  with  one  of  the  servants  who  is  going 
away  for  a  visit.  Excuse  me  until  I  speak 
with  her,  and  then  we'll  talk  of  Hester." 
She  left  the  room,  leaving  her  caller  alone 
in  an  easy-chair  by  the  window. 

Debby  looked  about  her,  taking  in  each 
detail  of  the  apartment.  Since  Hester  had 
been  with  her,  her  eyes  had  grown  keener. 
She  wished  the  child  to  have  the  best  things 
of  life,  and,  to  do  Debby  Alden  justice,  she 
had  the  proper  conception  of  what  the 
best  things  were.  She  wished  her  to  be 
honest  and  upright,  and  independent  in 
thought  and  action  —  Debby,  in  her  own 
heart,  despising  servility.  These  virtues 
were  the  backbone  of  character.  In  addi- 
tion to  these,  she  wished  Hester  to  be  gentle 
in  manner,  dainty  in  dress,  and  refined  in 
speech.  And  so  she  looked  about  her  and 
studied  the  environment  which  had  made 
Miss  Richards  what  she  was. 

There  were  soft  rich  rugs,  a  few  beautiful 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       49 

pictures,  the  open  piano  with  the  sheet 
music  upon  the  rack,  a  single  rose  in  a 
plain  little  vase;  an  easy-chair  or  two,  and 
the  work-basket  filled  with  exquisite  hand- 
work. 

She  had  scarcely  made  a  mental  inven- 
tory of  the  room,  when  Miss  Richards  re- 
turned. Taking  up  her  work,  she  sat  down 
near  her  caller. 

"Now,  Debby,  what  about  the  roads? 
Where  is  it  you  wished  to  go?" 

"I've  been  allowing  Hester  to  play  with 
Jane  Orr.  She's  a  nice-mannered  little 
girl.  Her  mother  trains  her  well,  and  I 
felt  that  Hester  would  'learn  something  by 
playing  with  her." 

"Yes,  did  she?" 

"Yes,  she  did,  and  she's  been  troubling 
me  ever  since.  You  see,  Miss  Richards, 
Mrs.  Orr  tells  Jane  stories.  I  don't  under- 
stand just  what  kind  they  are,  for  Hester 
gets  them  badly  mixed  up  when  she  repeats 
them  to  me.  But  anyhow,  they're  the 


50       THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

kind  that  children  like.  At  least,  Hester 
does,  and  she's  pestered  me  ever  since  to 
have  me  tell  her  stories  like  Jane's  mother 
tells." 

"It  would  be  all  right,  Debby.  The  very 
best  educators  of  the  day  believe  in  telling 
children  all  manner  of  myths  and  fairy 
tales.  I  cannot  see  that  it  would  do  the 
child  harm.  Since  she  asks  for  them,  I 
think  I  should  tell  her." 

Debby  smiled  grimly.  "That  wasn't 
what  troubled  me.  I  believe  in  telling 
them  to  her.  But  when  you  never  were 
told  any  yourself  and  don't  know  any, 
what's  to  be  done?" 

"That  is  easily  remedied,"  was  the  reply. 
"I  think  I  have  what  you  need." 

Selecting  several  volumes  from  the  book 
shelf,  she  glanced  hurriedly  through  them. 

"This  will  do  for  a  beginning,"  she  said, 
handing  the  books  to  Debby.  "Take  them 
home  with  you.  The  stories  are  all  short, 
and  are  generally  pleasing  to  children. 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER      51 

Read  them  once  or  twice,  and  then  tell 
them  to  Hester.  There's  a  lesson  in  each 
little  tale.  The  'Necklace  of  Truth7  is 
good.  It  teaches  a  child  to  despise  a  lie." 

"I'll  see  to  it  that  she  is  taught  that/' 
was  the  grim  response.  "If  I  should  ever 
catch  her  in  a  lie,  I  believe  I'd  break  every 
bone  in  her  body.  Lying  is  such  a  low-down 
trick." 

Debby  took  the  book  home  and  read  it 
after  Hester  was  in  bed  and  asleep.  It 
was  a  collection  of  the  old-time  stories, 
bits  of  myths  and  fairy  tales  which  have 
been  told  to  the  children  for  generations  — 
at  least  to  most  children.  Debby  Alden 
herself  had  not  been  granted  such  a  broad 
culture.  Her  people  had  been  rigid  ad- 
herents to  the  tenets  of  sect.  The  old 
stories  which  Debby  had  heard  in  her  child- 
hood were  awe-inspiring  and  terrifying. 

She  was  soon  master  of  the  contents  of 
the  book.  She  had  kept  her  reading  a 
secret  from  Hester,  and,  when  the  child  had 


52       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

begged  for  a  story,  had  put  her  off  with 
promises  for  the  future. 

The  mere  reading  of  the  stories  had  given 
her  pleasure,  for  they  opened  a  new  world 
to  her;  a  world  filled  with  the  rarest  jewels 
of  the  imagination  whose  existence  she  had 
never  suspected.  But  the  pleasure  which 
came  to  her  from  the  reading  was  small 
compared  to  that  which  came  to  her  when 
she  took  Hester  in  her  arms,  and,  rocking 
slowly  to  and  fro,  repeated  those  wonderful 
tales  to  her. 

Her  first  story,  "The  Necklace  of  Truth," 
Hester,  big-eyed  and  eager,  sat  breathless 
until  the  story  ended.  Then  giving  a  sigh 
of  satisfaction,  she  said  simply,  "Tell  it 
again.7' 

The  stories  never  grew  old  to  the  child. 
But  when  Debby's  mind  had  fed  upon 
them,  she  was  hungry  for  more.  Miss 
Richards  was  ready  to  satisfy  her.  More 
books  were  taken  from  the  book-shelves  to 
the  Alden  home.  So  it  was  that  during 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER      53 

the  winter  of  Hester's  fifth  year,  Debby 
revelled  in  myth  and  fairy  tales,  and  bits 
of  quaint  old  classics,  and  fragments  of 
poem  and  rhyme. 

Hester  required  much  work  and  care 
with  her  clothes,  baths,  and  especially  pre- 
pared meals,  but  Debby  felt  that  she  was 
more  than  repaid  for  all  her  effort  when 
the  child  put  her  warm,  chubby  arms  about 
the  woman's  neck, 'and  in  her  pretty  childish 
prattle  told  of  her  love  for  Aunt  Debby. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  sixth  year,  Hester 
started  to  school.  The  district  school,  with 
over  half  a  hundred  pupils  of  all  grades 
and  ages  packed  in  an  ill-ventilated  room, 
was  just  at  the  end  of  the  public  road. 
Debby  had  been  reared  in  such  an  atmos- 
phere, and  realized  its  disadvantages.  She 
wished  Hester  to  have  greater  opportuni- 
ties than  had  been  afforded  her.  The  ward 
building  of  the  borough  school  was  over 
half  a  mile  distant,  and  the  many  tracks  of 
the  railroad  lay  between. 


54       THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

But  when  Debby  Alden  had  a  purpose 
clearly  defined  in  her  mind,  she  would  ad- 
mit no  obstructions  to  its  carryings.  It 
was  best  for  Hester  to  go  to  town;  there- 
fore it  must  be  done,  regardless  of  the  cost 
to  herself  either  physically  or  financially. 

She  walked  with  Hester  each  morning 
until  she  was  safe  beyond  the  dangerous 
crossing.  At  the  close  of  each  session  she 
met  her  at  the  railroad.  The  walk  home 
was  neither  long  nor  dull  to  them.  Hester's 
tongue  kept  up  a  fire  of  talk  about  school, 
and  Debby  listened  as  one  might  listen  to 
a  sage.  The  subject  never  wearied  her. 
She  knew  each  evening  what  pupils  had 
been  publicly  reprimanded,  what  color  of 
waist  and  ribbon  the  teacher  wore,  and 
what  lovely  pictures  the  little  girls  had 
made  with  colored  crayons. 

"Miss  Cams  told  us  about  Clytie  and  the 
sunflower  yesterday,"  she  began  one  even- 
ing, "and  to-day  she  asked  us  children  to 
tell  her  all  about  it." 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER       55 

" Could  you?"    asked  Debby,  eagerly. 

"Yes;  I  knew  that  long  ago.  Miss 
Cams  did  not  need  to  tell  me.  I  always 
knew  about  Clytie  turning  into  a  sunflower. 
I  could  tell  the  story." 

"And  didn't  you?" 

"I  was  going  to,  Aunt  Debby.  Miss 
Cams  said  I  might  tell,  and  I  got  up.  I 
was  just  telling  it?  beautifully,  and  all  the 
little  girls  sat  still  with  their  eyes  'bugging' 
out  something  terrible  just  to  hear  how 
much  I  knew,  and  then  — " 

She  was  almost  in  tears,  and  yet  her 
indignation  was  enough  greater  than  her 
humiliation  that  the  tears  were  kept  from 
falling. 

"And  what  happened  then?  Did  you 
forget?  Tell  Aunt  Debby  all  about  it." 
She  held  the  child's  hand  closer  in  her  own, 
as  though  to  reassure  her. 

"No;  I  didn't  forget.  I  never  could 
forget  about  Clytie,  Aunt  Debby.  Why,  I 
have  always  known  it.  But  Mary  Bower- 


man  sat  right  back  of  me  and  punched  me. 
Yes,  Aunt  Debby,"  she  nodded  her  head  in 
affirmation  of  her  words. 

"She  punched  me  twice,  and  then  I 
turned  and  gave  her  a  push,  and  — "  the 
lips  quivered  perceptibly,  "and  Miss  Cams 
said,  'Be  seated,  Hester!'  She  made  me 
sit  down,  and  I  couldn't  finish  about  Clytie." 

Debby  Alden  knew  not  what  to  say. 
Her  natural  instincts  were  to  sympathize 
with  the  child,  but  her  early  training  was 
opposed  to  any  such  show  of  feeling  as 
tending  to  weakness  and  enervation. 

"Well,  I  wouldn't  cry  about  it.  Miss 
Cams  may  let  you  tell  the  story  sometime 
again.  You  may  tell  Mary  that  she's  not 
to  punch  you.  You  can  tell  her  that  before 
you  go  into  school  to-morrow." 

"I've  told  her  already,  Aunt  Debby.  I 
waited  until  the  line  broke.  She  was  at 
the  end,  and  I  told  her  that  if  she  punched 
me  that  way  again,  I'd  break  every  bone  in 
her  body!" 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       57 

Debby  gave  a  gasp.  The  expression  hurt 
her.  The  words  were  out  of  harmony  with 
the  child's  beautiful  countenance  and  man- 
ner. 

"I  don't  believe  that  I  would  use  such 
words,  Hester.  They  do  not  sound  nice." 

"You  use  them,  Aunt  Debby."  There 
was  no  criticism  in  the  remark,  only  a 
mere  statement  of  fact.  "You  wouldn't 
say  anything  that  wasn't  nice.  Would  you, 
auntie?" 

Debby  pressed  her  lips  together.  Her 
face  took  on  its  grim  expression.  She  had 
used  such  words  not  once,  but  often.  She 
had  no  wish  to  deny  or  palliate  her  offence. 
At  last  she  spoke.  "Yes,  I  have  used  those 
very  words.  I  got  into  the  habit  of  using 
them.  No  one  ever  told  me  they  didn't 
sound  well.  I  didn't  know  until  I  heard 
you  say  them.  Then  I  knew.  I  will  not 
use  them  again  now,  since  I  know  how  they 
sound,  and  I  don't  want  you  to  say  them 
either.  Besides  not  sounding  right,  they're 


58       THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

not  truthful;  for  we  both  know  that  money 
couldn't  buy  us  to  break  every  bone  in  any 
one's  body.  We're  simply  telling  a  lie 
when  we  say  we'll  do  it.  Isn't  that  so, 
Hester?" 

Hester  pressed  her  lips  prettily  together 
and  nodded  her  head  in  affirmation  of 
Debby's  words. 

"Then  let's  not  say  it,  auntie,"  she  said 
seriously.  "I  don't  want  to  be  a  liar." 

But  that  expression,  with  many  of  its 
kind,  had  become  the  bone  and  marrow 
of  Debby  Alden's  conversation.  To  cut 
this  from  her  speech  was  like  cutting 
into  her  flesh.  But  so  long  as  a  thing 
was  right  and  proper,  she  would  see  to 
it  that  it  was  done,  without  regard  to 
what  it  meant  to  her  in  effort  and  suf- 
fering. 

Many  times  her  tongue  slipped  over  these 
expressions,  but  she  remembered  in  time. 
"There !  I've  forgotten  again,  Hester,"  she 
would  say  grimly.  "But  I'm  getting  better. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       59 

It  didn't  come  clear  out  that  time.  I 
stopped  on  the  second  word.  I've  gained 
something." 

Debby's  first  heartache  in  connection 
with  the  child  came  at  the  close  of  the 
second  month  of  school,  when  the  report 
cards  were  sent  home.  The  grades  were 
marked  in  letters  signifying  excellent,  good, 
medium,  and  poor.  Debby  examined  the 
bit  of  pasteboard  as  a  connoisseur  would 
examine  a  work  of  art.  She  was  wholly 
satisfied  with  the  marks,  for  they  were  all 
G's. 

But  Kate  Bowerman  came  over  after 
supper  to  compare  notes.  It  was  then 
Debby's  spirits  fell,  for  Kate,  after  critically 
examining  Hester's  card,  produced  Mary's, 
on  which  E's  marked  every  study. 

Kate  laughed  maliciously,  the  laugh  which 
in  its  mirthlessness  sounded  more  like  the 
cackle  of  a  distracted  hen.  "I'd  warm 
Mary  soundly  if  she  came  home  with  a 
report  that  wasn't  all  Excellents,"  she 


60       THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

said.     "She  knows  that,  and  she  gets  her 
lessons  before  she  gets  her  meals." 

"She  looks  it,"  said  Debby,  pertinently, 
glancing  from  the  thin,  nervous,  sickly  child 
to  where  Hester,  happy  and  hearty,  stood. 


CHAPTER  IV 

following  morning  Debby  proved 
"*-  herself  faithful  to  the  family  reputa- 
tion of  not  being  " slack."  She  not  only 
saw  that  Hester  was  safe  beyond  the  tracks, 
but  she  accompanied  her  into  town  and 
into  the  schoolroom. 

Miss  Cams  came  to  the  schoolroom  door 
to  meet  her.  "What  has  happened, 
Debby?"  she  cried,  in  her  bright,  airy 
little  manner.  "I  haven't  seen  you  for 
years,  and  now  you  have  actually  come  to 
see  me.  Sit  here  by  my  desk.  You  can 
have  a  view  of  the  children  and  all  that 
goes  on  in  the  room." 

She  drew  forward  a  chair  for  her  guest. 
Debby  sat  down  without  a  word.  She  felt 
out  of  place,  and  out  of  sorts  with  the  world 
and  all  about  her.  For  a  dozen  years  she 
had  been  asleep  to  all  that  was  going  on 

61 


62       THE  COMING   OF  HESTER 

about  her.  Now,  as  her  eyes  slowly  opened, 
she  found  wonderful  changes,  and  she  felt 
old  and  disinterested  and  out  of  harmony. 

She  looked  at  Miss  Cams  earnestly  for  a 
few  moments.  Then  she  spoke.  "Do  you 
know,  Mabel,  that  I  haven't  seen  or  talked 
with  you  for  over  ten  years?" 

"Is  it  possible!  You  are  right  about  it 
being  so  long.  I  remember  now.  We  were 
on  a  sleigh-ride  and  took  supper  at  Ham- 
mersley's  old  farm-house.  I  remember  you 
and  Jim  Baker  drove  down  in  a  cutter. 
My,  what  good  times  they  were!" 

Her  face  was  all  smiles  and  dimples  as 
she  spoke. 

"Over  ten  years  ago,"  said  Debby,  slowly, 
letting  her  glance  move  from  head  to  foot 
of  her  companion,  taking  in  each  detail  of 
her  dress  and  manner.  "And  you  don't 
look  one  day  older." 

"I'm  not.  I  never  intend  to  get  old. 
It's  out  of  fashion,  Debby.  As  time  goes, 
and  if  I  live,  I  suppose  I'll  have  a  seven- 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER      63 

tieth  birthday.  But  I'll  be  seventy  years 
young,  Debby,  not  seventy  years  old.  I 
really  never  mean  to  be  over  twenty  in 
spirits.  I  may  not  be  able  to  keep  the 
wrinkles  from  my  face,  but  I  shall  keep 
them  from  my  heart."  She  laughed  again. 
The  children  looked  up  at  her  with  a 
smile.  No  wonder  they  loved  Miss  Cams. 
Life  was  so  happy  and  sweet  with  her, 
and  she  reflected  her  own  mind  upon 
theirs. 

But  her  words  depressed  Debby  Alden. 
There  were  many  phases  of  life  in  which 
she  was  yet  a  child.  For  the  first  time 
she  was  thoroughly  dissatisfied.  She  had 
kept  herself  in  the  old  home,  living  the  life 
of  a  recluse  and  resting  upon  the  old  hon- 
ors of  the  Alden  family,  while  opportuni- 
ties and  youth  had  slipped  from  her.  She 
studied  the  woman  before  her,  and  smiled 
grimly.  She  knew  Mabel  Carns's  age  to  the 
day  —  just  six  months  older  than  Debby 
Alden  herself ;  but  looking  ten  years  younger, 


64       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

and  as  bright  and  happy  in  manner  and 
heart  as  a  care-free  child. 

"No;  you  don't  look  a  day  older  than 
you  did  when  we  drove  down  to  Ham- 
mersley's  farm." 

"That's  nice.  Did  you  walk  into  town 
to  tell  me  that,  Debby?" 

Her  words  recalled  Debby  to  the  pur- 
pose of  her  visit.  "No,  I  didn't.  I  came 
to  see  about  Hester.  I'm  not  satisfied." 

"Not  satisfied!  What  has  happened? 
She  is  a  lovely  child  in  school  and  as  bright 
as  the  average  child.  I  know  no  reason 
for  your  being  dissatisfied." 

"She  got  only  G's  on  her  report." 

"But,  Debby,  that  is  good.  A  great 
many  did  not  receive  G.  If  I  were  you,  I 
would  be  quite  satisfied  with  such  a  re- 
port." 

"But  there  were  reports  marked  Ex- 
cellent in  everything." 

"Yes;  one  or  two.  But  the  children 
who  received  those  were  unusual  pupils 


—  or  above  the  average  age;  or,"  and  at 
that  instant  her  glance  fell  upon  Mary 
Bowerman,  sitting  at  her  desk  with  her 
shoulders  hunched  up  and  her  eyes  fixed 
upon  an  open  book,  "or  they  study  out  of 
school." 

"Hester  can  do  that.  I'll  see  to  it  that 
she  does." 

"But  I  do  not  approve  of  a  child  of  six 
years  working  at  lessons  at  home.  What 
they  do  in  school  will  be  enough.  It  will 
be  better  that  they  grow  strong  and 
healthy." 

"I  have  no  intention  of  overworking 
Hester.  She's  as  strong  as  a  piece  of 
hickory.  I'll  not  let  her  overdo." 

Miss  Cams  gave  a  sigh,  and  yielded  to 
the  stronger  will.  "Well,  if  you  are  quite 
determined,  Debby,  I  presume  you  must 
have  your  own  way.  I'll  give  her  a  reader 
to  carry  home,  and  I'll  mark  out  the  les- 
son." 

"But  I  wanted  more.    I've  heard  Hester 


66       THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

tell  about  the  reading.  You  do  things 
different  from  when  you  and  I  learned  to 
read.  I  don't  quite  understand." 

"  Simple  as  can  be.  Stay  this  morning, 
and  you'll  see  how  children  are  taught 
by  new  methods." 

Debby  sat  half  the  morning  watching 
Miss  Cams  go  through  the  work  with  a 
skill  and  despatch  which  was  marvellous 
to  one  ignorant  of  the  newer  methods. 

When  she  was  ready  to  go,  Miss  Carns 
gave  her  several  books  on  the  subject,  and 
she  went  from  the  schoolroom  with  arms 
laden  with  texts  on  the  word  and  sentence 
method. 

At  the  corner  of  Erie  Avenue  and  Fifth 
Street  she  met  Kate  Bowerman  and  Mrs. 
Mullin  on  a  shopping  expedition. 

"You'd  better  come  along,  Debby. 
There's  a  new  department  store  opened 
up  in  the  Leonard  Block.  This  is  their 
opening  day,  and  they're  serving  coffee 
to  all  the  women  that  come  in."  Kate 


THE   COMING   OF   HESTER       67 

laughed.  Her  voice  clung  on  its  high 
falsetto  note  as  she  added,  "Come  and  get 
a  decent  cup  of  coffee  once  in  your  life." 

"Come  along/7  urged  Mrs.  Mullin.  "I've 
heard  that  they  have  fine  goods.  We 
might  as  well  go  and  see.  It  doesn't  cost 
anything." 

Debby  turned  and  went  with  them. 
She  was  so  ignorant  of  the  business  in- 
terests of  the  town  that  she  had  heard 
nothing  of  the  proposed  changes.  As  they 
walked  down  the  Avenue,  she  turned  to  her 
companion  with  the  question:  "Who's 
starting  the  store?  What  kind  of  a  one 
is  it  —  general?" 

"Every  kind,  but  arranged  differently 
from  what  a  general  store  is.  Each  kind 
of  goods  has  its  own  room,  but  they  all 
open  into  each  other;  and  they  have  some 
of  the  store  on  the  second  floor." 

"Oh!"  said  Debby.  "Who  did  you 
say  was  going  to  keep  it?" 

"No  one  from  hereabouts.    A  man  by 


68       THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

the  name  of  Stout.  Ab,  I  think,  is  his 
first  name.  Short,  I  suppose,  for  Abner. 
My!  don't  it  look  fine?  And  to  look  at 
the  folks  going  in!" 

They  had  come  directly  in  front  of  the 
store  whose  windows  were  gaudy  with  all 
manner  of  finery  for  house  and  person. 
A  steady  flow  of  shoppers  was  pouring 
in  through  the  open  door.  The  three 
women  crossed  the  street  and  joined  the 
crowds  of  visitors.  At  the  rear  of  the 
grocery  department,  a  young  girl  was 
serving  coffee  and  wafers  to  the  women, 
and  all  the  while  delivering  a  harangue 
upon  the  particular  brand  of  berry  they 
had  for  sale. 

She  was  a  pretty  girl  with  dark  curly 
hair,  sharp  dark  eyes,  and  a  business-like 
manner. 

"Who  is  she?"  asked  Debby,  between 
her  sips  of  coffee. 

"Ab  Stout's  daughter.  They  say  he 
has  six  girls.  His  wife  is  dead,"  whis- 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       69 

pered  Mrs.  Mullin,  bending  close  that  the 
subject  of  the  conversation  might  not 
catch  her  words. 

"Indeed.  She's  inclined  to  be  pretty/' 
said  Debby.  "  Indeed,  I  might  say  she'd 
be  beautiful  if  it  wasn't  for  her  sharp 
features.  I  never  like  sharp  features." 

At  this  Kate  Bowerman  leaned  over 
and  whispered:  "My!  but  don't  she  re- 
semble your  Hester!  Take  a  good  look 
at  her,  Debby.  They're  alike  enough  to 
be  sisters." 

Debby  did  look.  The  soft  hair  with 
its  waves  and  the  great  dark  eyes  of  the 
two  were  not  unlike,  but  the  features  and 
expression  were  wholly  different. 

They  had  finished  their  coffee  and  were 
moving  toward  another  department,  when 
Kate  began:  "I  never  before  saw  so  great 
a  resemblance  as  Hester  has  to  that  girl. 
If  they  were  the  same  age,  they'd  be  enough 
alike  to  be  twins."  She  stopped  and  looked 
directly  at  Debby.  "Suppose  it  should 


70       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

chance  that  Hester  belonged  to  this  Ab 
Stout.  Now,  when  I  come  to  think  of  it, 
I  remember  Sam  speaking  about  Stout, 
saying  his  wife  and  little  girl  died  the 
same  time.  Do  you  suppose  — " 

If  her  purpose  was  to  discomfort  Debby, 
she  was  disappointed,  for  Debby  looked  her 
straight  in  the  eye  and  said  unconcernedly: 
"No;  I  don't  suppose.  I  know  there  isn't  a 
drop  of  their  blood  in  Hester's  body." 

"You  can't  be  sure  of  that  unless  you 
know  her  people,  and  you  - 

"I  know  that  much,"  said  Debby. 
"There's  no  use  of  talking  any  more 
about  those  people." 

Her  words  set  Kate  Bowerman  to  think- 
ing. Kate  knew  that  Debby  spoke  the 
truth  at  all  times,  and  in  all  its  harshness. 
It  was  not  to  be  doubted,  then,  that  she 
knew  something  of  her  foster-child's  par- 
entage. 

It  is  natural  for  one  to  attribute  to  oth- 
ers motives  similar  to  those  which  have  a 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       71 

place  in  one's  own  mind.  Kate  Bower- 
man  was  self-centred  and  selfish.  Her  mind 
had  never  been  able  to  conceive  the  reason 
for  Debby  Alden's  taking  into  her  home 
and  caring  for  a  strange  child.  But  now 
Debby's  words  opened  her  mind's  eye  to 
possible  reasons.  Debby  knew  more  of 
the  child's  people  than  she  had  ever  let 
others  know.  Were  they  people  of 
wealth  and  importance,  to  whom  Debby 
would  later  make  known  the  identity  of 
the  child,  with  the  hope  that  they  would 
amply  repay  her  for  her  trouble?  Kate's 
thoughts  ran  in  that  direction,  although 
she  was  not  able  to  reach  a  conclusion. 

Debby  let  all  thought  of  the  Stout  family 
pass  from  her  mind.  The  evening  of  that 
same  day  she  read  through  the  teacher's 
manual  on  the  methods  of  teaching  and 
reading  to  the  little  folk.  The  suggestions 
were  concise,  and  without  any  professional 
terms.  This,  with  what  she  had  seen  in 
school  that  day,  made  the  subject  clear 


72       THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

to  her.  She  saw  what  the  educator  had 
in  mind.  Her  own  common  sense  helped 
her  to  know  that  his  ideas  were  sound. 
She  was  in  sympathy  with  him  from  the 
first,  and  took  up  his  system  with  the  en- 
thusiasm of  a  young  teacher.  Love  could 
not  give  her  skill,  but  it  could  and  did 
give  her  patience  and  ambition. 

Each  evening  she  labored  long  with 
Hester,  reviewing  the  lessons  of  several 
days  past,  and  teaching  her  the  new  words 
which  came  in  the  lesson  for  the  following 
day.  After  the  Christmas  holidays,  Hester 
brought  home  a  memory  gem,  a  little  poem 
of  child  life  which  all  the  children  in  school 
were  to  commit  to  memory. 

Debby  read  the  selection,  for  Hester  had 
handed  it  to  her  the  moment  they  had 
entered  the  house  from  school. 

"I  like  that,  Hester.  It  is  beautiful. 
I  declare,  I  felt  like  crying  while  I  read 
it.  The  moment  the  supper  work  is  cleared 
away,  we'll  study  it," 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER      73 

The  reading  was  too  difficult  for  a  little 
six-year-old.  Debby  read  it  aloud,  line 
by  line,  and  Hester  repeated  it  after  her. 
The  entire  evening  passed  before  a  stanza 
had  been  committed,  the  woman  finding 
that  her  memory,  from  disuse,  was  almost 
as  weak  as  the  child's. 

So  the  winter  passed,  with  days  spent 
in  school  and  evenings  in  study.  Hester 
was  not  quick  to  grasp  the  lessons,  but 
when  once  learned,  they  remained  with 
her.  For  this  reason  her  report  cards 
during  the  spring  term,  when  Miss  Cams 
spent  much  of  the  time  in  oral  review, 
improved  perceptibly.  Several  poems  had 
been  learned  during  the  year.  Hester  was 
able  to  repeat  all,  standing  very  erect  and 
prim,  and  making  quaint  little  bows  and 
gestures,  as  her  Aunt  Debby  had  taught 
her. 

The  last  week  in  May  marked  the  close 
of  school.  The  little  folks  gave  an  enter- 
tainment on  the  afternoon  of  the  last  day. 


74       THE  COMING   OF  HESTER 

Debby  went  early  in  order  not  to  miss 
any  of  the  programme.  She  wore  a  stiff 
black  silk  dress,  one  which  had  done  ser- 
vice since  her  twentieth  birthday.  The 
black,  shining  surface  and  severe  lines  in- 
tensified the  angles  of  her  form  and  face, 
making  her  look  years  older  than  she  was. 
She  sat  up  primly  in  her  stiff-backed  chair, 
her  hands  folded  upon  her  lap. 

The  room  soon  filled  with  visitors. 
There  was  a  rustle  of  silken  petticoats 
and  the  delicate  subtle  fragrance  of  choice 
perfumes.  Young  matrons,  whose  first 
babies  had  but  entered  school,  and  silver- 
haired  grandmothers  sat  eager  and  anxious 
to  hear  that  one  in  whom  they  were  most 
interested. 

Debby  Alden  looked  about  her  and 
studied  the  faces  and  attire  of  these  people, 
most  of  whom  she  had  known  in  her 
school  days.  Again  the  old  dissatisfied 
feeling  came  to  her.  She  seemed  older 
—  years  older  than  the  grandmothers.  The 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       75 

world  was  all  disjointed,  and  nothing  fitted 
in. 

Her  heart  beat  high  when  Hester  came 
forward,  and  with  quaint  bow  and  ges- 
ture said  her  little  speech.  Her  effort  was 
neither  better  nor  worse  than  that  of  the 
other  children,  but  to  Debby's  infatuated 
eyes,  it  was  far  finer  than  any  other.  For 
a  moment  her  elation  at  Hester's  success 
caused  her  to  forget  herself  and  those 
about  her;  but  only  for  a  moment,  for 
the  child  came  up  to  her,  and,  leaning  against 
her,  had  whispered:  "Look  at  Jane  Orr's 
mother.  Isn't  she  «weet,  Aunt  Debby?" 

Debby  looked  and  saw  a  plain  little 
woman,  beautified  by  a  wonderful  smile, 
and  dainty  and  sweet  in  a  soft  white  gown, 
and  a  soft  haze  of  hair  about  her  forehead. 
Then  Debby  realized  the  cause  of  her 
dissatisfaction.  Hester  was  old  enough  to 
notice  the  difference  in  women.  She  was 
heart-sick  with  fear  lest  the  child  should 
find  her  plain  and  unattractive.  She 


76       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

knew  not  what  to  do.  Then  she  thought 
of  Miss  Richards.  She  would  go  to  her. 

When  the  entertainment  was  over,  she 
sent  Hester  home  with  Jane  Orr,  and  she 
went  to  call  on  Miss  Richards.  Without 
preliminary  talk,  she  opened  her  heart  to 
Miss  Richards,  telling  her  what  she  dreaded. 

" Hester  is  all  I  have,"  she  said  simply. 
"I  think  I  should  die  if  she'd  take  to 
comparing  me  to  other  folks  and  find  me 
dull  and  old-fashioned.  That's  what  I 
dread." 

"Yes,  I  understand,  Debby.  But  you 
are  not  naturally  dull,  and  you  are  not 
old.  A  woman  of  thirty  has  just  begun 
to  live.  To  my  mind,  she  has  but  reached 
the  place  where  she  has  judgment  enough 
to  know  what  living  means.  I  repeat, 
Debby,  that  you  are  not  naturally  dull. 
Take  my  advice,  and  don't  allow  yourself 
to  become  so." 

"But  what  can  I  do  to  help  myself?" 
•he  asked.  "I'm  alone  the  greater  part 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       77 

of  the  day.  Down  our  way  women  don't 
visit  when  they  are  my  age.  There's  a 
set  of  young  girls  of  eighteen  who  go  about 
some,  but,  for  the  most  part,  they  settle 
down  at  home  when  once  they  marry. 
I'm  afraid  they'd  look  upon  me  as  pe- 
culiar if  I'd  dress  up  in  white  and  fluff  my 
hair." 

Miss  Richards  realized  that  this  was 
no  light  subject  of  conversation.  Although 
it  dwelt  on  gowns  and  hair-dressing,  be- 
neath was  the  question  of  a  woman's  hap- 
piness and  peace  of  mind.  To  Miss  Rich- 
ards there  was  a  trace  of  the  tragical  in  it. 
After  a  moment's  deliberation,  she  re- 
plied: "Debby  Alden,  haven't  you  yet 
learned  to  do  what  is  right  and  proper 
without  caring  what  might  be  thought  of 
it?  If  you  mean  to  be  influenced  by  the 
opinions  of  others,  you  will  change  your 
mind  every  hour  of  the  day.  Before  we 
go  further,  let  me  tell  you  how  I  was  reared, 
Debby.  I'm  twice  your  years,  and  yet 


78      THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

I  wear  white  gowns,  and  sometimes  I  put 
a  flower  in  my  hair." 

Laying  aside  her  needlework,  she  crossed 
the  room  and  sat  close  beside  her  guest. 
She  told  of  that  broader  life  in  distant 
towns,  where  years  brought  to  a  woman 
greater  capabilities  and  a  wider,  freer 
range  of  vision;  where  age  broadened  in 
place  of  narrowed  one's  power  for  enjoy- 
ment. She  described  the  ways  of  women 
whom  she  remembered  when  she  herself 
was  a  young  girl.  When  she  had  finished 
her  story,  Debby  Alden  was  convinced  of 
two  things:  the  first,  that  she  had  let 
many  a  golden  opportunity  slip  from  her; 
the  second,  that  from  that  time  on  she 
would  follow  out  her  own  inclination,  with- 
out repression  and  without  regard  to  what 
others  might  say. 

During  the  summer,  encouraged  by 
Miss  Richards,  she  grew  blooming  and 
radiant.  She  did  as  she  would  have  done 
had  not  the  tendency  of  the  valley  been 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       79 

set  against  it.  She  dressed  herself  in  be- 
coming dainty  dresses.  She  opened  the 
old  piano  and  brought  back  to  memory 
the  few  old  tunes  she  had  learned  at  sing- 
ing school.  Hester,  big-eyed  and  wonder- 
ing, could  not  understand  the  cause  of 
this  transformation.  But  she  was  pleased 
beyond  words  to  express.  One  evening  as 
she  stood  by  the  piano,  her  childish  voice 
at  intervals  catching  the  air  and  carrying 
it  along,  she  stopped  suddenly,  and,  throw- 
ing her  arms  about  the  woman's  neck, 
cried  out,  "Aunt  Debby,  you  are  perfectly 
beautiful!" 

It  was  in  this  atmosphere,  this  struggle 
after  a  broader,  fuller  culture,  that  Hester 
Alden  spent  her  childhood.  She  was  in 
ignorance  of  the  mystery  concerning  her 
identity.  She  knew  only  that  her  mother 
had  been  killed  at  the  railroad  crossing, 
and  that  Debby  had  taken  her,  then  a 
baby,  to  live  at  the  Alden  home.  She 
had  taken  it  for  granted  that  her  mother 


80       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

and  Debby  Alden  were  sisters,  for  she 
had  heard  her  aunt  frequently  say  that 
her  brothers  had  died  in  infancy.  So  her 
life  passed  without  any  unusual  occurrence 
until  she  entered  upon  her  first  year  at 
the  high  school. 


'AUNT  DEBBY,  YOU  ABE  PERFECTLY  BEAUTIFUL!"  —  Page  79. 


CHAPTER    V 

TTESTER  was  but  one  of  several  hun- 
-*--*-  dred  pupils  in  the  high  school. 
Several  who  had  entered  the  primary 
grade  at  the  same  time  were  with  her 
now. 

Jane  Orr,  Mary  Bowerman,  Minnie  Wat- 
son, and  Orpha  Sheddy  were  among  these. 
The  girls  had  studied  together  in  school, 
and  had  walked  to  and  from  home  arm 
in  arm.  Through  Aunt  Debby's  efforts, 
Hester  had  been  among  the  first  in  her 
class.  Her  standing  had  never  been  the 
result  of  unusual  capacity  for  study  or 
keenness  of  perception.  Debby  Alden  had 
never  failed  to  go  over,  day  after  day, 
each  lesson,  and  with  wonderful  patience 
explain  and  illustrate  the  points  which 
Hester  was  slow  to  grasp. 

At  the  beginning  of  Hester's   freshman 

81 


82       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

year,  the  principalship  of  the  high  school 
changed.  Mr.  Lewis  with  his  old-fash- 
ioned, conservative  ideas  was  asked  to 
step  aside,  that  a  bustling,  up-to-date  man 
with  new  ideas  and  new  methods  might 
take  his  place.  The  new  man  was  Pro- 
fessor Sanderson,  who  had  fought  his  way 
from  backwoods  school  through  college 
and  into  the  lucrative  position  of  head- 
master at  R.  Success  to  him  meant  noth- 
ing more  than  the  capacity  to  earn  money. 
In  his  mind  that  man  was  most  success- 
ful whose  income  was  greatest.  He  had 
no  standard  of  success  along  ethical  lines. 
He  himself  was  upright  and  honest,  be- 
cause it  paid  to  be  so.  He  was  a  stocky, 
heavy-set  man,  with  a  round,  bullet-shaped 
head  set  closely  on  square  shoulders.  He 
had  a  keen  mind,  bright,  sharp  eyes,  and 
sufficient  energy  and  ambition  to  accom- 
plish anything  toward  which  his  wishes 
tended. 
He  introduced  new  methods  in  regard 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       83 

to  recitation  and  discipline.  Some  of  his 
ideas  were  an  improvement  upon  the  old 
way,  but  by  far  a  greater  number  robbed 
a  pupil  of  personal  responsibility  and  put 
them  on  the  same  moral  footing  as  felons. 
His  ideas  seemed  to  be  that  all  young 
people  are  naturally  evil,  and  but  wait  an 
opportunity  to  allow  their  tendencies  full 
sway.  So  he  hedged  them  about  by  rules, 
and  punished  to  the  extreme  the  slight- 
est infringement  of  any  of  his  iron-clad 
laws.  He  knew  no  distinction  between 
a  pupil  who  whispered  and  one  who  was 
ready  with  a  lie  to  clear  himself. 

It  was  near  the  end  of  the  first  month 
of  school.  Hester,  with  her  books  strapped 
together  and  her  lunch  basket  in  hand, 
had  crossed  the  tracks  and  was  making 
her  way  up  Erie  Avenue,  when  Mary  and 
Jane  met  her. 

"Did  you  get  out  your  Latin  last 
night?"  asked  Mary.  She  had  not  im- 
proved in  looks  since  her  primary  days. 


84       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

She  was  thin  and  sallow.  Her  movements 
were  quick  and  nervous.  She  had  in- 
herited her  mother's  disposition  so  far 
as  not  wishing  to  be  second. 

"Yes,  I  can  read  every  word  of  it." 

"Did  you  do  the  translating  your- 
self?" asked  Mary,  suspiciously.  She  had 
not  been  able  to  translate  one  sentence. 

"No,  not  altogether.  Aunt  Debby  and 
I  worked  together.  She  really  read  them 
first."  Hester  knew  no  reason  for  not 
making  this  statement.  She  felt  pleased 
when  she  made  a  creditable  examination, 
but  her  desires  did  not  run  toward  out- 
doing her  friends. 

Jane  smiled  blandly.  There  was  some- 
thing whole-souled  and  attractive  in  her 
smile.  She  was  a  large  girl,  with  a  placid, 
sunny  disposition.  "I  worked  all  even- 
ing at  my  Latin,"  she  said  slowly.  "I 
thought  I  had  it  just  right.  I  had  each 
sentence  written  down  beautifully,  when 
Ralphie  came  in  and  read  them  over.  He 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER       85 

shrieked  with  laughter  while  he  read,  and 
then  he  carried  the  paper  in  to  father  and 
they  laughed  together." 

"What    was    wrong?"    asked    Hester. 

"Nothing  much.  I'd  made  a  mistake 
in  that  fifth  sentence,  Caesar  bonas  leges 
habuit."  She  said  the  words  slowly  as  she 
made  an  effort  to  recall  them.  She  smiled 
then,  and  continued :  "Miss  Watson  is  al- 
ways telling  us  to  catch  at  the  meaning 
as  far  as  we  are  able.  I  tried  to  please, 
and  translated  at  sight." 

"What  did  you  make  of  it?"  Mary 
asked  the  question  eagerly.  She  had  read 
the  sentence  without  difficulty.  She  al- 
ways found  delight  in  doing  that  which 
her  friends  had  found  difficult.  Now, 
without  giving  Jane  time  to  reply,  she 
repeated  glibly,  "Coesar  leges  bonas  habuit, 
'Csesar  had  good  laws.'  I  can't  see  any- 
thing hard  about  that." 

"But  I  translated  by  sound,"  said  Jane, 
pensively.  "I  had  it  written  on  my  paper, 


86       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

'Caesar  has  bony  legs.'  That  was  what 
made  Ralph  laugh  so." 

"I  have  that  right,"  said  Hester.  " In- 
deed, I  believe  mine  are  all  right.  Aunt 
Debby  is  very  particular.  We  look  up 
every  word." 

"Can  your  Aunt  Debby  read  Latin?" 
asked  Jane  in  surprise.  "That  must  make 
it  nice  for  you  —  to  have  some  one  in 
the  house  that  knows  all  about  it." 

"But  Aunt  Debby  doesn't  know  all 
about  it.  She  began  to  study  when  I 
did,  and  we  go  over  the  work  together 
every  evening.  That  is  why  I  have  been 
able  to  translate  my  sentences." 

"Having  to-day's  lesson  won't  do  you 
much  good  now,"  said  Mary,  eagerly. 
There  was  a  suggestion  of  spite  in  her 
voice.  "I'm  glad  I  did  not  pore  over  my 
books  last  night.  We'll  have  no  recitation 
to-day.  We're  going  to  be  examined. 
Written  examination." 

"Examinations!"     Hester  Alden  gasped 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER      87 

for  breath.  The  word  sounded  horrible 
to  her.  It  was  almost  as  awe-inspiring  as 
though  Mary  had  said,  "To-day  we  go  to 
the  guillotine." 

Mary  laughed.  Her  laugh  was  a  faint 
suggestion  of  her  mother's. 

"Yes,  written.  There'll  be  fifteen  ques- 
tions. They're  to  be  difficult  ones.  The 
whole  two  months'  work  is  to  be  covered 
by  it.  We  may  be  kept  at  it  all  day." 

"How   do   you   know?"    asked   Hester. 

"Oh,  I  know,"  laughed  Mary.  "But 
I'm  not  telling." 

"But  I  am,"  said  Jane.  She  turned 
toward  Hester.  "Mary  and  I  were  wait- 
ing in  the  outside  office  last  evening.  Pro- 
fessor Sanderson  was  in  the  private  office 
talking  with  Miss  Watson.  He  told  her 
to  make  out  fifteen  questions  to  cover  two 
months'  work,  and  to  have  them  ready  for 
this  morning.  He  said  he  wished  the  ex- 
amination to  be  good  and  stiff."  Jane 
smiled  blandly  as  she  repeated  the  word. 


88       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

To  her  the  subject  had  its  touch  of 
humor. 

"Miss  Watson  was  angry.  She  did  not 
hesitate  to  tell  Professor  Sanderson  what 
she  thought." 

"She  wasn't  so  very  angry,"  said  Jane. 
"She  told  him  that  she  did  not  think  it  fair 
to  her  to  give  her  so  little  time ;  that  she  had 
an  engagement  for  the  evening,  and  making 
out  the  questions  would  keep  her  up  half 
the  night." 

"He  could  have  had  the  examination 
some  other  day  —  either  Thursday  or  Fri- 
day. This  is  only  Wednesday,"  said  Hester, 
who  had  gathered  from  her  Aunt  Debby 
some  practical  ideas. 

"She  said  just  that,"  cried  Mary,  "and 
what  do  you  think  he  said?  That  he 
did  not  wish  her  to  have  longer  than  over 
night,  for  then  she  would  have  an  oppor- 
tunity to  drill  her  class  in  the  very  ques- 
tions she  meant  to  ask." 

"Did  he  say  that?"  cried  Hester,  angry 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER       89 

at  the  insult  offered  to  this  teacher  whom 
she  greatly  admired.  "If  I  were  Miss  Wat- 
son, I  would  have  — "  She  hesitated  for 
a  word  to  express  herself.  She  could 
think  of  nothing  quite  adequate  to  the 
occasion.  Her  old  childish  expression 
flashed  through  her  mind,  but  she  did  not 
put  it  into  words,  for  she  and  Aunt  Debby 
had  passed  beyond  that  place  where  they 
declared  themselves  ready  "to  break  every 
bone  in  one's  body." 

"Let  us  walk  faster,"  said  Jane.  "If 
we  go  into  school  the  moment  the  doors 
are  opened,  we'll  have  time  to  do  a  little 
reviewing.  I  really  must  glance  over  the 
verb.  I  positively  know  nothing  at  all 
about  it." 

"Don't  tell  the  other  girls,"  cried  Mary, 
"or  they'll  go  in  and  review,  too." 

"Let  them,"  said  Jane.  "I  don't  know 
any  reason  why  they  shouldn't." 

"They'll  make  better  marks  hi  their  ex- 
amination," she  said. 


90      THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Hester  turned  to  look  squarely  at  her. 
She  had  beautiful  eyes,  which  seemed  to 
have  the  power  of  looking  deep  into  the 
innermost  secrets  of  one's  heart.  Mary 
tried  to  meet  Hester's  glance,  but  her  face 
flushed,  and  she  turned  aside. 

"  Suppose  it  does  make  their  marks 
better,"  she  said  slowly.  "That's  why  we'd 
tell  them,  so  they  could  look  over  their 
work  if  they  wished  to."  She  paused  just 
an  instant,  and  then  said  quickly:  "Do 
you  know  you're  a  dreadfully  selfish  girl, 
Mary  Bowerman?  You  are  always  look- 
ing out  for  number  one,  and  trying  to  get 
ahead." 

It  was  not  a  kind  remark;  but  it  at 
least  was  a  truthful  one.  Hester  spoke 
without  regard  to  consequences,  and  in 
this  lay  her  fault.  She  was  quick  to  express 
herself.  Although  her  criticism  was  just 
and  frank,  it  was  none  the  less  criticism, 
and  cut  its  object  to  the  quick. 

Mary    was    not    slow    to    take    offence. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       91 

Quick  as  a  flash  an  angry  retort  was  upon 
her  lips,  when  Jane  interposed. 

" Storms  in  a  tea-cup,"  she  said  so  blandly 
that  both  her  companions  smiled.  "If 
Hester  would  not  say  all  she  thought,  and 
Mary  would  not  bubble  over  at  the  least 
jostle,  what  a  happy  time  we  could  have ! " 

There  was  no  resisting  Jane's  calm  good- 
humor.  She  gave  the  girls  no  opportunity 
of  replying,  but  took  the  conversation  in 
her  own  hands  for  the  time. 

"There's  Orpha.  She  must  know  about 
it." 

Jane  raised  her  voice  to  claim  the  girl's 
attention.  Hearing  her  name  called,  Orpha 
looked  back,  and,  seeing  her  friends,  waited 
until  they  came  up  to  her. 

"We   must   tell   her,"   Jane   repeated. 

"Much  good  it  will  do,"  said  Mary. 
"If  she  had  from  now  until  commence- 
ment to  study,  she  wouldn't  know  the 
difference  between  an  adjective  and  a 


92       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"Hush/'  said  Jane,  for  they  were  now 
within  speaking  distance.  She  turned  to 
Orpha  and  told  her  about  the  examina- 
tion and  how  they  had  heard  of  it  before  the 
others.  Orpha  listened  without  a  word. 
She  was  a  dull  girl  with  stolid,  heavy  fea- 
tures. She  went  about  with  several  differ- 
ent sets  in  the  high  school,  but  was  not  a 
close  friend  with  any  particular  girl.  She 
was  easy  to  get  along  with,  for  she  never 
became  excited,  was  never  angry,  was 
never  known  to  be  in  a  hurry;  and,  so  far, 
had  never  been  heard  to  express  her  opin- 
ion upon  any  subject  or  any  person. 

"We  three  are  going  into  school  the 
instant  the  door  opens,"  said  Hester. 
"Come  along,  Orpha,  and  we'll  all  study 
until  school  calls." 

"What's  the  use?"  said  Orpha,  stolidly. 
The  expression  of  her  face  had  not  changed 
in  the  slightest.  Nevertheless,  she  went 
with  the  girls  into  the  building.  They 
met  a  number  on  their  way  to  whom  they 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       93 

communicated  the  news  of  the  examination, 
so  that  fully  a  score  went  into  the  assembly- 
room  and  fell  upon  the  Latin  text-book, 
tooth  and  nail. 

Miss  Watson  was  in  the  assembly-room 
in  conversation  with  the  teacher  in  charge. 
It  was  evident  from  her  expression  of 
face  and  nervous  manner  that  she  was 
greatly  disturbed.  A  half-hour  later,  when 
the  freshmen  entered  her  class  room, 
she  was  quite  herself.  She  smiled  grimly 
as  she  arose,  and,  standing  by  the  desk 
with  a  paper  in  her  hand,  addressed  the 
pupils.  "Professor  Sanderson  has  given  me 
a  diagram  of  the  room,  with  the  name  of 
each  pupil  written  upon  the  desk  where 
he  wishes  him  to  sit.  That  will  neces- 
sitate your  being  moved  from  your  accus- 
tomed places.  You  understand  the  rea- 
son for  my  asking  you  to  change.  I'm 
acting  under  orders  from  a  superior  officer." 

By  this  time  the  greater  number  of  pupils 
had  heard  of  the  encounter  between  Miss 


94       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Watson  and  Professor  Sanderson  the  pre- 
vious evening.  They  appreciated  the  situa- 
tion in  which  she  was  placed.  She  was 
a  popular  teacher;  being  herself  a  person 
of  refinement  and  culture,  she  accorded 
to  her  pupils  the  utmost  courtesy  and 
respect.  As  a  class,  they  were  in  sym- 
pathy with  her. 

With  great  despatch  she  located  each 
pupil,  saw  to  it  that  the  material  and  ques- 
tions for  the  examination  were  passed, 
and  then  resumed  her  place  at  the  front  of 
the  room. 

"You  understand,  of  course,  that  there 
must  be  no  help  given.  It  is  a  test  of 
your  knowledge  of  the  subject,  and  not 
of  your  neighbor's." 

There  was  a  movement  of  pens.  For 
several  hours  not  a  sound  except  that  or 
the  movement  of  a  pupil  in  order  to  rest 
his  hand  was  heard.  Miss  Watson  arose 
and  walked  about  the  room.  Time  dragged 
upon  her  hands.  The  noon  hour  passed, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER      95 

yet  the  brightest  pupils  had  not  completed 
the  test. 

"When  you  complete  the  work,  lay  the 
papers  on  my  desk  and  go  home,"  she 
said.  She  was  taking  this  dismissal  upon 
her  own  shoulders.  Professor  Sanderson 
had  not  given  her  authority  to  send  them 
home  until  the  close  of  the  afternoon  ses- 
sion. But  Miss  Watson  had  judgment 
enough  to  know  that  three  hours  of  unin- 
terrupted writing  was  too  much  of  a  task 
on  the  nerves  of  growing  boys  and  girls. 

There  were  fifteen  questions.  Hester 
had  reached  the  thirteenth  when  a  wad 
of  paper  came  flying  through  the  air  and 
landed  plump  upon  her  desk.  She  looked 
up  quickly  in  time  to  catch  Mary  Bower- 
man's  nod  and  glance,  signifying  that  the 
note  was  from  her. 

"What's  the  imperative  of  sum?  Write 
it  for  me,  and  I'll  let  you  have  the  fifteenth. 
It's  hard." 

Hester  surreptitiously  tore  off  a  narrow 


96       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

edge  of  paper,  hastily  scribbled  thereon 
the  desired  information,  and  sent  it  flying 
back.  A  few  minutes  later,  for  Mary  was 
delayed  in  her  answering  by  Miss  Watson's 
keen  eyes  fixed  upon  her,  a  return  note 
with  the  answer  to  the  fifteenth  upon  it, 
landed  upon  Hester's  desk. 

She  was  copying  it  when  Professor  San- 
derson came  into  the  room  to  speak  to  Miss 
Watson.  She  listened  to  what  he  had  to 
say,  nodded  in  reply,  and  then,  turning 
to  her  pupils,  said,  "  Before  handing  in  your 
papers,  write  upon  the  upper  margin  of 
the  first  page  whether  you  have  or  have 
not  received  or  given  help." 

Hester  finished  her  work,  turned  to  her 
first  page,  and  wrote  across  the  top,  "I 
have  both  given  and  received  help."  She 
was  not  a  speedy  worker  at  any  time,  and 
to-day  the  new  experience  of  undergoing 
a  written  examination  made  her  unusually 
slow.  As  she  gathered  up  her  papers  and 
began  to  put  them  in  order,  she  looked 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER       97 

about  the  room.  The  class,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  herself  and  two  boys  in  a  dis- 
tant part  of  the  room,  had  finished.  Pro- 
fessor Sanderson  was  standing  at  Miss 
Watson's  desk  looking  over  the  papers  as 
they  were  handed  in. 

As  Hester  took  her  papers  to  the  front 
of  the  room,  the  boys  advanced  with  her, 
and  the  three  papers  lay  side  by  side  on 
the  desk. 

At  this,  Mary,  Jane,  and  Orpha,  who 
had  been  waiting  in  the  cloak-room,  came 
in.  "We  wish  to  speak  to  Miss  Watson," 
they  said  to  Hester.  "Wait,  and  we'll 
walk  down  with  you." 

"Not  so  fast,  young  ladies,"  cried  Mr. 
Sanderson,  as  he  fixed  his  eagle  eyes  upon 
them.  He  held  Hester's  paper  in  his  hand, 
upon  which  he  had  pounced  as  a  cat  upon 
a  mouse.  "Hah!  hah!  what  have  we 
here?"  He  held  the  paper  before  him, 
while  he  read  slowly,  "I  have  both  given 
and  received  help."  Then,  turning  to  Hester, 


98       THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

he  asked  sternly  if  that  statement  were 
true. 

"Why,  certainly,  or  why  should  I  have 
written  it?"  she  replied.  She  had  never 
been  cowed  or  browbeaten  in  her  life. 
She  had  been  taught  obedience  through 
love  and  reason.  She  wished  to  do  the 
right  thing  because  it  was  right.  She 
had  never  been  taught  what  fear  meant. 
Now,  quite  unawed,  she  faced  Professor 
Sanderson  and  answered  him  as  freely  as 
she  would  have  answered  Aunt  Debby. 

"Don't  be  pert,  young  lady.  Remember 
to  whom  you  are  speaking,  or  you  shall 
be  taught  to  remember.  There's  a  strange 
discrepancy  here."  He  turned  to  address 
this  last  statement  to  Miss  Watson.  "This," 
tapping  the  paper  with  the  edge  of  the 
glasses  which  he  had  just  removed  from 
his  nose,  "is  the  only  paper  which  bears 
such  a  statement.  As  you  see,  there  must 
be  two  parties  to  the  transaction." 

"It  is  very  evident,"  said  Miss  Watson. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER       99 

She  made  no  pretence  of  being  in  sym- 
pathy with  his  method  of  conducting  ex- 
aminations. 

He  turned  to  Hester,  and  with  his  most 
impressive  air,  said,  "And  so  you  have 
the  effrontery  to  stand  up  before  me  and 
declare  that  you  have  been  dishonest?" 

"Indeed,  I  have  been  nothing  of  the  sort," 
she  said  with  decision.  "On  the  con- 
trary, I  have  honestly  said  that  I  received 
help." 

"Be  careful,  be  careful.  You  must  re- 
member, young  lady,  to  whom  you  are 
speaking.  Your  offence  in  being  dishonest 
is  quite  enough,  without  adding  imperti- 
nence. I  demand  respect  from  my  pupils." 

"It  might  be  well  to  pay  respect  to 
them,"  said  Hester.  She  was  not  afraid 
of  Professor  Sanderson,  but  she  was  trem- 
bling with  anger.  His  sharp  speeches  were 
uncalled  for  and  undeserved.  She  had  no 
intention  of  bearing  them  as  though  they 
were  due  her. 


100     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

Her  three  companions  sank  down  upon 
the  recitation  bench  nearest  to  them.  Orpha 
looked  as  stolid  and  as  disinterested  as 
though  Professor  Sanderson  had  been  pass- 
ing remarks  about  the  weather.  Jane  sat 
quiet,  looking  straight  before  her.  She  was 
thinking  quickly  during  the  few  minutes. 

Mary  Bowerman  moved  restlessly.  Her 
hands  were  not  quiet  for  a  moment.  She 
fussed  with  her  belt  and  her  rings,  while 
her  glance  moved  quickly  from  one  point 
to  another. 

Professor  Sanderson  squared  his  shoul- 
ders, pressed  his  lips  together,  and  looking 
the  undaunted  Hester  straight  in  the  eye, 
said  sternly,  "To  whom  did  you  give 
help?" 

"I  cannot  tell  you." 

"You  can  not  tell  me."  He  repeated 
the  words  slowly  and  impressively.  "Do 
you  mean  to  say  that  you  have  not  the 
power  of  telling  me,  or  do  you  mean  to 
say  that  you  will  not  tell?" 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     101 

"I  will  not  tell."  Her  anger  had  passed. 
She  was  herself  again.  Her  one  thought 
now  was  that  she  had  better  hurry  home, 
lest  Aunt  Debby  would  be  waiting  the 
evening  meal  for  her.  Her  voice  was  quite 
calm,  but  decisive. 

Professor  Sanderson  looked  her  directly 
in  the  eye  as  though  by  force  of  will  he 
would  compel  her  submission.  She  met 
his  gaze  unmoved  and  fearless. 

It  was  to  be  regretted  that  Debby  Alden 
did  not  see  her  then.  Had  she  done  so,  all 
fearful  thoughts  of  the  child's  parentage 
would  have  left  her.  For  the  blood  of  a 
serf  could  not  be  in  the  veins  of  one  who 
defies  the  authority  that  would  compel 
him  to  do  that  which  his  sense  of  honor 
could  not  sanction. 


CHAPTER    VI 

~F\EBBY  ALDEN  had  prepared  supper, 
•^->^  and  sat  down  to  wait  Hester's  com- 
ing. The  old-fashioned  drop-leaf  table 
was  set  in  the  dining  room.  This  was 
an  innovation  from  the  first  of  Hester's 
school  days.  It  was  not  the  only  one. 
There  were  napkins  upon  the  table  and  a 
bouquet  of  asters  —  the  very  last  of  the 
fall  flowers.  Debby  had  laid  the  table 
after  the  fashion  laid  down  in  a  periodical 
devoted  to  questions  of  the  home.  It 
was  dainty  and  attractive,  without  going 
beyond  practical  common  sense. 

Before  the  coming  of  Hester,  Debby 
Alden  had  eaten  in  the  kitchen,  and  had 
not  used  napkins,  in  order  to  save  the  wash- 
ing. When  there  was  need  of  such  an 
article,  she  used  the  bottom  of  her  kitchen 
apron.  But  Hester  was  younger,  and 
102 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     103 

must  become  accustomed  to  the  use  of 
napkins,  or  she  would  appear  at  a  disad- 
vantage when  she  was  older  and  had  formed 
the  habits. 

Debby  waited  until  the  hour  at  which 
Hester  was  in  the  habit  of  returning  had 
passed.  Then  she  grew  uneasy.  She 
looked  from  the  window  to  see  if  the  girl 
had  come  into  the  yard,  and  when  she 
had  not,  she  went  to  the  gate  where 
she  could  get  a  view  of  the  road  and 
crossing. 

"She  has  gone  somewhere  with  the 
girls,"  she  said  again  and  again  to  encour- 
age herself.  But  when  almost  an  hour 
had  passed  and  Hester  had  not  come,  Debby 
put  on  her  hat  and  started  forth.  She 
was  never  without  an  uneasy  feeling  about 
the  railroad  crossing.  She  stopped  a 
moment  at  Mrs.  Bowerman's  to  inquire 
if  Hester  were  there.  Learning  that  Mary 
had  not  come  home,  Debby's  heart  grew 
lighter.  Nevertheless,  she  went  on  into 


104     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

town.  As  she  came  to  Seventh  Street 
and  Ontario  Avenue,  the  lights  were  turned 
on  in  the  high  school  building.  The  lower 
floors  were  in  darkness,  but  the  third  floor 
was  fairly  ablaze. 

She  made  her  way  through  the  dark 
entrance  and  hallways,  mounted  the  steep 
stairs,  and  came  to  the  door  of  Miss  Wat- 
son's recitation-room.  The  scene  within 
caused  her  to  pause.  Miss  Watson  sat 
with  weary  head  bowed  upon  her  upturned 
palms.  In  the  distant,  shadowy  part  of 
the  room,  huddled  together  as  though 
affected  by  fear,  sat  Jane,  Mary,  and  Orpha. 
Hester  stood  at  a  front  desk.  Her  hands 
were  back  of  her,  supported  on  the  top 
of  a  desk.  Her  head  was  tilted  back  as 
she  looked  Professor  Sanderson  squarely  in 
the  face.  Her  dark  hair  hung  in  a  single 
heavy  braid  down  her  back.  Her  cheeks 
were  flushed  and  her  eyes  brilliant  with 
feeling. 

Debby    Alden    caught    her    breath    and 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     105 

stood.  The  persons  within  the  room 
neither  saw  nor  heard  her. 

"I  have  given  you  a  half-hour  to  con- 
sider this  matter,  Miss  Alden,"  Professor 
Sanderson  was  saying.  He  stood  before 
her  with  his  watch  in  his  hand  as  though 
he  had  been  timing  her.  He  looked  at 
her  as  though  to  compel  her  to  do  as  he 
had  asked. 

"What  have  you  to  say  now?  Are  you 
ready  to  tell  me  the  name  of  the  person 
who  was  a  party  to  your  dishonesty?" 

"I  deny  that  I  was  dishonest.  I  re- 
ceived and  gave  help.  I  have  not  denied  it." 

"Answer  my  question,  Miss  Alden. 
Give  me  the  name  of  that  person." 

"I  will  not." 

"Very  well.  I  am  accustomed  to  being 
obeyed.  I  have  never  yet  allowed  a  pupil 
to  transgress  my  laws  or  infringe  upon  the 
discipline  of  the  rooms,  nor  do  I  intend  to. 
You  may  remain  in  the  room  until  you  are 
ready  to  obey  my  commands." 


106     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

"I  will  not  tell  either  now  or  an  hour 
later." 

"The  matter  is  settled.  You  remain 
here  until  you  do,  whether  it  be  one  hour 
or  twenty-four." 

He  was  about  to  pass  into  the  adjoining 
recitation-room  when  Miss  Watson  spoke 
to  him.  She  had  arisen.  Her  usually  pale 
cheeks  were  marked  by  a  spot  of  crimson. 
Her  dark  eyes  were  brilliant  with  indigna- 
tion, yet  when  she  addressed  him,  it  was 
with  the  courtesy  and  respect  due  to  his 
position.  "  Professor  Sanderson,  will  you 
not  reconsider  your  words?  I  think  you 
have  spoken  hastily." 

"Hastily!  I  am  not  in  the  habit  of 
speaking  hastily,  Miss  Watson.  I  most 
assuredly  shall  not  reconsider.  You  are 
out  of  your  jurisdiction,  Miss  Watson. 
Your  work  is  to  attend  to  the  work  in 
Latin.  I  shall  manage  the  discipline." 

"Perhaps  the  matter  is  out  of  my  juris- 
diction," she  said  quietly,  "but  this  even- 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     107 

ing  I  mean  to  make  it  mine.  I  think  Miss 
Alden  is  quite  right  in  the  stand  she  has 
taken." 

Professor  Sanderson  had  been  standing 
at  the  door  of  the  recitation-room.  But 
at  such  revolutionary  words  he  turned  and 
came  back  into  the  room.  He  had  not 
learned  self-control,  for  he  was  trembling 
with  rage.  But  Miss  Watson,  actuated  in 
her  words  by  a  sense  of  justice,  was  not  at 
all  awed  by  his  sputtering  and  show  of  anger. 

"What!  Is  it  possible,  Miss  Watson, 
that  you  have  the  audacity  to  stand  there 
before  my  face  and  tell  me  that  you  take 
sides  with  a  pupil  against  a  principal?  Is 
it  possible  ?  I  shall  see  to  it  that  my  teach- 
ers as  well  as  the  pupils  are  disciplined. 
You  have  need  of  it." 

"We'll  discuss  that  later.  At  present 
the  subject  is  Miss  Alden.  I  surely  do 
take  sides  with  her.  I  must  ask  you  to 
allow  her  to  go  home  now.  She  has  al- 
ready been  detained  several  hours." 


108     THE   COMING   OF   HESTER 

"Never,  until  she  is  willing  to  do  as  I 
have  commanded." 

"Then  I  shall  take  the  responsibility. 
Hester,"  turning  to  the  girl  who  stood 
silent  before  her,  "take  your  wraps  and 
go  home.  You  have  been  kept  here  long 
enough." 

"You  shall  answer  to  me  for  this,  Miss 
Watson,"  cried  the  principal.  His  face 
was  crimson  with  rage.  He  had  so  lost 
his  self-control  that  his  voice  rolled  forth 
like  a  clap  of  thunder. 

"I  shall  answer  to  the  board  of  directors 
and  the  city  superintendent,"  replied  Miss 
Watson,  quietly.  "Go  home  now,  Hester; 
your  Aunt  Debby  will  be  alarmed  about 
you." 

"I'll  stay,  Miss  Watson ! "  she  cried, 
clinging  to  this  teacher  whom  the  pupils 
loved  and  admired.  "My  going  home  will 
cause  trouble  for  you.  I'll  stay  rather 
than  that." 

"Nonsense,  child.    There'll  be  no  trouble 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     109 

further  than  telling  my  story  to  the  di- 
rectors. Go,  now."  At  this  Debby  Alden 
came  into  the  room.  That  part  of  the 
conversation  which  she  had  overheard  had 
left  her  all  at  sea  as  to  the  cause  of  offence 
or  the  remedy  for  it.  Mr.  Sanderson  had 
already  left  the  room,  and  knew  not  that  she 
had  entered.  She  came  up  to  where  Miss 
Watson  and  Hester  stood.  "  What's  the 
trouble?"  she  asked.  "You  haven't  been 
misbehaving,  Hester  ? ' ' 

"I  don't  know,  Aunt  Debby.  You  may 
think  so." 

"Sit  down,  Miss  Alden,"  said  Miss  Wat- 
son, drawing  a  chair  closer.  "Let  me 
tell  you  the  story  from  the  first.  You 
can  judge  for  yourself." 

Debby  Alden  seated  herself.  Miss  Wat- 
son repeated  the  events  of  the  day.  As 
far  as  possible,  she  kept  her  own  opinions 
in  the  background. 

"Hester  received  help  on  the  fifteenth 
problem,  and  gave  help  on  the  thirteenth." 


110     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

"You  shouldn't  have  done  that,  Hester," 
said  Debby.  "If  you  didn't  know,  you 
shouldn't  have  answered  it." 

"I  suppose  I  shouldn't  have  done  so," 
said  Hester.  "I  did  not  intend  to  do  so, 
Aunt  Debby.  I  did  not  know  then  that 
we  were  to  write  on  our  paper  whether  we 
had  given  or  received  help.  I  really  did 
it  thoughtlessly." 

"A  girl  fifteen  years  old  has  a  right  to 
think,"  responded  Debby  Alden,  grimly. 
"Thinking  about  what  you  do  is  part  of  your 
business."  That  was  all  the  encourage- 
ment she  received  from  Debby  Alden. 

Miss  Watson  continued  her  story.  When 
she  said  that  Hester  had  refused  to  turn 
tale-bearer,  Debby 's  face  lighted  up.  The 
words  gave  her  a  sense  of  relief.  She 
turned  to  Hester.  "I'm  glad  you  wrote 
what  was  true  across  your  paper.  It 
would  have  been  wrong  to  do  anything  else, 
and  I'm  glad  you  didn't  tell  on  that  other 
person.  I  don't  like  the  idea  of  your  being 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     111 

disobedient,  but  you  shouldn't  have  told. 
I  don't  know  whether  any  one  had  a  right 
to  ask  that  of  you.  Come,  get  your  wraps, 
Hester,  and  we'll  go  home." 

At  this,  Mr.  Sanderson  walked  through 
the  room.  He  recognized  Miss  Alden  as 
Debby's  legal  protector,  for  the  story  of  the 
child's  adoption  was  widely  known. 

"I  trust,  Miss  Alden,  that  you  have 
heard  the  truth  about  Miss  Hester's  dis- 
obedience and  dishonesty." 

Debby  Alden  arose,  and  with  the  native 
dignity  and  self-possession  which  were  al- 
ways with  her,  replied:  "I've  been  told 
that  you  couldn't  compel  her  to  turn  tale- 
bearer. I'm  glad  of  it.  There's  nothing 
that  is  dishonest  in  keeping  such  matters 
to  yourself.  Come,  Hester.  Bid  Miss  Wat- 
son good  evening." 

She  left  the  room,  followed  by  Hester's 
three  girl  friends.  Jane  discussed  the 
matter  freely;  Orpha  listened  in  her  own 
heavy,  dull  way,  while  Mary  Bowerman 


112     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

walked  along  on  the  other  edge  of  the  group 
and  had  nothing  at  all  to  say. 

"I'm  afraid  mother  will  not  like  my 
staying  so  long,"  said  Jane,  "but  she  will 
not  care  when  I  tell  her  the  reason.  I  had 
no  intention  of  leaving  that  room  until  I 
saw  what  was  going  to  be  done  with  you." 

"I  was  getting  afraid  when  Professor 
said  I  should  stay  there  until  I  told.  It 
would  have  been  dreadful  to  stay  there 
alone  all  night." 

"But  you  wouldn't  be  alone,"  said  Jane. 
"Do  you  think  that  I  would  go  home  and 
leave  you  there  ?  Well,  hardly.  I  was  doing 
some  thinking,  Hester,  while  you  and  Mr. 
Sanderson  were  talking.  I  had  my  plans 
well  made." 

"What  would  you  have  done,  Jane?" 
She  slipped  one  arm  through  Jane's;  the 
other  was  already  clinging  tight  about  her 
Aunt  Debby. 

"I  thought  that  Miss  Watson  would  not 
go  home  and  leave  you  alone,  but  if  she 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     113 

did,  I  meant  to  stay.  I  meant  to  have 
Mary  leave  word  at  home  to  send  us  some- 
thing to  eat.  We  wouldn't  have  had  such 
a  dreadful  night,  Hester.  We  could  have 
had  our  lunch  and  read  the  library  books, 
and  then  —  well,  the  benches  would  not 
have  been  the  softest  cots  in  the  world. 
But,"  with  a  smile,  "I  suppose  when  one  is 
tired,  one  doesn't  think  much  of  the  bed." 

"I  think  it  would  be  dreadful  to  stay 
there  all  night,"  began  Hester.  She  now 
feared  the  thought  of  it  more  than  she  had 
feared  the  possibility. 

''But  you  wouldn't  have  told,  even  if  you 
were  afraid?"  asked  Jane. 

"  Never.  I'll  never  tell.  If  Professor  San- 
derson would  have  kept  me  there  for  a 
week  I  would  not  have  told." 

"Why?"  asked  Orpha.  She  raised  her 
dull,  expressionless  eyes  to  Hester.  It  was 
impossible  for  Orpha  to  grasp  that  subtle 
difference  between  action  actuated  by  a 
high  sense  of  honor  and  that  which  was  not. 


114     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

"  Because,"  replied  Jane,  quickly.  "  Isn't 
that  an  excellent  reason,  Orpha?  She 
wouldn't  because  she  wouldn't."  Jane  had 
long  since  learned  how  worse  than  wasted 
were  those  explanations  which  were  given 
to  Orpha. 

"I  suppose  Professor  Sanderson  will  not 
go  from  his  way  to  be  good  to  me,  after 
what  has  happened,"  said  Hester.  A  pained 
expression  came  to  her  eyes  for  an  instant. 
She  was  an  affectionate  girl,  to  whom  the 
love  and  kindness  of  those  with  whom  she 
lived  and  those  with  whom  she  worked  at 
school  were  necessary  for  her  happiness. 
During  these  last  two  months  she  had  seen 
enough  of  Professor  Sanderson  to  realize 
that  she  could  never  again  be  in  his  good 
books.  The  thought  hurt  her.  But,  deter- 
mined not  to  show  how  much  the  experi- 
ence she  had  gone  through  had  affected  her, 
she  said  with  assumed  carelessness:  "But, 
Miss  Watson  will  be  there.  So  long  as  we 
have  her,  we  can  go  along  without  Professor 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     115 

Sanderson's  good-will.  But,  nevertheless, 
I'm  glad  that  I  do  not  recite  to  him." 

"It  will  blow  over  in  a  day  or  so.  You 
will  forget  it,  and  so  will  he.  Don't  you 
think  so,  Miss  Debby?"  asked  Jane. 

"I  don't  know.    I  hope  so,"  she  replied. 

"I'm  sure  it  will  not,"  said  Hester.  "I 
remember  just  ordinary  occurrences  longer 
than  that;  I  know  I  shall  never  forget  this." 

"You  think  so  now."  Jane  smiled 
blandly.  She  had  found  the  touchstone 
of  happiness.  She  always  managed  to  turn 
the  darkest  cloud  about  until  she  caught  a 
glimpse  of  its  silver  lining. 

"I  see  plainly  how  the  matter  will  end. 
That  other  party  to  the  transaction  will  hear 
of  what  took  place  this  evening,  and  then 
she'll  walk  up  like  a  lady  and  plead  guilty. 
Don't  you  think  so,  Mary?"  She  turned  to 
Mary,  who  was  lagging  along  on  the  outer  edge 
of  the  line,  several  steps  behind  the  others. 

"How  do  I  know?  I  haven't  listened  to 
a  word  you  were  saying." 


116     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"Well,  that  is  flattering.  All  my  flow  of 
eloquence  wasted  !  "  She  looked  back  over 
her  shoulder  as  she  continued:  "Why  don't 
you  come  and  walk  with  us?  There's 
plenty  of  room  on  these  wide  pavements, 
and  we're  not  apt  to  meet  any  one  this 
time  in  the  evening."  Then,  as  Mary  did 
not  respond  to  her  invitation,  she  continued : 
"What's  the  trouble?  You've  been  glum 
for  the  last  hour.  I  haven't  heard  you  say 
a  word  since  we  left  school." 

"There  wouldn't  have  been  much  chance, 
if  I'd  wanted  to." 

"I'll  keep  quiet.  Speak  up.  I  promise 
I  will  not  say  another  word  unless  you  ask 
me."  There  was  always  good-humor  in 
Jane's  voice  and  manner.  In  all  the  school- 
girl spats,  she  met  the  most  ill-natured  re- 
marks with  apparent  good-nature.  Now 
she  but  smiled  again,  as  Mary  retorted: 
"Don't  try  it.  You'd  go  into  convulsions 
if  you  couldn't  do  all  the  talking." 

Hester  alone  understood  the  reason  for 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     117 

Mary's  lack  of  interest  in  the  conversation. 
She  was  disappointed  in  her  friend.  She 
knew  that  Mary  was  sharp  in  her  way  of 
speaking,  but  she  had  always  believed  her 
upright  and  honorable.  But  the  occur- 
rences of  the  day  had  proved  that  she  was 
neither.  She  meant  to  tell  Mary  plainly 
what  she  thought  of  such  conduct,  but  she 
could  not  do  so  in  the  presence  of  others. 
She  decided  to  wait  and  create  an  oppor- 
tunity of  seeing  her  alone  on  the  morrow. 

One  by  one  the  girls  left  Debby  and 
Hester,  and  the  last  of  their  walk  was  alone. 
Debby  did  not  again  bring  up  the  subject 
of  the  trouble  in  school.  She  was  vexed 
with  Hester  that  the  girl  had  taken  help 
from  any  one ;  on  the  other  hand,  she  was 
pleased  that  no  denial  had  been  made  of 
this,  and  that  Hester  had  taken  such  a 
stand  with  regard  to  giving  information.  So 
the  matter  was  equalized.  The  supper  had 
been  almost  spoiled  from  waiting  so  long, 
yet  both  were  so  hungry  that  they  could 


118     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

have  relished  less  palatable  fare.  During 
the  meal  Debby  kept  up  the  conversation, 
for  the  reaction  had  begun  with  Hester,  and 
she  was  nervous  and  depressed. 

Debby  would  not  allow  her  to  talk  of 
school,  and  kept  the  conversation  to  the 
trifling  matters  of  the  house  and  some  new 
shirt-waists  which  they  were  making.  She 
was  not  a  little  curious  about  the  girl  who 
had  been  party  to  giving  help  in  class,  yet 
she  would  not  ask  Hester  to  tell  her. 

"It's  no  use  of  my  knowing,"  she  re- 
peated to  herself.  "No  good  will  come  of 
it.  I  might  tell  before  I  was  aware  of 
what  I  was  saying.  Then,  too,  I'd  dislike 
a  girl  who  wouldn't  be  honest.  I'd  dislike 
her  doubly  because  it  was  my  Hester  who 
was  harmed  by  her  not  telling.  I  suppose 
it  isn't  right  to  feel  so,  but  it's  natural." 

She  hurried  with  the  supper  work,  Hester 
drying  the  dishes,  while  her  aunt  washed 
them.  When  the  work  was  finished,  Hester 
took  out  her  books,  but  Debby  stopped  her. 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     119 

"  We're  not  going  to  study  one  speck 
this  night,"  she  said  decidedly.  "I'll  work 
a  spell  at  those  waists,  and  you  can  read. 
We'll  not  stay  up.  We're  both  tuckered 
out,  and  I  mean  that  we  shall  be  in  bed 
early." 

Hester  was  pleased  with  this  arrange- 
ment. She  was  tired.  She  took  up  a  book, 
but  could  not  fix  her  mind  upon  it.  In 
spite  of  her  efforts,  her  thoughts  went  back 
to  the  events  of  the  afternoon.  Before  a 
half-hour  had  passed,  she  laid  aside  her  book 
and  suggested  that  they  go  to  bed. 

She  thought  to  meet  Mary  Bowerman 
on  the  way  to  school  the  next  morning, 
but  that  young  lady  had  been  wise  and  had 
been  gone  from  home  some  time  when  Hes- 
ter passed  the  Bowermans'.  When  Hester 
entered  the  class  room,  Mary  was  in  her 
seat,  studying  so  diligently  that  she  neither 
spoke  nor  raised  her  head  as  Hester  passed 
her.  At  noon  she  was  the  first  to  leave 
and  the  last  to  enter  for  the  afternoon 


120     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

session.  She  seemed  as  anxious  to  avoid 
being  alone  with  Hester  as  the  latter  was  to 
meet  her. 

During  the  middle  of  the  afternoon 
session  Mary  walked  into  the  cloak-room. 
As  quickly  as  she  could  be  excused,  Hester 
was  with  her.  Mary  turned  quickly  when 
she  heard  the  door  close.  Recognizing  Hes- 
ter, she  was  about  to  leave  the  room,  but 
Hester  detained  her.  "Wait  one  moment, 
Mary.  I  must  speak  to  you." 

"I  haven't  time.  I'll  see  you  after 
school.  I  must  get  out  my  geometry." 
She  spoke  with  careless  indifference,  which, 
however,  did  not  deceive  her  companion 
into  believing  that  she  was  wholly  uncon- 
cerned. She  again  moved  toward  the  door, 
but  Hester  was  before  her.  Standing  with 
her  back  against  the  door,  she  looked  squarely 
at  Mary. 

"I  wish  to  know  why  you  didn't  write 
on  your  examination  paper  that  you,  too, 
had  received  help." 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     121 

Mary  tilted  back  her  head.  "It  seems  to 
me  that  that  is  my  business,  Hester  Alden." 

"It  is  partly  my  business.  You  heard 
what  took  place  last  evening.  Why  didn't 
you  tell  then?" 

"What  is  it  to  you?  You  were  not 
punished  on  my  account.  You  — " 

"You  heard  what  Professor  Sanderson 
said  to  me.  He  would  have  punished  me 
severely  if  Miss  Watson  had  not  come  to 
my  help." 

"But  not  on  my  account.  He  did  that 
because  you  were  so  obstinate.  If  you  had 
told  him  when  he  asked  you  at  first,  the 
matter  would  have  ended  there." 

"Did  you  wish  me  to  tell?  If  you  were 
so  indifferent  to  consequences,  why  did  you 
not  tell  him  that  you  were  the  other 
party?" 

"You  seemed  to  have  some  particular 
reason  for  keeping  it  a  secret.  My  telling 
would  not  have  helped  matters  for  you. 
Professor  Sanderson  was  punishing  you  for 


122     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

your  obstinacy.  Don't  put  the  blame  of 
it  on  me." 

Hester  stood  and  looked  at  Mary.  She 
could  not  understand  such  a  nature.  She 
had  played  with  Mary  Bowerman  since  the 
primary  days,  and  thought  that  she  knew 
her  so  well. 

"Did  you  wish  me  to  tell?"  she  asked 
again. 

"I  have  nothing  to  say  about  what  you 
do.  Suit  yourself.  I  suppose,  though, 
you'll  do  the  heroic  part  and  have  Miss 
Watson  fuss  over  you.  She's  treated  you 
to-day  as  though  you  were  too  precious  for 
everyday  use,  and  should  be  kept  under  a 
glass  case.  Tell?  Why,  you  wouldn't  tell 
if  I'd  get  down  on  my  knees  and  beg  you 
to.  You  enjoy  playing  the  heroic  too  well. 
No,"  with  a  disdainful  toss  of  her  head  as 
though  by  that  motion  she  cast  the  matter 
from  her,  "I  have  nothing  to  say  about 
what  you'll  do." 

"I  have  something  to  say  about  what 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     123 

you'll  do,  Mary  Bowerman."  Hester  spoke 
decidedly.  "If  you  have  one  spark  of 
honor,  one  little  mite  of  self-respect  left, 
you'll  go  to  Professor  Sanderson  this  very 
day  and  tell  him  that  I  wrote  out  the  im- 
perative mode  for  you." 

"See  me  do  it.  Get  away  from  that 
door,  Hester  Alden,  and  let  me  go  back  to 
the  room.  I  haven't  glanced  at  my  geome- 
try yet." 

"I'll  not  get  away  from  the  door  until 
I'm  through  talking,  and  I'm  not  through 
yet,  Mary  Bowerman.  I'll  not  be  through 
until  I  tell  you  what  I  think  of  you." 

Mary  gave  a  disdainful  toss  of  her  head 
and  twisted  her  mouth  into  an  expression 
of  weariness.  She  leaned  against  the  wall 
as  she  said,  indifferently:  "Well,  proceed. 
When  words  fail  you,  consult  the  dictionary 
in  the  next  room.  But  remember,  Hester, 
what  Miss  Warner  has  taught  you  in  com- 
position. When  in  doubt,  cut  out  adjec- 
tives." 


124     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

Her  tones  and  expression  were  galling. 
Hester's  eyes  flashed.  She  began  to  speak 
quickly,  hurriedly,  and  in  anger.  "I  think 
you  are  mean  and  dishonorable.  You've 
cheated  and  lied  about  it,  and  you've 
treated  me  disagreeably,  and  insulted  me 
because  I  would  not  betray  you.  You  are 
the  most  deceitful  person  I  know.  I'll 
never  call  you  friend  again.  I'll  never 
speak  to  you  as  long  as  I  live."  She  caught 
herself  quickly,  for  Aunt  Debby's  training 
asserted  itself.  "Yes,  I'll  speak  to  you.  I 
didn't  mean  that  I  never  would.  But  it 
will  be  weeks  and  weeks  before  I  do.  I 
mean  every  word  I  said  about  despising 
you." 

"Who  cares  if  you  speak  or  not?  You 
have  such  a  temper  and  flare  up  so,  that 
it's  hardly  safe  to  be  where  you  are.  As  to 
speaking  to  me,  you  should  be  glad  and 
thankful  if  I  or  any  other  nice  girl  notice 
you.  You're  nothing  but  a  tramp  baby." 

Hester's    eyes    opened    wide.    This    was 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     125 

new  to  her.  "What  do  you  mean?  Tell 
me  how  you  dare  say  such  a  thing,  Mary 
Bowerman." 

"I  dare  say  it,  because  it's  true.  Your 
mother  was  tramping  through  the  country 
when  she  was  killed.  If  Miss  Debby  Alden 
hadn't  taken  pity  on  you,  you'd  have  been 
sent  to  the  county  home." 

There  was  a  ring  of  conviction  in  this 
speech  that  impressed  Hester.  She  gazed 
at  Mary  with  a  shocked,  startled  look.  She 
had  neither  voice  nor  words  to  reply  to  this. 
Mary  saw  the  effect  of  her  words,  and  took 
advantage  of  it. 

"You  don't  intend  to  notice  me.  You 
have  no  idea  how  funny  that  sounds.  Why, 
the  only  reason  that  I  and  the  other  girls 
ever  had  anything  at  all  to  do  with  you  is 
that  we  pitied  you.  But  now  we'll  cut  you. 
Remember,  Hester  Alden,  you  need  never 
expect  to  go  with  me  and  my  friends." 

Hester  had  unconsciously  moved  away 
from  the  door.  Mary,  seeing  her  oppor- 


126     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

tunity,  hurried  from  the  room.  As  she  left, 
she  looked  back  over  her  shoulder  and 
laughed  tauntingly. 

Left  alone,  Hester  stood  leaning  against 
the  wall.  She  was  dazed.  She  could  not 
return  to  the  schoolroom.  She  wished  to 
think  about  what  Mary  had  said,  yet  she 
could  not  think,  for  everything  was  mixed 
up  in  her  brain,  and  the  room  moved  un- 
certain before  her. 


CHAPTER  VII 

TTESTER  ALDEN  was  absent  from  the 
geometry  class,  which  recited  to  Mr. 
Wilbur.  This  teacher  was  new  to  the  ways 
of  high  school.  He  inquired  for  Miss  Alden, 
and  no  one  volunteering  information,  the 
subject  was  dismissed.  The  freshmen  Latin 
followed  the  geometry.  Miss  Watson,  who 
had  taken  charge  of  that  department,  was 
alert.  She  at  once  missed  Miss  Alden,  but 
asked  no  information  in  general  concerning 
her.  On  the  contrary,  she  turned  to  Jane 
with  the  question,  "Miss  Orr,  where  is  Miss 
Alden?" 

"She  went  into  the  cloak-room  before 
geometry  class.  She  had  not  returned  when 
the  class  came  over." 

That  was  all  for  that  time.  Miss  Watson 
gave  them  work  to  keep  them  employed. 
Then,  unobserved,  she  went  into  the  cloak- 

127 


128     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

room.  Hester  stood  just  as  Mary  had  left 
her  almost  an  hour  before.  Her  head  was 
against  the  wall,  while  her  hand  clasped 
the  coat  rack  for  support. 

"What  is  the  trouble?  Are  you  ill, 
Hester?" 

She  raised  her  head  and  looked  at  Miss 
Watson. 

"I  don't  know,"  she  said  wearily.  "I 
think  I  must  be." 

"Go  to  the  teachers'  room  and  lie  down. 
When  you  feel  better,  you  may  go  home. 
I'll  explain  to  the  other  teachers."  She 
was  alarmed  by  the  pallor  of  Hester's  face 
and  the  peculiarly  dazed  expression  of  her 
eyes. 

The  girl  made  an  attempt  to  obey,  but 
the  room  moved  about  her.  She  threw  out 
her  arms  to  steady  herself.  Miss  Watson 
came  to  her  assistance.  Throwing  her  arms 
about  her,  Hester  leaned  her  head  against 
her  and  sobbed  aloud.  Miss  Watson  let  her 
have  her  cry  out,  and  then  said:  "Something 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     129 

from  the  ordinary  has  happened,  Hester. 
Can  you  tell  me  what  it  is?" 

"No,  Miss  Watson.  I've  heard  some- 
thing that  troubled  me.  It  made  me  ill." 

Perhaps  Miss  Watson  had  a  suspicion 
what  that  something  was.  She  knew  Hes- 
ter's story.  She  had  spent  her  life  with 
young  girls,  and  read  them  better  than 
they  suspected. 

"I  should  not  allow  myself  to  be  troubled 
by  what  I  heard.  There  are  many  things 
repeated  that  are  not  worth  a  thought. 
Don't  allow  yourself  to  be  disturbed  by 
such  matters.  You  must  bear  in  mind  that 
much  of  what  one  hears  is  not  the  truth. 
Perhaps  what  has  disturbed  you  may  not 
have  a  grain  of  truth  in  it." 

Hester  raised  her  head.  "Perhaps  it 
hasn't,  but  it  sounded  like  the  truth.  She 
surely  would  not  have  dared  to  say  such 
things  if  they  were  not  true." 

Miss  Watson  had  no  idea  to  whom  she 
referred.  "Some  people  dare  do  anything," 


130     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

she  said.  "I  must  return  to  my  class. 
Remain  in  the  teachers'  room  until  you 
feel  better."  With  this  advice  she  was 
gone.  Hester  went  into  the  teachers'  room, 
but  could  not  lie  down.  She  stood  by  the 
window,  her  head  pressed  against  the  cool 
pane.  She  went  over  all  that  Mary  had 
said,  and  she  brought  to  mind  all  the 
little  incidents  and  suggestions  that  had 
been  given  her  concerning  her  mother's 
death. 

Aunt  Debby  had  told  her  very  little. 
She  knew  that  her  mother  had  been  killed 
at  the  crossing,  and  that  she  was  buried  at 
Fairview.  Aunt  Debby  had  taken  her  to 
see  the  grave.  The  granite  slab  had  upon 
it  only  the  date  of  her  mother's  death. 
There  was  neither  date  of  birth  nor  name. 

"It  must  be  true,"  she  said.  "Aunt 
Debby  didn't  know  her  age  and  name.  No 
one  knew.  Aunt  Debby  just  took  me  in." 
Then  a  new  thought  came  to  her  in  con- 
nection with  Debby  Alden.  Like  a  flash 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     131 

there  spread  out  before  the  girl's  eyes  the 
long  stretch  of  sixteen  years  of  kindness 
and  care  that  this  woman  had  given  her. 
It  helped  her  to  bear  the  loss  of  name  and 
mother.  "Wasn't  that  noble  of  Aunt 
Debby?"  she  said  to  herself,  while  her 
heart  gave  a  leap  of  joy,  "and  I  hadn't  one 
little  bit  of  claim  upon  her." 

As  she  looked  at  the  subject  with  this 
new  knowledge  before  her,  she  felt  that 
Mary  Bowerman  had  told  the  truth.  She 
really  belonged  to  no  one,  and  the  name 
Alden  in  which  she  had  taken  so  much 
pride  was  not  her  own.  She  was  naturally 
of  a  happy  disposition.  She  could  not  be 
depressed  long.  Her  youth  and  vitality 
asserted  itself,  and  before  the  time  for  the 
closing  of  the  day's  session  had  come,  she 
was  outwardly  herself  again. 

Entering  the  schoolroom,  she  put  her 
books  in  order,  and  then  spoke  to  Jane, 
asking  her  to  wait  to  walk  home  with  her. 
She  felt  as  though  she  could  -not  treat  Mary 


132     THE   COMING   OF   HESTER 

courteously  if  they  were  together,  and  she 
did  not  wish  to  be  alone. 

Jane  lingered  in  the  cloak-room.  Mary 
was  deliberate  about  arranging  her  books, 
so  that  the  greater  number  of  pupils  had 
gone  before  she  was  ready.  Hester  hurried 
after  Jane.  "I'm  ready  now,  Jane.  Come 
on." 

"Let  us  wait  for  Mary.  She'll  be  here 
in  a  minute.  She  and  Orpha  will  come 
together."  Then  Hester  replied,  as  she  ob- 
served the  surprised  look,  "Mary  and  I  had 
a  little  spat  to-day.  I  do  not  wish  to  walk 
home  with  her  until,  —  well,  until  I  feel 
differently  toward  her." 

"Oh,  very  well."  Jane  turned  and  came 
with  her.  She  asked  no  questions  about 
the  cause  of  the  difficulty.  A  proper  regard 
for  other  persons'  affairs  had  been  bred  in 
her.  If  Hester  saw  fit  to  tell  her  about 
the  trouble  with  Mary,  well  and  good,  but 
if  she  did  not,  Jane  had  no  thought  of  ask- 
ing impertinent  questions. 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     133 

The  two  walked  home  together,  talking 
freely  of  every  subject  of  common  interest 
except  the  difficulty  with  Mary  Bowerman. 

Hester  had  part  of  her  walk  alone,  as 
Jane  lived  just  at  the  edge  of  town.  Aunt 
Debby  was  standing  at  the  gate  waiting 
for  her.  Hester  saw  her  at  a  distance  and 
waved.  Debby  Alden  returned  the  salute 
with  interest.  As  Hester  came  closer,  she 
saw  the  woman  in  a  new  light.  Debby 
Alden  had  improved  since  the  day  she 
had  had  her  heart-to-heart  talk  with  Miss 
Richards  fully  ten  years  before.  Her  life 
had  grown  fuller  and  broader,  and  every 
expression  of  her  face,  every  movement, 
gave  testimony  to  it. 

Her  hair  was  drawn  softly  from  her  fore- 
head. The  stern  expression  of  her  eyes 
had  given  place  to  a  tender  one.  Her  soft 
white  waist  was  dainty  and  becoming. 
She  had  lost  nothing  of  her  strength  and 
individuality,  but  to  them  she  had  added  a 
gentle  sweetness  and  consideration. 


134     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

"I  was  tempted  to  wait  and  walk  home 
with  you,"  she  said,  as  Hester  came  near. 
"I  have  been  in  town  the  greater  part  of 
the  day.  Mrs.  Orr  and  I  went  shopping 
this  morning,  and  we  had  our  club  meeting 
this  afternoon." 

"Did  you  have  a  good  time?"  asked 
Hester,  entering  the  gate.  Her  voice  had  a 
new  touch  to  it  which  did  not  escape  Debby 
Alden.  She  turned  and  looked  keenly  at 
Hester,  but  there  was  nothing  in  the  girl's 
expression  to  cause  alarm.  Thus  reassured, 
she  replied  to  Hester's  question,  "Yes,  I 
did  have  a  good  time.  Perhaps  it  was  be- 
cause I  enjoyed  the  work.  You  know  I  was 
to  read  a  paper  on  myths  and  folk-lore.  I 
read  it  to  you  several  weeks  ago.  The  ladies 
declared  it  was  fine,  and  wondered  how  I 
found  time  to  devote  so  much  time  to  re- 
search." She  laughed,  and  Hester  joined  her. 

"Did  you  tell  them,  Aunt  Debby,  that  it 
had  taken  you  ten  years  to  write  that 
paper  ? " 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     135 

"No,  I  did  not,  Hester.  I'm  afraid  they 
would  have  doubted  it  if  I  had." 

"Yet  it  is  true." 

"Yes,  but  I'm  afraid  they  would  not 
have  understood.  It  has  been  just  ten 
years ;  for  you  were  five  when  Miss  Richards 
gave  me  the  book  to  find  stories  for  you. 
That  was  the  first,  and  we've  not  neglected 
it  since." 

"But  they've  grown  harder,  Aunt  Debby. 
You  have  no  idea  what  a  help  in  the  classics 
my  knowing  them  has  been.  I  never  need 
look  up  the  allusions.  Miss  Leonard  com- 
plimented me  upon  knowing  them,  and 
Miss  Watson  says  that  knowing  the  Greek 
and  Latin  myths  will  be  a  great  help  when 
we  begin  to  read  Virgil." 

They  were  walking  toward  the  house. 
Hester  had  her  arm  about  Debby  Alden's 
waist.  The  girl  felt  that  she  must  show 
her  affection  and  gratitude  in  some  way. 
Had  she  had  her  way,  she  would  have  ex- 
pressed her  love  in  no  weak  words,  and 


136     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

would  have  told  Debby  Alden  how  she  ap- 
preciated the  care  and  self-sacrifice  that  she 
had  given  her.  But  to  have  said  a  word  on 
the  subject  would  disclose  the  fact  that 
Hester  knew  what  Aunt  Debby  wished 
kept  from  her. 

"If  Aunt  Debby  wished  me  to  know," 
reasoned  Hester,  "she  would  have  told  me. 
I  shall  never  let  her  know  what  Mary  has 
told  me." 

"Virgil,"  repeated  Debby.  "The  word 
sounds  difficult.  I'm  afraid  that  I  shall 
never  be  able  to  read  it.  Perhaps  you  can 
manage  that  alone,  Hester." 

"Oh,  Aunt  Debby,  don't  give  it  up. 
Miss  Watson  says  that  we're  just  now  in 
the  drudgery  of  Latin,  and  that  the  pleas- 
ure will  come  when  we  begin  reading  the 
stories.  You  will  not  give  it  up,  Aunt 
Debby?" 

"We'll  not  decide  until  next  fall,  Hester. 
That  will  be  time  enough."  The  beginner's 
work  in  Latin  had  been  difficult  for  her, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     137 

Hester  did  not  realize  how  hard  the  woman 
studied  to  keep  up  with  her.  However, 
one  strong  point  was  in  her  favor;  while 
the  lessons  were  difficult  to  acquire,  she  was 
able  to  retain  them. 

"Supper  is  not  ready,"  said  Debby,  as 
they  entered  the  kitchen.  "But  we'll  take 
our  time.  There  is  no  need  to  hurry,  since 
to-day's  Friday  and  there'll  be  no  lessons 
this  evening." 

"I'll  arrange  the  table,"  said  Hester. 
Without  waiting,  she  began  to  assist  her 
Aunt  Debby.  She  had  it  in  mind  to  be  a 
help  and  a  comfort  to  the  one  who  had 
befriended  her.  She  watched  herself  closely 
and  did  all  things  as  Debby  Alden  wished 
them  done.  When  supper  was  finished,  she 
helped  with  the  dishes,  and  never  before 
had  the  china  such  a  polishing  as  it  had 
this  particular  evening.  Suddenly  she 
paused,  with  a  plate  in  one  hand  and  the 
drying  towel  in  the  other.  "I've  just  be- 
gun to  realize  how  much  you've  done  for 


138     THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

me,  Aunt  Debby.  I  suppose  I'll  never  be 
able  to  repay  you." 

"Who  has  ever  said  anything  about 
being  paid?  It  wasn't  for  that  I  brought 
you  up."  She  spoke  sharply. 

"I  know  that,  yet  I'd  be  ungrateful  if  I 
didn't  realize  what  you've  done  for  me 
and  what  sacrifices  you've  made.  I  was 
thinking  about  it  to-day  while  I  was  in 
school,  and  I  made  up  my  mind  then  that 
the  best  I  could  do  would  never  make 
matters  quite  even  between  us.  I  want  to 
be  a  great  help  and  comfort  to  you,  Aunt 
Debby." 

"The  greatest  comfort  you  can  be  to  me 
now  is  to  get  your  lessons  well  in  school, 
and  be  honest  and  truthful.  I  hate  a 
sneak  and  a  liar.  I  never  could  understand 
why  the  Lord  let  them  cumber  the  earth." 
She  spoke  sternly.  Hester  did  not  remem- 
ber the  time  when  she  had  heard  her  aunt 
speak  in  just  that  way.  There  was  a  touch 
of  fierceness  in  her  voice  that  awed  the 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     139 

girl.  But  she  said  simply:  "I'll  try,  then, 
to  be  a  comfort  to  you,  Aunt  Debby.  I'll 
get  the  best  reports  I  can.  As  to  ever 
being  a  sneak  or  a  liar,  I  do  not  believe  I 
could  be  either,  Aunt  Debby,  if  I  tried." 

She  put  the  plates  in  the  corner  of  the 
cupboard,  rinsed  out  the  drying  towel,  and 
sat  down  near  her  aunt.  The  kitchen  clock 
striking  the  hour  aroused  her  to  her  sur- 
roundings. "Half-past  eight.  We  surely 
are  late.  I  think,  Aunt  Debby,  I  will  go 
to  bed  if  you  do  not  need  me,  and  do  not 
mind  sitting  alone." 

"Are  you  sick,  Hester?" 

"No;  I'm  not  just  sick,  but  I  do  not 
feel  like  myself.  I  did  not  feel  well  in 
school.  I  stayed  in  the  teachers'  room  and 
missed  two  classes." 

"You'd  better  go  to  bed,  then.  I'll  be 
up  in  a  few  minutes.  You  must  keep  warm. 
You'd  better  put  blankets  on  your  bed. 
Get  those  gray  ones  from  the  chest." 

When  Hester  had  gone  from  the  kitchen, 


140     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

Debby  Alden  went  out  to  the  wash-house 
in  search  of  her  unfailing  remedy,  a  fire- 
brick, which  she  put  on  top  of  the  kitchen 
stove  to  heat.  When  it  was  hot,  she 
wrapped  it  up  in  newspapers,  and  carried 
it  upstairs  to  Hester's  room. 

Pulling  up  the  covers  from  the  foot  of 
the  bed,  she  placed  the  hot  brick  at  Hes- 
ter's feet. 

"If  you've  taken  cold,  that  will  keep  you 
from  being  chilled.  Keeping  warm,  or  hav- 
ing a  good  sweat,  is  the  best  thing  for  either 
a  cold  or  a  fever."  She  tucked  down  the 
bedclothes,  and  then  turned  her  attention 
to  the  girl's  head. 

"You  haven't  a  speck  of  fever,"  she  said, 
laying  her  hand  on  Hester's  head.  "I  sup- 
pose it's  just  a  'brashy'  spell.  We  must 
watch  our  eating  to-morrow.  That's  what 
has  caused  the  trouble." 

"Are  you  coming  to  bed  now,  Aunt 
Debby?" 

"Not  for  a  spell  yet.    I'm  going  down- 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     141 

stairs  again."  She  went  back  to  the 
kitchen,  and,  making  herself  comfortable  in 
the  great  wooden  rocker,  with  her  feet 
upon  the  hearth  of  the  stove,  she  began  to 
piece  together  the  incidents  of  the  day  to 
see  what  she  could  make  of  them  as  a  whole. 
She  knew  it  was  not  natural  for  a  girl 
Hester's  age  to  speak  about  repaying  her. 
Some  one  had  set  the  child  thinking  along  a 
new  line,  and  Debby  Alden  made  up  her 
mind  there  and  then  that  she  would  find 
out  who  that  was  and  put  a  stop  to  it. 

It  was  a  common  saying  throughout  the 
locality  that  Debby  Alden  was  no  one's 
fool.  Her  keenness  of  intuition,  and  the 
logic  that  showed  in  her  reasoning,  now 
proved  that  her  reputation  was  well- 
founded.  She  thought  of  the  trouble  of 
the  day  before.  She  knew  Hester  well 
enough  to  know  that  she  would  speak 
sharply  and  frankly  to  the  girl  whom  she 
had  helped  in  the  examination,  and  who  was 
not  honest  enough  to  confess  it.  It  would 


142     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

be  natural  for  the  girl  to  answer  back.  No 
doubt,  a  war  of  words  followed.  Hester 
had  felt  sick  afterward,  and  then  this  great 
desire  to  be  a  comfort  and  help  to  Aunt 
Debby  who  had  done  so  much  for  her. 
To  Debby  Alden  the  whole  matter  was  as 
clear  as  an  open  book.  She  meant  to  find 
out  who  that  girl  was,  and  see  to  it  that  she 
would  not  again  hector  Hester  with  her 
suggestions  and  hints.  She  must  be  one 
who  knew  Hester  well,  or  they  would  not 
have  helped  each  other.  She  brought  to 
mind  each  of  the  girls  with  whom  Hester 
was  friendly.  Jane  Orr  was  not  to  be 
thought  of.  Debby  remembered  with  pleas- 
ure the  speech  that  Jane  had  made  the 
evening  before.  As  she  thought  of  that 
walk  home,  she  was  suddenly  enlightened  as 
to  the  guilty  party.  She  remembered  how 
Mary  had  kept  on  the  outer  edge  of  the 
group,  how  sullen  and  silent  she  had  been, 
without  a  civil  word  for  any  one. 

"And    it    isn't    generally    Mary    Bower- 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     143 

man's  way  not  to  talk.  She's  generally 
ready  with  a  word  on  her  tongue.  Kate 
was  always  the  most  ambitious,  envious 
person  hereabouts.  'Mother  and  daughter 
alike,'  is  an  old  saying.  I've  noticed  that 
before  in  Kate  and  Mary.  I'm  thinking 
that  I've  found  the  right  person  now,  and 
I'll  see  to  it  that  she  doesn't  nag  Hester.  I 
will  not  have  it." 

She  did  not  for  an  instant  suspect  that 
Mary  Bowerman  had  told  Hester  the  truth. 
She  did  not  know  that  Mary  herself  knew 
it.  She  took  it  for  granted  that  Mary  had 
gone  no  further  in  her  annoyance  than 
merely  hinting.  Debby  did  not  decide  just 
what  course  she  would  pursue  in  the  matter, 
but  she  experienced  a  feeling  of  relief  in 
knowing  that  she  had  found  the  culprit. 
She  was  quite  ready  to  sleep  now.  She 
slipped  into  Hester's  room  and  found  her 
sleeping.  She  did  considerable  thinking  and 
planning  the  following  morning,  as  she  pre- 
pared breakfast.  Before  the  morning's 


144     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

work  was  well  under  way,  she  had  reached 
a  decision. 

"Mrs.  Bowerman  is  going  into  town  this 
morning,  Hester,"  she  said.  "I  wish  you 
would  go  with  her  and  ask  Miss  Richards 
for  the  book  she  promised  me.  It's  about 
taking  charge  of  club  meetings.  You  had 
better  go  now,  for  Mrs.  Bowerman  is  never 
slack  about  starting  when  she  means  to  go." 

She  noticed  Hester's  face  flush  and  the 
hesitancy  in  her  manner  as  she  answered: 
"Yes,  Aunt  Debby.  But  I  do  not  mind 
the  walk  alone.  I  rather  enjoy  being  by 
myself  sometimes." 

"But  I  don't  wish  you  to.  There's  al- 
ways strangers  coming  and  going,  and  no 
one  knows  who  they  are.  I'd  feel  safer  if 
you  have  company,  and  Kate  is  going.  She 
told  me  so." 

There  was  nothing  to  do  but  obey.  Hes- 
ter put  on  her  wraps  and  started  forth,  not 
at  all  pleased  with  the  prospect  of  meeting 
Mary  Bowerman  in  her  own  home. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     145 

Debby  Alden  finished  the  morning's  work, 
and  then  started  for  the  Bowerman  home. 
She  knew  that  Kate  and  Hester  had  long 
since  left  the  house.  Going  around  to  the 
back  door,  which  was  a  custom  of  the 
neighborhood,  she  entered  the  kitchen,  which 
Mary  had  just  put  in  order. 

"No,  I  shall  not  sit  down,"  she  said 
grimly,  in  reply  to  Mary's  invitation. 

"Mother  has  gone  to  town,  Miss  Debby. 
She'll  be  back  in  the  course  of  a  half-hour. 
You'd  better  sit  down  while  you  are  wait- 
ing." 

"I'll  not  wait  to  see  your  mother.  I  didn't 
come  to  see  her.  It  is  you  I  wish  to  see." 

"Me?"  said  Mary,  indifferent  alike  to 
grammar  and  Miss  Debby's  purpose  in 
coming. 

"Yes,  you.  I  came  to  tell  you  that  you 
are  not  to  hector  Hester  with  your  taunts 
and  insinuations." 

"Did  Hester  run  to  you  and  tell?  I  do 
declare  that  I'm  surprised  after  the  hero 


146     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

she  tried  to  make  of  herself  before  Mr. 
Sanderson." 

"No;  Hester  did  not  tell.  She  was 
never  a  girl  to  carry  tales  about,  and  she 
hasn't  begun  it  now.  Hester  doesn't  know 
that  I  know  about  what  happened  yester- 
day, or  about  you  getting  help  in  your 
examinations.  It  doesn't  matter  how  I 
know,  but  it  does  matter  that  you  are  to 
keep  a  civil  tongue  in  your  head  with  Hes- 
ter. You  may  have  all  the  schoolgirl 
squabbles  you  wish.  Hester  can  take  care 
of  herself;  but  you're  not  to  tell  her  about 
her  mother's  death  or  her  people." 

As  she  spoke,  Mary's  mind  went  over  the 
events  of  the  previous  day.  Who  could 
have  told  Miss  Debby?  The  only  person 
who  could  possibly  know  of  the  talk  be- 
tween herself  and  Hester  was  Miss  Watson. 
She  hastily  concluded  that  it  was  Miss 
Watson,  and  Mary  feared  her  and  knew 
that  such  conduct,  if  it  were  known,  would 
meet  with  punishment. 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     147 

"Do  you  understand?"  Debby  Alden 
again  asked. 

"Yes;  I  understand.  I'm  sure  that  I'll 
not  bother  my  head  at  all  about  Hester, 
Miss  Debby.  You  do  not  need  to  be  at  all 
concerned." 

"Well,  see  that  you  keep  to  that,"  were 
Debby's  parting  words.  There  were  few 
whom  she  could  not  inspire  with  awe  when 
in  this  mood.  She  left  the  Bowerman 
home  with  the  feeling  that  she  had  settled 
the  matter  for  a  time,  yet  she  knew  that 
the  story  was  too  well-known  and  too  in- 
teresting to  be  forgotten.  She  realized,  also, 
that  Hester  might  always  be  exposed  to 
experiences  similar  to  that  of  the  previous 
day.  Debby  Alden  could  not  bear  the 
thought  that  Hester  would  suffer  from  such 
remarks.  She  knew  that  the  child's  sensi- 
tive nature  would  make  her  peculiarly  sus- 
ceptible to  suffering. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

TAURING  the  first  week  of  December  the 
^^  weather  grew  intensely  cold.  There 
had  been  no  wind  such  as  usually  marked 
the  winter  months  in  the  valley.  There 
had  been  a  full  September  flood  in  the  river 
and  plenty  of  rain  during  that  month  and 
October;  so  when  the  cold  weather  set  in, 
the  river  was  not  low.  The  rocks  in  the 
river-bed  near  the  end  of  the  town  were 
covered  by  a  foot  of  water  —  just  enough  to 
prevent  the  'riffles.7 

The  difference  of  six  inches,  more  or  less, 
was  an  important  matter  to  the  young  and 
active  element  of  the  town.  They  read  the 
signs  well,  and  watched  the  indications  for 
high  or  low  water  and  no  wind,  with  intense 
interest.  The  skating  depended  entirely 
upon  such  conditions.  If  the  ice  was 
formed  while  a  stiff  breeze  swept  the  sur- 

148 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     149 

face  of  the  river,  or  when  the  water  was  so 
low  that  it  made  little  rippling  circles  as 
it  passed  over  the  rocks,  the  skating  was 
ruined  for  that  season.  But  now,  after 
several  days  and  nights  of  still,  bitter 
weather,  the  matter  was  settled  for  months. 
For  miles  the  main  portion  of  the  stream 
was  one  unbroken  sheet  of  ice,  as  clear  and 
smooth  as  glass,  and  thick  enough  so  that 
the  skaters  took  no  risks. 

Friday  morning  Jane  Orr  came  into  the 
cloak-room  where  a  half-dozen  of  her  friends 
were  leisurely  removing  their  wraps.  It 
was  generally  understood  that  the  pupils 
should  not  congregate  here,  but  as  com- 
munication was  forbidden  within  the  school- 
room proper,  the  girls  were  most  deliberate 
about  removing  and  arranging  their  wraps, 
especially  on  those  mornings  when  some  one 
of  the  number  had  a  long  story  to  tell. 

Jane's  face  was  wreathed  with  smiles  as 
she  joined  the  girls.  She  began  talking  as 
she  removed  her  tam-o'-shanter  in  order 


150     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

that  none  of  the  precious  minutes  might  be 
lost.  Although  she  talked  rapidly,  her  voice 
never  lost  its  low,  deliberate  tones.  "Oh, 
girls!  I  have  the  best  news!  I  could 
scarcely  wait  until  I  reached  here  to  tell 
you.  I'm  all  out  of  breath.  You'll  be  as 
glad  to  hear  it  as  I  was."  Here  she  jammed 
her  hat  pins  through  the  crown  of  the  tarn, 
and,  with  it  in  her  hand,  turned  about  and 
faced  her  half-dozen  listeners. 

"Ralphie  and  some  of  his  young  men 
friends  skated  to  Hyner  last  evening.  It 
was  moonlight,  you  know.  Ralphie  said 
that  the  ice  was  fine  —  simply  fine !  That 
for  the  entire  six  miles  there  wasn't  a 
break." 

A  sigh  of  satisfaction  came  from  her 
listeners.  They  had  been  disappointed  the 
year  before,  and  for  weeks  they  had  hoped 
for  and  counted  much  upon  good  ice  for 
skating. 

"We  can't  go  to-night  after  school,"  said 
one  of  the  group.  "No  one  has  brought 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     151 

skates.  By  the  time  we  go  home  for  them, 
it  will  be  too  late.  Mine  must  be  sharpened 
before  I  use  them.  They're  saw-toothed  on 
the  edge." 

"I  wasn't  through  with  what  I  was  going 
to  say,"  cried  Jane.  "Ralphie  said  that 
we  must  not  on  any  account  miss  the  skate. 
So  he  suggested  getting  up  a  crowd  of  girls 
for  to-morrow  afternoon,  to  start  imme- 
diately after  dinner." 

"It  will  be  so  cold,"  said  Orpha. 

"Of  course  it  will,"  said  Edith,  "but  is  a 
little  cold  going  to  hurt  us?" 

"You  will  not  wait  until  I  finish,"  said 
Jane.  She  had  taken  off  her  coat  by  this 
time,  and  had  seated  herself  on  the  extreme 
edge  of  a  small  bench.  "We  can  get  a 
warm  supper  at  Hyner  before  we  start  to 
skate  back.  That  will  keep  us  from  getting 
cold  while  we  rest." 

"If  it's  hard  skating  against  the  wind, 
we  can  come  back  on  the  evening  train," 
said  Janet,  who  was  always  practical.  "I 


152     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

wouldn't  mind  going  down,  but  the  skate 
back  with  the  wind  against  one  is  too  hard." 

"Ralphie  will  go  along  so  that  nothing 
can  happen.  If  one  of  us  should  fall,  he's 
big  and  strong  enough  to  take  care  of  us." 
Here  Jane's  bland  smile  fairly  outdid  itself, 
for,  in  her  mind,  if  there  were  one  person 
in  the  world  who  was  absolutely  faultless, 
that  person  was  her  elder  brother  Ralph. 

"Who'll  go?"  asked  Janet.  "And 
where'll  we  meet,  and  at  what  time?" 

The  seven  girls  who  were  present  all 
declared  themselves  willing  and  ready,  de- 
barring a  little  sharpening  of  skates,  which 
could  be  attended  to  the  following  morning. 

"A  dozen  is  just  a  nice  party,"  said  Janet. 

"Delia  will  go,  I'm  sure,  and  Julia.  I'll 
ask  them  this  morning." 

"And  Hester,"  said  Jane.  "She'll  go,  of 
course.  I'll  speak  to  her  while  we're  going 
into  algebra.  She's  always  just  ahead  of 
me  in  the  line." 

"Oh!"    said  Mary  Bowerman,  and  then 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     153 

waited  without  further  word.  Her  tone 
was  so  expressive  of  dissatisfaction  at  Jane's 
suggestion,  that  the  other  six  girls  looked 
up  at  her  in  surprise,  and  then  waited  for 
her  to  speak.  Seeing  what  was  expected  of 
her,  she  continued:  "Must  we  ask  her?  I'd 
so  much  rather  that  she  wouldn't  be  one 
of  the  crowd." 

"Why?"  asked  Janet,  who  never  took 
such  subtle  suggestions,  but  demanded 
point-blank  statements. 

"I  do  not  know  that  it  is  necessary  for 
me  to  give  my  reasons,"  Mary  replied. 
"I  know  that  I  don't  wish  to  have  her." 

"I  do,"  said  Jane,  sweetly  but  firmly. 
"And  I  see  no  reason  why  she  should  not 
be  invited.  I'm  sure  she  is  always  agree- 
able, and  she  never  keeps  one  waiting,  and 
she  will  not  hang  back  and  say  that  she's 
tired  and  wants  to  rest.  You  know  that 
she  will  not  complain  and  grumble,  what- 
ever happens." 

"Well,    if   Hester   Alden   is   one   of   the 


154     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

party,  I  will  not  be,"  said  Mary,  decidedly. 
She  had  intended  keeping  the  promise 
which  she  made  to  Miss  Alden  some  weeks 
before.  She  tried  to  reconcile  her  con- 
science by  telling  herself  that  this  was  not 
hectoring  Hester;  that  she  was  saying  no 
word  to  her.  Yet  she  knew  what  it  was 
Miss  Alden  meant,  and  that  so  far  she 
had  fulfilled  the  letter  and  not  the  spirit 
of  the  promise.  After  this  declaration 
about  not  going,  she  waited  a  moment  to 
see  what  effect  her  words  would  have  on 
the  girls.  If  she  expected  protestations 
and  beseechings  on  their  part,  she  was 
disappointed.  Her  declaration  was  followed 
by  silence.  She  repeated  her  words,  making 
them  as  emphatic  as  possible. 

"Well,  I'll  tell  you  this.  If  Hester  Alden 
goes,  I  will  not." 

"You  must  suit  yourself  about  that," 
Jane  replied.  "I  intend  to  ask  Hester." 

She  had  unconsciously  moved  closer  to 
the  edge  of  the  seat  as  she  talked.  A  foot- 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     155 

step  was  heard  in  the  hall.  With  the 
thought  that  a  teacher  was  coming  to 
take  them  to  task  for  their  loitering,  the 
two  girls,  who  had  been  occupying  the 
greater  portion  of  the  bench,  sprang  to 
their  feet.  With  Jane,  plump  and  round 
as  a  partridge,  on  the  unsupported  end 
of  the  bench,  a  state  of  equilibrium  could 
not  be  maintained.  The  bench  tilted,  and 
Jane  sat  unexpectedly  upon  the  floor. 

She  made  no  effort  to  rise,  but  remained 
there  laughing  heartily  at  her  plight.  The 
door  opened  and  Hester  came  in. 

"The  halls  were  so  quiet  that  I  was 
afraid  I  was  late,"  she  said.  Then,  seeing 
Jane  sitting  upon  the  floor,  she  exclaimed: 
"For  all  the  world,  Jane  Orr!  Why  are 
you  sitting  there?" 

"I've  been  issuing  invitations  to  a  skat- 
ing party,  and  this  is  the  way  it  affected  me. 
You're  invited,  Hester.  When  I  get  the 
dust  from  my  dress,  I'll  tell  you  all  about 
it."  She  was  on  her  feet  by  this  time, 


156     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

brushing  vigorously  at  the  coat  of  tan, 
which  showed  against  the  dark  blue  skirt. 

The  others  of  the  party  turned  to  leave 
the  cloak-room,  when  Jane  called  after 
them:  "Meet  at  our  house  at  one-thirty. 
Don't  forget  to  bring  money  along  to  pay 
for  your  supper.  It's  to  be  a  Dutch  treat." 

Then  she  turned  to  Hester  and  told  her 
of  the  arrangements  for  the  following 
afternoon. 

"I'll  go  if  I  can,"  Hester  replied,  "but  I'm 
not  sure  about  my  skates.  They  were  too 
small  for  me  two  years  ago,  and  I  wear  shoes 
two  sizes  larger  than  I  did  then.  But  if 
I  can  possibly  use  them,  I'll  be  there." 

The  following  morning  after  breakfast 
she  went  to  the  attic  to  look  for  her  skates. 
She  did  not  doubt  that  her  Aunt  Debby 
would  gladly  buy  her  a  larger  pair  if  she 
knew  that  the  old  ones  were  too  small. 
But  since  Mary  Bowerman  had  told  her 
the  facts  of  Debby  Alden's  giving  her  a 
home,  Hester  could  not  ask  for  luxuries. 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     157 

It  was  quite  enough  to  be  clothed  and 
fed. 

The  skates  were  packed  in  one  of  the 
great  boxes  in  which  the  attic  was  rich. 
Hester  looked  through  several.  One  of 
these  contained  each  article  of  clothing 
which  her  mother  had  worn  when  she  was 
killed.  Debby  Alden  had  put  them  in 
order  and  packed  them  away.  She  under- 
stood now  why  her  aunt  had  been  careful 
to  save  the  most  insignificant  of  these. 

"Poor  Aunt  Debby,"  said  Hester  to 
herself,  "I  suppose  she  thought  that 
some  one  might  come  to  claim  me,  and  she 
wanted  to  identify  my  mother  and  me. 
That  is  why  she  keeps  that  little  old  dress 
of  mine." 

She  examined  the  waist  and  skirt  crit- 
ically, yet  without  any  sign  of  emotion. 

"My  mother  could  not  have  been  a 
tramp.  These  clothes  are  fine  —  nicer 
than  Debby's  best  dress,  and  they  are  the 
kind  that  a  lady  would  wear." 


158     THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

She  replaced  each  article  as  she  had 
found  it.  She  was  displeased  with  herself 
that  she  had  not  felt  sad  and  cried.  But 
she  had  not.  If  the  stories  she  had  read 
could  be  relied  upon,  her  indifferent  feeling 
was  quite  unnatural.  The  feeling  of  ten- 
derness was  all  for  Aunt  Debby,  and  not 
for  this  strange  unknown  woman  which 
Mary  Bowerman  had  declared  was  her 
mother. 

" Maybe  I  haven't  any  heart,"  she  said. 
"If  I  had,  I  suppose  I'd  cry  and  be  sad, 
but  I  do  not  feel  at  all  like  it.  Where 
are  those  skates?"  She  began  searching 
through  the  fourth  box.  Before  she  was 
aware  of  what  she  was  doing,  she  was  sing- 
ing a  cheerful  song. 

Debby  Alden  had  come  upstairs,  and, 
hearing  Hester  fussing  about,  came  to 
the  foot  of  the  attic  stairs  and  called 
up:  "Hester,  what  are  you  doing  up 
there?  Now  don't  get  those  boxes  in 
disorder." 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     159 

"I'm  not,  auntie.  I'm  putting  every- 
thing back.  I  was  looking  for  my  skates, 
but  I've  found  them  now." 

She  came  down  the  dark,  narrow  stairway, 
the  skates  clinking  in  her  hand.  Sitting 
down  on  the  lower  step,  she  raised  her 
foot  and  put  the  skate  on  it.  It  was  fully 
two  inches  shorter  than  the  shoe. 

"Too  short,"  said  Debby  Alden,  la- 
conically. "Yes,  I  thought  they'd  be. 
When  did  you  mean  to  use  them?" 

"This  afternoon,,  if  they  were  all  right. 
But  I  hardly  expected  that  they  would 
be.  I've  grown  so  since  these  were  new." 

"Do  the  girls  intend  to  go?" 

"Yes."  Then  before  Hester  realized 
what  she  was  doing,  she  told  her  aunt, 
just  as  Debby  Alden  wished  her  to  do. 

"You  had  better  go  to  Ab  Stout's  right 
off  and  get  a  pair.  You  should  get  a  fairly 
good  pair  for  two  dollars." 

"I  can  do  without  them,  Aunt  Debby. 
We'd  better  not  spend  the  money.  You 


said  just  the  other  day  that  you'd  have  to 
save  a  little." 

"I  can  spend  two  dollars.  I  never  let 
myself  get  as  close  as  that.  That  was 
never  the  Alden  way.  We  always  keep  a 
little  saved  back.  Besides,  I  meant  right 
along  to  get  you  skates  for  Christmas." 

That  settled  the  matter.  Hester  lost 
no  time  in  getting  into  her  wraps  and 
setting  out  for  Stout's  department  store. 

It  was  a  busy  time  in  all  departments, 
for  Saturday  morning  was  a  general  shop- 
ping day.  Farmers'  wives,  who  had  come 
to  town  on  the  market  wagons,  were  laying 
in  a  week's  supply  of  groceries;  miners' 
wives  from  Bitumen  were  there  in  groups 
of  six  and  eight,  and  the  keen  Joel  Stout, 
the  junior  member  of  the  firm,  was  be- 
guiling them  to  part  with  their  money  for 
light,  shoddy  wraps,  and  head-gear  con- 
spicuous for  its  long,  light  plumes  and 
quantities  of  flowers. 

Hester     made     her    way     through     the 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     161 

crowd  to  the  household  department,  where 
skates  held  their  place  with  pots,  pans, 
and  waffle-irons.  This  department  was 
not  so  crowded,  yet  she  was  compelled 
to  wait  some  time  before  she  could  have 
the  services  of  a  clerk. 

Abner  Stout  himself  had  charge  of  this 
department.  Esther  and  Mary,  two  of 
his  younger  children,  assisted  him.  Busi- 
ness had  prospered  with  the  man.  He 
could  boast  no  nationality  or  trade.  He 
was  a  hybrid,  sprung  from  the  sharpest, 
keenest,  and  most  unprincipled  types  of 
several  nationalities.  In  his  early  days 
he  had  been  a  junk  and  rag  dealer.  He 
had  failed  as  often  as  the  law  permitted, 
and  each  failure  added  to  the  money  he 
had  hoarded  away,  so  that  he  was  at  last 
enabled  to  start  in  business  on  his  present 
substantial  scale.  He  had  cut  communica- 
tions with  all  his  old  friends,  for  he  knew 
of  nothing  to  be  gained  by  a  further  ac- 
quaintance with  them.  He  had  passed 


162     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

the  place  where  they  could  be  used  by  him 
as  stepping-stones,  and  he  had  no  wish  to 
serve  the  purpose  of  a  stepping-stone  to 
them.  His  trade  had  grown  so  large  that 
every  member  of  the  family  was  kept  busy 
handling  it.  His  daughters  had  no  time 
to  give  to  domestic  matters,  and  for  weeks 
housekeeping  and  cooking  had  gone  by 
the  board.  The  family  had  eaten  at  odd 
minutes,  helping  themselves  to  cheese  and 
crackers  or  a  dried  herring  as  they  passed 
from  one  department  to  another. 

This  way  of  living  was  not  pleasing  to 
the  elder  man.  He  liked  a  well-laid  table 
with  plenty  of  good,  strong  fare,  but  busi- 
ness was  business,  and  his  daughters  were 
needed  as  clerks.  He  might  have  em- 
ployed one  of  the  townspeople  as  clerk, 
but  his  economical  soul  revolted  at  the 
thought.  It  was  not  so  much  the  sal- 
ary that  constrained  him  from  employing 
such  a  one,  but  Joel  and  he  had  little  ways 
of  their  own  hi  weighing  and  measuring, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     163 

and  marking  up  and  down,  a  system  that 
was  hard  for  the  mind  of  some  to  grasp. 

In  the  midst  of  his  difficulties  an  ex- 
cellent plan  presented  itself  to  his  mind 
for  consideration.  There  was  living  in  New 
York  one  Jane  Farwell,  an  elder  sister  of 
his  deceased  wife.  Jane  was  making  her 
home  with  her  brother  Reuben,  a  dealer 
in  junk  and  rags  to  whom  she  had  been  a 
great  help,  for  she  was  quick  to  sort.  But 
she  was  not  content,  as  the  work  was  te- 
dious and  the  stooping  stiffened  her  back, 
and,  besides,  Reuben  grew  angry  if  she  so 
much  as  mentioned  wages  and  declared 
that  she  was  a  burden  upon  him. 

This  Jane  Farwell  had  been  an  excellent 
housekeeper  in  her  younger  day,  being 
trained  after  the  fashion  of  the  thrifty 
housewife,  and  she  knew  much  about  the 
cooking  of  food  along  economical  lines. 

He  decided  to  send  for  Jane.  She  could 
keep  the  house  in  order  and  make  ready 
the  meals,  and  she  would  be  glad  to  come 


for  little  or  nothing.  He  wrote  to  her. 
His  heart  grew  glad  when  she  sent  word 
that  she  would  come.  This  had  occurred 
three  weeks  before,  and  for  almost  that 
length  of  time  Jane  had  been  in  his  kitchen 
preparing  the  savory  messes  whose  strong, 
fragrant  odor  filled  the  shop  and  lingered 
for  days.  It  was  little  wonder,  then,  that 
he  was  in  the  best  of  humor  and  laughed 
and  joked  with  his  customers.  His  little 
sharp  gray  eyes  glistened  like  polished 
beads,  his  sharp  thin  nose  was  elevated 
beyond  its  usual  angle,  and  his  hands  with 
their  long  talons  and  sharp-pointed  nails 
rubbed  together,  expressive  of  his  greatest 
satisfaction;  for  the  presence  of  his  sister- 
in-law,  Jane,  in  the  kitchen,  preparing 
savory  dishes  and  without  a  word  as  to 
wages>  was  as  oil  and  myrrh  to  his  covetous 
soul. 

Kate  Bowerman  and  Mrs.  Mullin  had 
come  shopping  together.  They  were  both 
keen  at  a  bargain,  and  enjoyed  being  to- 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     165 

gether  when  buying  was  on  hand.  Mary 
Stout  was  waiting  upon  them.  They  had 
made  their  selections  and  were  waiting 
while  she  put  together  their  purchases  and 
made  the  change.  Abner  stood  at  a  dis- 
tance, with  eye  and  ear  seizing  upon  all 
that  took  place  in  his  store. 

At  this  instant  Hester  entered,  and,  pass- 
ing the  women,  went  on  to  the  counter 
where  skates  were  laid  out.  Her  long  coat 
of  dark  blue  was  brightened  by  a  crimson 
tam-o'-shanter  and  the  crimson  bow  at 
the  end  of  her  long,  dark  braid. 

Mrs.  Mullin  nudged  her  companion.  "A 
fine-looking  girl,"  she  said  in  stage  whispers. 

"Think  so?"  said  Kate  Bowerman.  She 
gave  forth  a  mirthless  cackle.  "I  sup- 
pose she's  good-looking  to  them  who  like 
that  style.  I  don't  and  never  did.  A 
woman  or  girl  to  be  good-looking  should  be 
fair." 

"I  don't  agree  with  you,  Kate.  I'm 
all  for  dark  eyes  and  dark  hair."  She 


166     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

turned  and  looked  at  the  girlish  figure 
bending  over  the  counter  on  which  lay  the 
skates. 

"It  must  cost  Debby  Alden  a  pretty 
penny  to  dress  her.  I  see  her  go  by  the 
house  on  her  way  to  school,  and  she's  as 
well  dressed  as  any  girl  in  town.  Better 
than  Debby  Alden  ever  dressed.  I  wonder 
that  Debby  does  it,  for  you  know  yourself 
that  the  Aldens  were  always  counted  close. 
I  wouldn't  have  believed  it  if  any  one  would 
have  told  me !  Debby  Alden  spending  her 
folks'  money  on  a  strange  child." 

Abner  Stout  drew  nearer.  To  all  out- 
ward appearances,  his  attention  was 
wrapped  up  in  the  sale  of  a  butcher  knife, 
over  the  price  of  which  an  old  German 
woman  was  haggling.  He  believed  in  learn- 
ing all  he  could  of  other  people's  business, 
so  he  drew  closer  to  the  two  women. 

Kate  gave  a  malicious  laugh,  and  for  an 
instant  the  point  of  her  tongue  showed 
between  her  lips. 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     167 

"Debby  Alden's  no  one's  fool,  Hattie 
Mullin.  You've  heard  that  time  and 
time  again,  and  it's  never  been  truer  than 
it  is  at  this  minute.  She  knows  what 
she's  doing.  Do  you  for  one  minute  think 
that  she'd  be  spending  her  money  on  that 
girl  if  she  didn't  expect  to  get  it  back  with 
a  good  big  interest?  She's  not  bringing 
her  up  like  a  lady,  educating  her  and  giving 
her  music  and  all  that,  just  for  the  fun 
of  it.  No  indeed!  I  knew  the  Aldens 
too  well  to  ever  suspect  that  one  of 
them  would  throw  away  her  money  for 
mere  pleasure." 

"You  don't  mean—?"  Mrs.  Mullin 
looked  the  question.  She  could  not  put  it 
into  words. 

"That's  just  what  I  mean,"  laughed 
Kate.  "You'll  find  that  Debby  Alden 
either  knows  or  has  some  suspicion  who 
that  child  is.  It  may  be  that  her  folks  are 
well-to-do,  and  they'll  pay  Debby  well 
when  she  lets  them  know  of  the  child." 


168     THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

"Dear  me!  Who  would  have  thought 
that  Debby  Alden  would  have  been  so  far- 
sighted,"  she  said.  "No  doubt,  the  child's 
folks  are  well  off,  and  will  pay  Debby  hand- 
somely." 

"Why,  of  course !  Or  why  should  she 
take  all  this  trouble?"  At  this,  Mary 
was  about  to  come  up  with  the  change. 
Her  father  seized  her  hand.  "You  have 
it  wrong,"  he  cried.  "Go  back." 

She  returned  to  the  cash  drawer  and 
deliberated  long  upon  making  the  change. 
She  knew  not  her  father's  purpose  in  send- 
ing her  back.  But  having  faith  in  his 
business  ability,  she  obeyed  without  a  word, 
and  kept  at  the  account  until  he  let  her 
know  that  he  wished  her  to  return.  Mean- 
while, Kate  Bowerman,  all  unconscious  of 
the  little  by-play  which  had  been  enacted 
before  her  eyes,  continued  her  conversation 
with  Mrs.  Mullin. 

"Debby  forgot  herself  one  day  and  let 
it  slip  that  she  knew  more  about  the  child's 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     169 

mother  than  she  had  told  any  one.  I  re- 
member where  the  ticket  that  the  woman 
had  was  from,  and  where  she  was  going. 
I've  a  sharp  memory  for  such  things.  Some 
day,  when  I've  time,  I  mean  to  write  to 
those  places  and  just  find  out.  A  woman 
and  child  disappearing  isn't  something 
that's  going  to  be  forgotten  in  fifteen 
years." 

"No,  I  guess  not,"  said  Mrs.  Mullin. 
At  this  she  grew  reminiscent,  and  repeated 
in  detail  all  the  events  of  that  day.  But 
the  details  were  too  clear  in  Kate's  mind 
to  enjoy  hearing  another  repeat  them. 

"Yes,  I  know  all  about  it,  Hattie,  from 
A  to  Z.  But  we've  something  else  to 
attend  to  now.  Where  is  that  girl  with 
my  change?  Is  she  never  coming?" 

At  this  Abner  Stout  raised  his  voice,  and 
admonished  Mary  not  to  be  so  slow.  She 
hurried  forward  with  the  change.  Mrs. 
Bowerman  and  her  friend  went  on  their 
way.  Abner  Stout  stood  behind  the  counter 


170     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

until  late  that  night,  his  hands  busy  with 
scales  and  twine,  but  his  mind  weaving 
a  great  scheme  by  which  gold  might  be 
added  to  his  constantly  increasing  hoard. 


CHAPTER    IX 

A  T  the  hour  appointed  that  afternoon, 
-*••*-  a  merry  party  had  gathered  at  Jane's 
home,  preparatory  to  starting  on  the  skat- 
ing expedition.  Hyner  was  a  little  village 
six  miles  distant.  To  skate  there  was  no 
task  at  all.  It  was  the  return  trip  against 
the  wind  and  the  imperceptible  slope  of 
the  ice-bed  which  tried  the  mettle  of  the 
skaters. 

They  were  about  to  set  forth  when  Mary 
Bowerman  entered  ready  for  the  trip,  her 
skates  slung  on  a  strap  over  her  shoulders. 
She  made  no  explanation  hi  regard  to  her 
change  of  plans. 

"I  was  afraid  I  would  be  late,"  she  said, 
"and  I  walked  so  fast  that  I  am  out  of 
breath." 

The  others  waited  until  she  had  rested,  and 
then  started  out.  Mrs.  Orr  followed  them  to 

171 


172     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

the  gate,  admonishing  them  to  be  careful 
and  not  to  run  any  risks  while  skating. 

"Don't  worry,  mother,"  said  Ralph. 
"The  ice  is  as  solid  as  a  rock.  I  haven't 
seen  such  ice  as  this  for  years.  One  could 
skate  anywhere  on  it." 

"It  is  just  that  confidence  that  may 
cause  the  trouble,"  she  replied.  "You  may 
be  so  sure  that  you  will  not  take  the  trouble 
to  look  about  you  and  rush  on  into  danger. 
Do  be  careful,  girls.  Ralph,  remember 
they  are  under  your  care." 

"I  certainly  will  not  forget.  I'll  take 
care  of  them,  mother."  He  looked  quite 
able  to  fulfil  his  self-appointed  task.  He 
was  in  his  third  year  in  college,  and  had 
wpn  a  reputation  as  an  athlete.  He  was 
big,  broad-shouldered,  and  sinewy. 

When  they  reached  the  ice,  he  called 
out  to  those  in  advance:  "Wait  a  moment, 
girls,  until  I  come.  I'll  put  on  your  skates." 

A  merry  laugh  greeted  him  from  Jane 
and  Hester, 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     173 

"You  would  have  a  glorious  task,  Ralph," 
said  Hester.  "Twelve  girls  with  skates  to 
have  put  on.  Why,  the  last  one  would  be 
chilled  to  the  marrow  before  her  turn  came." 

"It  will  take  but  — "  he  began.  He 
was  already  upon  his  knees  with  Jane's 
skates  in  his  hand. 

"We  can  manage  very  well,  thank  you, 
Ralph,"  said  Janet.  She  had  one  skate 
on  and  the  lever  turned,  and  was  strength- 
ening her  ankle  with  a  heavy  strap  as  she 
spoke.  Mary  Bowerman  alone  made  no 
effort  to  put  on  her  skates,  but  stood  close 
by  Jane,  waiting  until  Ralph  had  finished 
tightening  the  levers. 

"Put  mine  on,  Ralph.  I  hate  working 
with  the  cold  steel,  and  the  buckles  always 
hurt  my  hands." 

The  other  girls  were  ready.  As  they 
waited,  they  tested  their  skates,  making 
fancy  curves  and  figures  upon  the  ice  and 
circling  about  Ralph  and  Mary  while  he 
tightened  the  straps. 


174     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

"Let  me  lead  the  way,"  he  said,  rising 
and  drawing  on  his  gloves.  "I'll  pick 
out  a  safe  course.  Mother  is  so  afraid  of 
air-holes.  I  honestly  don't  believe  there 
is  one  for  miles  about.  Nevertheless,  I'll 
skate  ahead."  He  looked  about  the  group, 
uncertain  who  needed  his  help  most. 

"Will  you  skate  singly  or  together? 
Who  wants  me  to  help  them  ?  " 

"You'd  better  take  Delia,"  suggested 
Jane.  "She  hasn't  skated  as  we  have, 
and  she'll  tire  sooner." 

"Very  well,"  he  replied,  holding  out  his 
hands  to  the  frailest  and  youngest  of  the  set. 
She  smiled  as  she  said:  "I'm  very  glad. 
I  do  not  skate  well  alone.  I've  always 
skated  with  one  of  my  brothers,  and  I'm 
timid  when  alone." 

"You  should  practise  skating  without 
help.  I  would  not  attempt  it  on  a  trip 
like  this,  but  some  afternoon  when  you 
have  no  definite  place  to  make.  It  will 
make  you  more  independent."  Then  he 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     175 

added  with  a  smile:  "Skating  is  like  every- 
thing else.  You  must  go  it  alone,  if  you 
do  it  well." 

One  cannot  skate  and  talk,  so  the  con- 
versation stopped.  Ralph  and  Delia  led 
the  way.  Back  of  them  in  single  file  and 
separated  by  several  rods  came  the  others 
of  the  party.  Jane,  whose  muscles  were 
accustomed  to  this  form  of  exercise,  was  in 
the  lead.  Back  of  her  came  Hester,  while 
Janet,  panting  and  perspiring,  was  at  the 
rear.  With  long,  sweeping  strokes  the  line 
swept  down  the  river.  Each  movement 
was  graceful,  and  the  rhythmical  sway  of 
their  bodies  was  as  easy  and  graceful  as 
that  of  the  sedges  moved  by  the  breeze. 

Hyner  was  reached  with  no  unusual 
experiences.  The  girls  were  warm  with 
exercise. 

"I  feel  fine  except  for  my  feet,"  said 
Jane,  as  she  tried  to  walk,  "but  they  are 
asleep." 

"You  would  have  your  straps  as  tight 


176     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

as  I  could  draw  them/'  said  Ralph.  "That 
is  what  caused  the  trouble." 

She  was  not  alone  in  her  discomfort. 
Each  girl,  as  she  attempted  to  walk  across 
the  beach  without  her  skates,  stumbled 
awkwardly,  and  gave  little  shrieks  as  she 
struck  a  clump  of  earth  or  a  rock. 

"My  feet  feel  as  though  they  weighed 
ten  pounds,"  said  Delia.  "I  can  scarcely 
drag  them  along." 

Each  expressed  her  discomfort  in  a  new 
and  individual  way,  yet  laughed  between 
the  twinges  of  pain. 

"I'm  glad  we  are  here  at  last,"  said 
Jane,  as  they  mounted  the  steps  of  the 
little  country  hotel.  "I've  been  told  that 
this  place  is  only  a  hundred  yards  from 
the  river.  It  seemed  a  mile  while  I  was 
walking." 

"A  mile!"  said  Delia,  sinking  into  the 
chair  she  came  to  first.  "I'm  sure  it  was 
ten  miles.  My  feet  were  so  numb  that 
I  couldn't  lift  them,  and  so  I  struck  every 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     177 

rough  place  on  the  beach.  I  think  there 
was  ten  thousand  of  them,  and  every  time 
I  struck  one,  a  million  little  sharp  pains 
ran  from  my  toes  to  the  top  of  my  head." 

The  girls  laughed  at  the  exaggeration. 
Delia  was  addicted  to  the  use  of  such  ex- 
pressions. She  knew  no  happy  medium. 

"I  intend  remembering  that  for  rhetoric. 
Our  lesson  for  Monday  is  a  review  of  figures 
of  speech.  I'll  use  that  for  the  hyper- 
bole." This  was  from  Janet.  As  she 
spoke,  she  glanced  toward  Delia.  "Is  that 
the  way  the  word  is  pronounced,  Dell?" 
she  asked. 

"Use  your  own  taste  in  regard  to  it,"  re- 
sponded Delia,  with  a  show  of  indifference. 
"I  shouldn't  have  called  it  that." 

"I  think  not,"  replied  Janet.  Then, 
turning  to  the  others,  she  said:  "You  girls 
were  at  the  board  and  didn't  hear  Dell 
recite.  She  said  an  exaggerated  form  of 
expression  was  called  a  hyper-bowl." 

"I'm  glad  I  said  it,"  said  Delia,  good- 


178     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

naturedly.  "Janet  has  enjoyed  it  so. 
She's  told  every  one  that  she's  met  since." 

They  had  drawn  about  the  great  stove 
which  stood  in  the  middle  of  the  hotel 
parlor.  Twilight  had  fallen,  and  the  room 
was  dusky.  Ralph  had  gone  to  see  what 
the  prospects  for  supper  were.  The  girls 
sat  with  their  feet  on  the  fender,  chatter- 
ing of  school  affairs  as  they  awaited  his 
return. 

"I  hope  there'll  be  enough  to  eat,"  said 
Janet.  "I'm  as  hungry  as  a  bear." 

"I'm  as  hungry  as  two  bears,"  said 
Hester.  "I  hope  the  landlady  will  not 
think  that  we're  a  frail  and  delicate  set. 
Let's  appoint  a  committee  to  tell  her  how 
hungry  we  are." 

"Better  have  Delia  as  chairman,"  said 
Janet.  "She'll  use  enough  ' hyper-bowls' 
to  convince  the  woman  that  a  regiment 
has  come  down  upon  her." 

"Are  you  as  hungry  as  that?"  said  a 
pleasant  voice,  as  the  woman  of  the  house 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     179 

entered.  "Your  supper  will  be  ready  soon, 
and  I  promise  you  that  there  will  be  enough 
of  it.  It  is  growing  dark;  I'll  light  the 
lamps." 

She  lighted  the  lamps  and  opened  the 
piano.  "  Perhaps  some  of  you  would  like 
to  play/'  she  said,  as  she  left  the  room. 

"I  should  like  to,"  said  Janet,  " — but 
I  can't." 

Orpha,  during  all  the  chatter  and  light 
talk,  sat  silent.  It  was  difficult  to  know 
whether  she  appreciated  what  was  going 
on,  or  whether  it  was  an  enigma  to  her. 
The  only  part  she  took  in  the  conversa- 
tion was  "Why?"  or  "Is  that  so?" 

Supper  was  prepared  for  them  in  the 
course  of  half  an  hour.  By  this  time  they 
were  able  to  step  without  shrieking  with 
mingled  pain  and  laughter.  The  land- 
lady outdid  herself  in  service,  standing 
by  the  table  and  urging  them  to  partake 
heartily  of  the  fare. 

"If  you  intend  skating  home,  you'll  need 


180     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

to  eat  well,  for  there's  a  stiff  breeze  starting 
up,  and  you  know  how  the  wind  on  the 
river  cuts." 

Ralph  excused  himself  from  the  table  to 
investigate  the  condition  of  the  weather. 
"Let's  start  back  at  once,"  he  said,  as  he 
rejoined  the  girls.  "There  is  a  little  wind. 
I  suppose  it  will  get  stronger  as  the  hour 
grows  later.  We'll  start  now  and  miss  the 
worst." 

Hurrying  into  their  wraps  and  giving 
their  feet  a  last  warming  at  the  fender, 
they  made  ready  to  depart.  They  found 
a  stiff  breeze  sweeping  along  the  river. 
With  as  little  delay  as  possible,  they  were 
on  their  skates,  battling  against  it.  Ralph 
had  gone  ahead  with  Delia  and  Janet 
on  either  side.  Back  of  them  came  the 
others  in  single  file,  their  heads  bent  for- 
ward and  their  skirts  flying  in  the  wind. 
They  had  skated  some  distance  when  Edith 
Rank,  who  led  the  line,  paused  to  wait 
until  the  others  came  up. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     181 

"  We'll  skate  easier  if  we  go  three  by 
three,"  she  said.  "This  wind  takes  one's 
strength.  We'll  find  we'll  not  be  so  apt  to 
flounder  about  with  three.  Come,  girls!" 
She  held  out  a  hand  toward  Mary .  and 
Hester.  The  latter  hesitated,  but  only  for 
a  moment.  She  did  not  wish  to  skate  arm 
in  arm  with  Mary,  but  a  river  of  ice  on  a 
cold  night,  with  the  wind  blowing,  is  not 
a  pleasant  place  for  the  airing  of  grievances. 
Hester  held  out  her  hand,  and  she  and  Edith 
with  Mary  between  started  on. 

Ralph  and  the  others  were  ahead.  The 
ice  crackled  under  their  feet.  The  trunks 
of  trees  along  the  shore  cast  weird,  gaunt 
shadows.  The  three  skated  without  speak- 
ing, having  no  surplus  energy  to  give  to 
conversation.  With  their  heads  bent 
down  to  protect  their  faces  from  the  wind, 
they  could  not  see  far  in  advance.  Un- 
conscious of  their  course,  they  had  moved 
nearer  shore,  just  where  Paddy's  Run 
enters  the  river.  There  were  eddies  and 


182     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

ripples  here,  and  the  ice  had  formed  with 
air-holes. 

Suddenly,  as  the  three  skates  lifted  to 
take  a  long  stroke,  Mary  gave  a  scream, 
let  go  her  hold  upon  the  girls,  clutched 
wildly,  and  went  through  the  ice.  Hester 
lost  no  time  in  screaming. 

"Skate  for  Ralph  as  fast  as  you  can!" 
she  said  to  Edith.  The  girl,  understand- 
ing what  was  best  to  be  done,  bent  her 
head  to  the  wind  and  skated  up  the  stream 
as  fast  as  she  was  able.  She  watched  her 
course  now,  and  kept  well  over  the  deep 
water. 

Ralph,  with  the  two  girls  clinging  to  him, 
was  not  making  great  headway.  Edith 
had  made  but  a  half  mile  before  she  reached 
him.  "Go  back!  It's  Mary!"  she  panted, 
catching  to  the  girls  to  check  her  speed 
and  steady  herself.  Without  a  word, 
Ralph  turned  and  went  back. 

Hester  had  no  sooner  given  Edith  the 
word  to  hurry  for  Ralph,  than  she  threw 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     183 

herself  flat  upon  the  ice,  and,  reaching  for- 
ward, caught  Mary  under  the  arms.  Thus 
supported  there  was  no  danger  of  Mary 
going  under,  although  she  was  in  up  to  her 
arms.  She  began  to  cry  with  fright. 

" Ralph  will  be  here  in  a  minute,"  said 
Hester.  "It's  only  an  air-hole, — the  ice 
is  strong  where  I  am.  I  will  not  let  you 
go."  Her  words  came  brokenly,  as  sup- 
porting Mary's  weight  only  for  these  few 
minutes  had  almost  exhausted  her,  and 
the  ice  had  chilled  her  limbs  into  numb- 
ness. 

It  was  only  a  few  minutes  until  Ralph 
was  there.  He  threw  himself  flat  upon 
the  ice  as  Hester  had  done,  and  grasping 
Mary  firmly,  cried  out:  "All  right,  Hester, 
pull  as  hard  as  you  can!  Her  dress  is 
frozen  fast." 

He  was  big  and  strong  enough  to  drag 
her  out.  "Keep  her  there  just  a  minute," 
he  said,  putting  Jane's  arms  about  her. 
"Here,  Hester,"  and  he  stood  and  lifted 


184     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

her  up.  "You're  all  right,  now,"  he  said 
encouragingly.  "Edith,  you  and  Jane  skate 
with  Hester.  I'll  take  Mary.  Skate  as 
though  the  wolves  were  after  you." 

He  had  picked  Mary  up  in  his  arms. 

"See  that  light!  We  are  within  a  half- 
mile  of  Debby  Alden's.  Go  for  it." 

He  skated  as  fast  as  was  possible  with 
Mary  in  his  arms.  The  others  kept  in 
advance  of  him. 

When  they  reached  the  bank,  he  did  not 
wait  to  remove  his  skates,  but  with  them 
on  cut  his  way  over  the  ice  and  stones  of 
the  beach. 

"Don't  take  me  in  to  Aldens',  Ralph," 
cried  Mary.  "Debby  Alden  will  not  let 
me  stay.  She'll  put  me  out." 

"Don't  you  believe  it,"  he  said.  "She'll 
put  you  to  bed  and  dose  you  up  until  you 
couldn't  take  cold  if  you  tried." 

"Take  me  any  place  but  there." 

Ralph  laughed,  and  hurried  through 
the  Alden  garden  to  the  house.  He  gave 


IMIMHHHHMM^^I^^nl 

HE   DID   NOT   WAIT   TO   REMOVE    HIS    SKATES  —  Page   184- 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     185 

little  thought  to  Mary's  request,  believing 
that  she  was  so  badly  frightened  that  she 
did  not  know  what  she  was  saying. 

Debby  Alden  wasted  no  time  in  use- 
less questions.  After  her  quick,  "  Where's 
Hester?"  and  Ralph's  reply,  " She's  com- 
ing. The  girls  stopped  long  enough  to 
take  off  their  skates,"  she  said  nothing, 
but  took  Mary  from  Ralph's  arms  and 
carried  her  into  the  kitchen. 

"Sit  there  with  your  feet  in  the  oven 
while  I  make  a  bed  ready  for  you."  She 
paid  no  attention  to  Mary's  feeble  words 
of  remonstrance.  In  a  moment  the  kettle 
was  on  the  stove,  the  fire-brick  heating 
on  the  front  griddle,  while  Debby  Alden 
was  upstairs  making  up  the  bed  with 
extra  blankets. 

Mary's  teeth  were  chattering  when 
Debby  came  back.  The  girls  had  crowded 
into  the  kitchen.  Hester,  in  spite  of  her 
hard  skating,  was  blue  with  the  cold. 
"Hurry  upstairs  and  get  into  bed,  Hessie. 


186     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

I've  double  blankets  on.  Slip  between 
them.  Jane,  run  along  and  rub  her  feet 
after  she's  in.  Edith,  fill  the  water-bag 
when  the  kettle  boils,  and  bring  it  upstairs. 
The  others  take  off  your  wraps,  and  get 
warm.  I'll  see  to  Mary." 

She  took  the  shivering  girl  by  the  arm. 
"  Hurry  upstairs  to  the  back  bedroom.  It's 
the  warmest.  There's  two  beds,  and  you  and 
Hester  can  be  company  for  each  other." 

Soon  she  had  both  girls  in  bed  between 
blankets,  with  hot-water  bottles  and  bricks 
about  them.  Edith  had  been  sent  down- 
stairs to  brew  a  pitcher  of  catnip  tea.  When 
danger  of  a  chill  was  past,  and  the  girls 
were  snug  and  warm,  Debby  Alden  went 
downstairs.  The  little  group  had  gathered 
about  the  kitchen  stove  with  their  feet 
in  the  oven  or  on  the  fender. 

"I'm  going  to  give  you  a  good  hot  cup 
of  coffee  and  have  you  well  warmed  up, 
then  I'm  going  to  send  you  home.  Your 
mothers  will  worry  if  you're  late." 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     187 

She  brought  forth  the  coffee  urn  and 
cups.  "  While  I'm  attending  to  the  coffee, 
tell  me  how  it  happened." 

A  babel  of  voices  arose.  Their  fear 
having  gone,  excitement  took  its  place. 
By  broken  sentences,  many  exclamations 
and  interruptions,  Debby  Alden  learned 
that  Hester  had  acted  the  part  of  a  heroine. 

"And  there  lay  Hester,  stretched  out 
flat,  with  her  hands  holding  Mary  under 
her  arms.  Hester  was  stiff  with  cold,  and 
her  sleeves  were  frozen  to  the  ice  where 
the  water  trickled  over.  She  could  scarcely 
move,  but  I  told  her  to  skate  home.  I 
couldn't  carry  two  and,  anyway,  moving 
was  better  for  Hester,"  said  Ralph. 

"I  think  I  should  have  stood  there  until 
doomsday,"  cried  Edith.  This  was  the 
first  excitement  she  had  shown.  "I  was 
stunned,  I'm  sure.  I  could  not  have 
moved,  but  Hester  cried,  'Go  for  Ralph,' 
and  threw  herself  right  across  the  broken 
ice.  I  didn't  wait.  I  went  as  fast  as  I 


188     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

could.  I  forgot  everything  but  catching 
up  to  Ralph.  I'll  never  be  able  to  skate 
so  fast  again." 

"There  really  wasn't  any  danger,"  ex- 
plained Ralph,  "but  Hester  did  not  know 
that.  There  wasn't  danger  for  her,  I  mean, 
but  if  she  hadn't  have  held  Mary  above 
water,  she  would  have  gone  under.  You 
see,  Miss  Alden,  the  air-hole  was  about  a 
foot  across.  Mary  came  with  all  her  weight 
upon  it.  Of  course,  when  she  went  through, 
the  thin  ice,  for  the  radius  of  a  foot,  went 
with  her,  but  it  was  solid  where  Hester 
and  I  threw  ourselves.  It  was  fully  six 
inches  thick.  So  Hester  was  in  no  danger." 

Debby  Alden  pressed  her  lips  grimly. 
"If  there  had  been  danger,  it  would  have 
been  all  the  same  to  Hester.  To  try  to 
save  a  companion  was  the  only  thing  for 
her  to  do  —  danger  or  no  danger.  Of 
course,  she  acted  quickly  and  without 
thinking,  but  actions  of  that  kind  are  more 
apt  to  show  of  what  sort  folks  are  than 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     189 

actions  that  come  after  thought  and  de- 
liberation. I'm  glad  Hester  showed  the 
proper  instincts." 

She  poured  the  coffee  and  passed  it  to 
her  guests.  "It  may  keep  you  awake, 
but  it  will  keep  you  from  being  chilled." 

When  they  had  finished,  she  said:  "Now, 
I'm  going  to  send  you  home.  It's  long 
after  ten  o'clock,  and  your  parents  will 
be  worried  about  you.  Ralph,  will  you 
stop  in  at  the  Bowermans'  and  tell  Kate 
that  Mary  will  stay  with  Hester  all  night? 
You  need  say  nothing  of  what  has  happened. 
Mary  is  comfortable  now,  and  there's  no 
danger  of  her  taking  cold.  I've  done  all 
I  could,  and  there's  no  use  in  Kate's  run- 
ning over  here  to-night  and  getting  nervous 
and  excited.  We'll  tell  her  about  it  in  the 
morning." 

"I  presume,  Miss  Debby,  that  this  will 
be  the  last  time  Hester  will  be  allowed  to 
go  skating,"  said  Jane. 

Debby  Alden  shook  her  head  in  nega- 


190     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

tion.  "No,  she  may  go  just  as  she  always 
has,  when  the  ice  is  reasonably  safe.  I 
never  wish  her  to  take  foolhardy  risks, 
but  neither  do  I  want  her  kept  in  a  band- 
box, wrapped  up  in  cotton." 

She  came  with  them  to  the  door,  holding 
a  lamp  high  in  her  hand  to  light  them 
down  the  garden  path. 

"All  right,  Miss  Debby.  Good  night," 
they  called  back.  She  responded  warmly, 
and,  turning  back  into  the  kitchen,  closed 
the  door  upon  the  darkness  and  the  ris- 
ing wind. 

Upstairs  the  two  girls  lay  in  great  feather- 
beds  in  the  bedroom  over  the  kitchen. 
They  were  warm;  the  danger  of  a  chill, 
with  all  the  ills  which  might  follow  in  its 
wake,  had  passed.  Yet  they  were  not 
comfortable.  At  least,  Mary  Bowerman 
was  not.  She  felt  that  an  apology  was  due 
to  Hester,  or  at  least  an  expression  of  grati- 
tude for  the  effort  Hester  had  made  to  save 
her.  She  was  nervous  and  restless,  in  spite 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     191 

of  the  copious  draughts  of  catnip  tea  which 
Miss  Debby  had  given  her. 

She  heard  Ralph  and  the  girls  leave  the 
house,  and  their  call  of  "good  night"  from 
the  garden  gate.  She  could  hear  Hester 
breathing,  but  could  not  tell  whether  she 
were  sleeping  or  awake.  When  she  heard 
Miss  Debby  coming  upstairs,  she  closed 
her  eyes  and  pretended  to  be  asleep.  She 
did  not  wish  to  talk  with  her  now,  and  she 
knew  that  Miss  Debby  would  slip  in  to  see 
how  her  patients  were  getting  along. 

Debby  put  the  lamp  in  the  hallway, 
turning  it  low  that  the  light  might  not 
waken  the  girls  if  they  were  sleeping.  She 
tiptoed  in,  in  her  stocking  feet.  Leaning 
over  Mary's  bed,  she  laid  her  hand  softly 
upon  her  head  and  then  upon  her  hand. 
Both  were  warm  and  moist.  With  a  sigh 
of  relief,  she  went  to  Hester. 

"I'm  all  right,  Aunt  Debby,"  whispered 
Hester.  "I'm  as  warm  as  toast.  I  was 
trying  to  stay  awake  until  you  came  up. 


192     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

Good  night."  She  raised  herself  in  bed 
and  threw  her  arms  about  her  aunt's  neck. 
"Oh,  Aunt  Debby!  when  I  saw  Mary  in 
the  water  to-night,  I  was  sorry." 

"Don't  talk  about  it.  There  was  really 
no  danger,"  she  replied  brusquely.  She 
understood  what  Hester  was  about  to  say. 
Sorry  that  she  had  kept  warm  in  her  heart 
her  anger  at  Mary.  "We'll  not  talk  about 
it  to-night,  Hessie." 

She  kissed  the  girl,  and  went  off  to  her 
own  room.  She  had  not  wished  Hester 
to  express  herself  before  Mary.  "Mary 
Bowerman  is  the  one  who  should  feel  sorry 
and  ashamed,"  she  said  to  herself. 

Mary  lay  with  her  eyes  closed,  listening 
to  Miss  Debby  moving  about  in  her  room. 
When  the  house  had  grown  quiet  and  all 
danger  of  Miss  Debby's  hearing  her  had 
passed,  she  raised  herself  on  her  elbow 
and  whispered,  "Hester!  Hester!" 

There  was  no  response.  Hester  heard, 
but  her  pride  would  not  let  her  heed. 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     193 

" Hester!  why  don't  you  answer?  You 
are  not  asleep." 

At  this  Hester  raised  herself  on  her 
elbow,  and  across  the  dimly  lighted  room 
the  girls  looked  each  other  directly  in  the 
eyes. 

"What  is  it?"  asked  Hester.  She  spoke 
calmly  enough,  although  her  heart  was 
throbbing  so  violently  that  she  could 
scarcely  speak.  She  wished  to  be  loved. 
Every  friend  was  dear  to  her.  She  and 
Mary  had  played  together  since  they  were 
toddling  babies.  She  liked  Mary  yet,  hi 
spite  of  all  that  had  passed  between  them, 
and  she  was  almost  ready  to  forgive  the 
insult  and  forget  that  Mary  had  proved  her- 
self false  to  truth  and  to  friendship. 

"You  saved  my  life  to-night.  I  suppose 
I'd  be  under  the  ice  now,  if  you  had  not 
helped  me  up.  I've  been  lying  here  a  long 
time  thinking  about  it.  I  wanted  to  tell 
you  that  I  didn't  tell  you  just  what  was 
true.  Your  mother  was  not  really  a  com- 


194     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

mon  tramp.  I  shouldn't  have  said  that. 
She  had  gone  from  her  way  and  was  walk- 
ing into  town." 

So  far,  the  attempt  at  confession  and 
apology  was  good.  Suddenly  Mary  paused. 
Perhaps  the  look  of  pleasure  and  relief 
which  came  to  Hester's  face  was  too  much 
for  Mary's  malicious,  selfish  nature  to  bear. 
She  laughed  softly,  and  then  added,  "But 
the  rest  was  true  enough  —  the  rest  about 
no  one  knowing  who  you  are,  and  Aunt 
Debby  keeping  you  so  you  wouldn't  be 
sent  to  the  poorhouse." 

For  one  instant  Hester's  frame  stiffened. 
She  was  never  slow  about  expressing  her- 
self when  matters  did  not  move  to  please 
her.  Sharp,  bitter  words  were  upon  her 
tongue,  but  she  thought  of  her  Aunt  Debby, 
who  must  never  know  that  she  knew  that 
she  belonged  nowhere,  and  that  no  one 
claimed  her.  She  pressed  her  lips  together, 
arranged  her  pillow  with  the  greatest  care, 
and  lay  back  as  though  to  sleep. 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     195 

"I  have  a  lot  of  things  that  I'd  like  to 
say  to  you,  Mary  Bowerman,"  she  said 
in  whispers,  "but  they'll  not  be  said 
to-night." 


CHAPTER  X 

A  BNER  STOUT'S  mind  was  planning 
^••^  great  things.  When  the  store  had 
closed,  and  the  family  gathered  about  the 
board,  he  was  silent.  Jane  prepared  her 
most  savory  dishes,  which  her  brother-in- 
law  ate  without  comment,  and  not  so  much 
as  smacked  his  lips  with  satisfaction,  as  was 
his  wont.  By  these  signs  his  family  knew 
that  some  great  plan  had  presented  itself 
to  his  mind,  so  they  spoke  in  whispers  when 
he  was  present,  and  gave  him  room  at  the 
table  and  when  they  sat  about  the  fire. 

A  week  passed  before  he  lifted  up  his 
voice  and  spoke.  It  was  after  supper. 
Mary  and  Esther  were  in  the  parlor  enter- 
taining friends  with  music.  Joel  and  John 
had  dressed  themselves  with  care,  donned 
their  finest  overcoats,  and  with  canes  in 
hand  went  for  a  promenade  in  the  public 

196 


THE   COMING   OF   HESTER     197 

thoroughfare.  They  were  the  only  family 
of  their  class  in  town.  They  had  not  the 
privilege  of  calling  upon  young  ladies  at 
their  homes,  so  their  social  life  was  made  up 
of  promenading  upon  the  public  square  and 
ogling  every  one  who  passed.  Their  clothes 
were  always  redolent  with  perfume,  and  a 
supercilious  smirk  was  upon  their  lips. 

So  it  was  that  Abner  and  his  sister-in-law 
sat  by  the  fire  alone.  The  room  was  in 
shadows,  the  light  having  been  turned  low, 
as  the  gas  was  metred.  He  was  the  promi- 
nent, all-absorbing  presence  in  the  room. 
Jane,  worn,  humble,  and  a  dependent  upon 
his  good  graces,  sat  in  the  background  upon 
a  rocking-chair,  yet  not  rocking  lest  she 
disturb  the  serenity  of  Abner's  thoughts. 
She  was  ingratiating  and  sycophantic.  She 
had  fed  upon  the  bread  of  charity  all  her 
life,  and  her  manner  was  apologetic  for  exist- 
ing at  all.  Yet  she  was  not  naturally  dull, 
but  independent  thought  and  action  had 
long  been  crushed  out  of  her.  Her  living 


198     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

depended  upon  the  favor  of  others,  and  to 
obtain  that  favor  was  the  sole  ambition 
left  within  her. 

Suddenly  Abner  looked  up  at  her;  his 
sharp,  keen  eyes  gleamed  through  narrow 
slits  of  eyelids.  He  rubbed  his  hands  to- 
gether as  though  to  wash  them;  his  smile, 
intended  to  be  pleasing,  was  but  sinister; 
his  oily  voice  was  ingratiating  as  he  ad- 
dressed his  sister-in-law. 

"I  know  what  your  mind  is  working  on, 
Jane.  You  grieve  too  much  about  it, 
Jane." 

She  looked  up  quickly,  unable  to  under- 
stand the  new  tone  in  his  voice.  She  had 
never  known  him  to  be  sympathetic  or 
tender.  As  to  grieving !  She  was  anything 
but  that.  She  scarcely  knew  what  she  was 
thinking  about.  She  knew  only  that  she 
was  glad  that  she  could  sit  all  evening  in 
quiet,  for  her  back  had  grown  weary  with 
sorting  rags  from  daylight  until  bedtime. 
She  knew  her  brother-in-law  well.  He 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     199 

could  be  sympathetic  and  tender  only 
when  these  qualities  paved  the  way  for  his 
own  purpose.  She  looked  at  him,  but  did 
not  reply.  She  knew  that  something  lay 
beyond  his  remark,  and  waited  to  hear. 

"Poor  'Liza  has  been  dead  sixteen  years 
now.  It's  never  been  the  same  with  me 
since  she  went  away.  She  was  a  fine  woman 
—  was  'Liza,  my  wife."  He  sniffled  and 
rubbed  his  eyes  with  the  back  of  his  hand. 
Jane  waited  patiently  as  became  a  woman 
of  her  humble  position.  She  offered  no 
word  of  sympathy,  for  in  spite  of  his  at- 
tempt to  wipe  away  the  tears  of  grief,  she 
knew  that  his  eyes  were  dry.  She  had  not 
heard  him  speak  of  'Liza  since  the  day  she 
was  buried  from  the  East  Side  of  New 
York,  where  she  had  died  from  fever  con- 
tracted from  sorting  junk  and  rags  which 
had  been  collected  from  an  infected  region 
of  the  tenements. 

Her  death  had  occurred  eighteen  years 
ago,  and  Abner  had  engrossed  his  time  and 


200     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

mind  so  in  business  that  he  had  not  men- 
tioned her  in  all  these  years. 

He  heaved  a  prodigious  sigh  and  con- 
tinued: "  You're  sitting  around  dopish  all 
the  time,  and  thinking  of  Eliza.  You 
grieve  as  though  it  was  only  yesterday  she 
died.  You're  always  sniffling  and  feeling 
bad."  He  gave  her  no  opportunity  to 
reply,  but  continued:  "You  can't  get  over 
her  going  away,  taking  little  Ruth  with  her. 
Every  day  you  sit  around  and  cry  as  though 
your  heart  was  broke.  It's  always,  '  Abner, 
I  must  go  to  'Liza's  grave.  I  want  to 
know  that  she's  buried  decently  as  a  Chris- 
tian should  be.  I  hain't  never  happy  when 
I  think  that  she's  lying  away  from  her 
people,  and  no  tombstone  over  her/  You 
keep  talking  about  her  every  day  till  I'm  al- 
most crazy  listening  to  you.  Hain't  that  the 
way  you've  been  acting  right  along,  Jane?" 

He  glanced  at  her  furtively.  He  had 
been  sitting  with  his  face  buried  in  his 
hands,  the  very  attitude  of  dejection  and 


grief.  Now  he  glanced  at  her  through  his 
long,  thin  fingers,  as  though  to  study  the 
effect  of  his  words. 

Her  face  was  utterly  devoid  of  expression. 
She  rocked  gently  backward  and  forward. 
It  was  not  yet  clear  to  her  mind  toward 
what  end  he  was  working,  so  she  discreetly 
did  not  commit  herself  to  speech.  But 
when  he  kept  his  sharp  eyes  upon  her  and 
repeated  his  query,  "Isn't  that  the  size  of 
it,  Jane?"  she  nodded  her  head  in  affir- 
mation and  replied,  as  she  knew  he  wished 
her  to  do,  "I  guess  it's  that  way  if  you  say 
so,  Abner." 

Again  he  sniffled  and  wiped  the  imaginary 
tears  from  his  eyes.  "It  is  sixteen  years 
next  June  since  Ruth  was  born.  My,  but 
she  was  a  fine  child,  with  lots  of  hair  curling 
about  her  head.  She  was  dark  like  Mary 
—  same  eyes  and  hair."  He  paused  a 
moment  as  though  to  let  his  thoughts  dwell 
tenderly  upon  this  child  of  his.  The  at- 
tempt at  tears  was  forgotten.  He  spoke  in 


202     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

clear,  incisive  tones,  which  cut  and  rang 
like  his  own  silver  dollars  as  they  fell  on 
the  counter.  He  was  the  business  man 
now,  ready  to  sacrifice  any  one  or  every  one 
to  his  own  interests. 

Jane  did  not  break  the  silence.  She  was 
ignorant  of  his  plans,  so  the  most  tactful, 
the  surest  thing,  was  to  maintain  a  discreet 
silence.  After  a  moment,  he  continued :  — 

"'Liza  was  never  the  same  woman  after 
Ruth  was  born.  Never  seemed  to  get 
through  her  work,  and  always  fussing  and 
fretting.  That  was  sixteen  years  ago  since 
Ruth  was  born.  Hain't  that  about  right, 
Jane?" 

Again  she  nodded  in  affirmation.  All 
this  was  new  to  her.  She  had  heard  of  no 
Ruth  except  that  one  who  went  gleaning 
in  the  fields  of  Boaz.  But  if  Abner  had  a 
good  and  sufficient  reason  for  wishing  there 
to  be  a  Ruth  who  was  born  sixteen  years 
ago,  she  knew  no  reason  to  refuse  him  such 
comfort.  So  far,  she  was  wholly  in  the 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     203 

dark  as  to  his  intentions,  but  an  under- 
standing of  his  plans  could  never  be  had 
by  asking  questions.  He  would  divulge  as 
much  as  he  wished  her  to  know,  and  the 
time  and  place  would  be  of  his  own  choos- 
ing. That  she  was  necessary  to  the  further- 
ance of  his  plan  was  evident,  else  he  would 
have  told  her  nothing. 

He  watched  her  covertly  for  a  few 
minutes.  He  wondered  if  she  would  be  as 
'Liza  had  often  been  —  too  dense  to  follow 
his  lead  in  business  matters.  Eliza  with 
her  big,  innocent  eyes,  tell-tale  expression, 
and  hesitancy  in  agreeing  with  statements 
which  he  had  made,  had  ruined  many  a 
sale  for  him.  But  Jane  possessed  one  ad- 
vantage over  her  sister.  No  one  could  tell 
her  thoughts  or  intentions  from  her  face. 
Even  to  him  they  were  a  closed  book. 

He  studied  her  furtively  from  between 
his  fingers.  Her  face  was  as  heavy  and 
as  expressionless  as  a  block  of  wood.  It 
seemed  safe  to  continue. 


204     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

"You've  never  been  the  same  person 
since  'Liza  went  off.  Of  course,  you  felt 
badly.  Didn't  we  all  feel  just  that  way, 
and  didn't  we  do  everything  to  find  her? 
But  it's  no  use  of  spoiling  your  whole  life. 
After  she  went  and  I  knew  there  wasn't 
the  remotest  chance  of  finding  her,  I  put 
my  mind  on  business.  As  I  said  then,  I 
can  never  be  a  happy  man,  but  I'll  be  suc- 
cessful. I  owe  that  much  to  my  children. 
I'll  leave  them  a  little  to  make  life  easier. 
There's  just  one  thing  about  'Liza  going 
off  and  taking  Ruth  the  way  she  did.  I 
think  she  was  sicker  than  we  thought.  I 
spoke  sharp  once  or  twice  to  her  about  not 
taking  hold  and  helping  about  the  shop, 
but  somehow  she  didn't  seem  to  have  any 
spirit.  I  honestly  think  she  wasn't  just 
right  in  her  head.  If  I'd  realized  at  that 
time  how  miserable  she  was,  I'd  never 
mentioned  shop,  and  had  up  a  doctor  and 
sent  her  off  somewhere  to  get  well ;  although 
I  had  but  a  few  dollars,  I'd  spent  my  last 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     205 

cent  to  have  had  her  well,  but  I  didn't 
know.  I  didn't  realize.  I  was  all  wrapped 
up  in  trying  to  make  a  little  so  she  and  the 
children  could  live  in  comfort." 

This  new  story  of  her  sister's  life  was 
like  a  romance  to  Jane.  So  far  as  outward 
show  was  concerned,  she  listened  with  pa- 
tience; but  inwardly  she  was  wondering  as 
to  the  reason  for  the  new  version,  and 
speculating  as  to  the  outcome. 

His  sharp  gray  eyes  gleamed  in  the  dark- 
ness. He  was  so  much  the  actor  that  for 
the  time  he  almost  believed  the  story  he 
was  constructing. 

"  She's  dead  —  I  feel  that  she  is  dead," 
he  said  at  last,  in  his  sharp,  metallic  tone. 
"Surely,  if  she  was  living,  she  would  have 
sent  word.  If  not  to  me,  at  least  to  you, 
Jane,  or  to  her  children.  But  there's  never 
been  the  scratch  of  a  pen  —  not  a  scratch 
except  that  little  note  that  she  left  pinned 
to  a  curtain,  for  all  the  world  like  a  stage 
woman.  That  was  one  other  thing  that 


206     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

made  me  think  that  Eliza  wasn't  just  her- 
self. She  was  never  no  hand  for  such 
stagey  games  —  running  off  and  leaving  a 
note  behind  her.  She  was  a  woman  with 
good  horse  sense,  and  kept  to  her  work 
and  said  little.  I  have  that  letter  yet,  — 
scratched  on  brown  wrapping  paper,  —  a  bit 
she  tore  from  a  package.  It  hain't  writ 
plain,  for  she  was  never  nothing  of  a 
scholar." 

He  had  told  Jane  enough  to  set  her 
thinking.  That  was  quite  enough  for  one 
evening.  He  was  like  a  skilful  fisherman, 
who  does  not  immediately  attempt  to  draw 
in  his  heaviest  catch.  He  had  her  on  the 
hook.  He  knew  that  tact  and  skill  would 
be  required  to  "land"  her. 

For  a  week  the  name  of  Eliza  was  not 
mentioned  in  the  family.  Jane,  knowing 
her  people  well,  knew  that  this  silence  be- 
tokened neither  lack  of  interest  nor  change 
of  plans.  If  Abner  thought  it  wise  to  be 
silent,  well  and  good.  She  could  keep  her 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     207 

lips  as  close  as  others.  While  she  prepared 
the  savory  stews,  washed  dishes,  and  cleaned 
up  the  kitchen  floor,  she  did  much  thinking. 

Meantime,  Abner,  as  he  smacked  his  lips 
over  the  palatable  dishes,  complimented  her 
highly  upon  her  frugality  and  the  delightful 
results  achieved  without  a  great  expenditure. 

" Extravagance!  Extravagance!"  he  ex- 
claimed one  day,  as  he  rolled  his  eyes 
heavenward  and  clasped  his  hands  to- 
gether. "It  is  the  curse  of  our  country. 
Merchants  want  to  live  like  kings,  and 
beggars  like  merchants.  You  mustn't  be 
extravagant,  Jane.  Save  the  scraps,  for  I 
have  so  little,  Jane,  so  little." 

Jane  kept  her  own  counsel.  Abner  was 
not  generally  free  with  compliments,  yet,  as 
the  week  passed,  at  every  meal  he  beamed 
upon  her  and  commended  her  for  her 
frugality. 

"When  your  work  is  finished,  Jane,  come 
into  the  store,"  he  said  one  day.  "You 
are  'Liza's  sister,  and  always  stood  by  her 


208     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

when  she  needed  a  friend,  and  I  mean  to 
show  you  that  Abner  Stout  is  not  one  to 
forget  a  kindness  to  him  or  his.  So  come  in 
and  pick  a  dress  for  yourself  —  trimmings, 
linings,  and  all."  He  set  his  thin  lips 
close.  His  features  were  keen  and  sharp, 
at  variance  with  the  generosity  expressed 
by  his  words.  He  turned  to  his  eldest  son, 
who  was  his  likeness  in  looks  and  business 
methods.  "When  your  Aunt  Jane  comes 
in,  I  want  you  to  show  her  what  there  is  in 
black  goods.  Let  her  have  something  fine 
and  good.  You  have  alpaca,  haven't  you? 
The  kind  that  retails  at  fifty  cents?" 

Jane  accepted  the  gift  without  comment. 
She  was  humble,  dependent.  It  was  not 
her  place  to  pick  and  choose  and  declare 
her  desire  like  those  who  had  money  in  the 
business.  This  life  was  fine,  compared  to 
that  with  her  brother's  family.  She  knew 
no  reason  to  complain. 

Abner  attended  strictly  to  business  while 
in  the  store.  But  at  hours  during  the  day 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     209 

when  business  was  dull,  he  encouraged  his 
customers  to  linger  and  talk  with  him.  On 
these  occasions  he  had  little  to  say  beyond 
a  question  now  and  then.  But  he  was  an 
excellent  listener,  and  many  of  his  customers, 
particularly  those  women  who  lived  on  iso- 
lated farms  and  drove  to  town  but  once  a 
week,  found  him  interesting  company.  He 
encouraged  them  to  speak  of  their  lives, 
incidents  that  had  happened  in  this  little 
valley.  Wholly  unconscious  that  he  had  a 
subtle  purpose  in  leading  them  to  talk,  they 
told  all  they  knew  of  their  own  history  and 
their  neighbors'.  So  he  learned  in  detail  all 
that  had  occurred  in  the  valley  for  a  score 
of  years  past.  He  knew  of  the  accident 
which  had  occurred  at  the  crossing.  He 
could  have  described,  had  he  been  asked, 
each  detail  of  her  feature  and  dress.  He 
knew  the  reputed  age  of  the  child  this 
woman  had  carried  in  her  arms.  It  was 
not  until  he  was  quite  sure  of  all  that  could 
be  known  concerning  Hester  Alden's  life 


210     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

and  parentage  that  he  spoke  again  to  his 
sister-in-law. 

"What  a  beautiful  child  our  little  Ruth 
was,"  he  began  suddenly,  as  they  sat  by 
the  kitchen  stove  with  the  gas  turned  low, 
for  it  was  sold  by  the  meter.  Jane  was 
rocking  slowly  but  steadily.  She  did  not 
glance  at  the  speaker  or  suggest  in  any  way 
that  she  had  heard  him. 

"She  would  have  been  just  sixteen  years 
old  last  June,"  he  continued.  "She  favored 
Mary  more  than  any  other  member  of  the 
family.  Every  one  who  saw  her  spoke  about 
her  big  dark  eyes  and  long  lashes.  Dark 
hair  in  soft  rings  about  her  head.  Hain't 
that  about  right,  Jane?  Wasn't  Ruth  just 
such  a  looking  child  when  her  mother  ran 
off  with  her  and  started  to  go  to  Chicago  ? " 

Jane  looked  steadily  into  his  eyes. 

"I  guess  she  must  have  looked  that  way," 
she  said  wearily. 

"Guess?  I  should  think  you  would 
know.  If  you  have  grown  so  dull  that 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     211 

you've  forgotten  how  your  own  sister's 
child  looked,  you'd  better  go  back  and  live 
with  Reuben.  It  will  be  too  hard  for  you 
here  —  the  work  and  all.  Ruth  was  just 
such  a  looking  child  as  I  said;  plump,  with 
black  hair  in  curls.  Hain't  I  right?  You 
seem  afraid  to  speak  out." 

"Yes;  that's  how  she  looked.  I  remem- 
ber now." 

"Do  you  remember  how  I  felt  over  Eliza's 
going  off  in  that  way  and  taking  our  baby? 
I  couldn't  stand  the  place.  I  sold  out, 
sacrificed  everything,  and  left  the  place.  I 
never  felt  like  settling  anywhere  till  I  came 
here.  Then  it  seems  as  though  I  was  satis- 
fied. I've  said  time  and  again  that  some- 
how I  had  a  feeling  that  I  was  near  my 
little  Ruth.  That  was  the  way  I  talked 
right  along.  Wasn't  it?" 

He  looked  keenly  at  her.  His  sharp  gray 
eyes  seemed  to  look  deep  into  her  heart. 
He  had  the  power  of  making  her  agree  to  any 
statement  which  he  might  choose  to  make. 


212     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

"Yes,  indeed.  You've  said  them  very 
words  time  and  time  again,"  she  responded. 

He  waited  a  moment,  looking  at  his 
companion  to  see  if  she  were  grasping  the 
import  of  his  speech,  and  seeing  that  she 
was,  he  continued:  "It's  just  sixteen  years 
the  fourth  day  of  next  June,  Jane,  since 
'Liza  took  Ruth  and  went  off.  Remember 
that,  Jane?  You're  getting  old,  and  al- 
though your  memory's  good,  it  hain't  quite 
what  it  was.  I  shouldn't  like  it  at  all  if 
folks  would  say  that  you  had  forgotten  your 
sister.  Her  loss  was  more  to  be  remem- 
bered than  though  she  had  died  in  her  bed, 
like  a  decent  woman  is  supposed  to  die." 

Jane  nodded.  She  was  beginning  to  see 
a  glimmer  of  light  in  regard  to  this  new 
story  of  her  sister's  life.  Abner  was  satis- 
fied with  her  quiet  acquiescence.  It  pleased 
him  more  than  any  words  could  have  done. 

When  he  felt  that  she  was  responding  in 
the  proper  spirit,  and  that  in  her  he  would 
find  a  reliable  if  not  an  energetic  helper, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     213 

he  continued  his  monologue.  He  dwelt  at 
length  on  the  causes  which  led  his  wife 
to  become  dissatisfied  with  her  home.  He 
attributed  the  dissatisfaction  to  the  condi- 
tion of  her  nerves  rather  than  to  any  ma- 
terial thing.  He  reproached  himself  for 
having  spoken  sharply  to  her,  and  in  the 
same  sentence  excused  himself  for  the  act, 
by  declaring  that  he  had  not  realized  how 
miserable  in  health  she  had  been. 

So  admirably  did  he  act  the  part  that  for 
the  time  he  believed  the  story  he  was  re- 
lating. His  thin  lips  pressed  together  in 
their  cruel,  grasping  selfishness;  his  keen 
little  gray  eyes  looked  furtively  upon  his 
companion  as  he  watched  the  effect  of  his 
words  upon  her. 

He  told  how  he  had  slaved  to  provide 
for  her  and  the  children.  How  but  a  few 
weeks  before  her  disappearance  he  had 
purchased  for  her  a  handsome  black  skirt, 
and  fine  shirt-waist  of  white  madras. 

He  grew  quite  eloquent,  and  went  into 


214     THE   COMING   OF   HESTER 

details  concerning  these  garments.  He  de- 
scribed the  cut  and  length  of  the  skirt,  and 
the  width  of  the  flounce  which  adorned  it. 
He  described  the  quality  of  the  goods  so 
fully  that  Jane  could  have  been  able  to 
select  its  counterpart  from  a  score  of  black 
materials.  He  went  so  far  as  to  mention 
the  size  and  quality  of  the  buttons  which 
fastened  the  waist. 

Jane  nodded  slowly,  her  head  keeping 
time  with  the  motion  of  her  rockers.  He 
continued  his  story,  describing  his  long-lost 
wife  as  Jane  did  not  at  all  remember  her; 
for  Eliza  and  she  had  greatly  resembled 
each  other.  They  had  always  been  bony, 
sharp-featured  girls,  and  had  developed  into 
scrawny,  angular  women,  with  little  sharp 
eyes,  straight  thin  noses,  and  sallow  skins. 
The  Eliza  which  Abner  described  to  her 
was  as  unlike  as  possible  to  the  Eliza  which 
she  had  called  sister.  But  Abner  would 
not  speak  this  without  reason,  and  it  was 
becoming  and  well  for  her,  a  humble  depend- 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     215 

ent  upon  his  charity,  to  agree  to  what  he 
thought  wise  to  say.  When  he  had  finished 
a  description  of  this  new  Eliza,  he  added: 
"We  know  only  that  her  ticket  was  on  this 
road.  We  know  nothing  more  than  that. 
We  never  heard  a  word,  though  she  said 
she'd  write  —  that  is,  her  letter  on  the 
scrap  of  brown  paper  said  she'd  write  when 
she  reached  Chicago." 

He  sighed.  Jane  had  listened  so  atten- 
tively, and  her  mind  had  become  so  en- 
grossed in  this  subject  about  which  she  had 
thought  for  weeks,  that  she  also  sighed,  and, 
with  real  tears  in  her  eyes,  murmured 
brokenly:  "My  poor  sister!  Poor  'Liza!" 

Abner  looked  upon  her  with  approval. 
He  did  not  give  her  credit  for  genuine  feel- 
ing, but  was  pleased  with  what  he  thought 
was  her  good  acting.  His  spirits  rose.  He 
chuckled  gleefully,  and  his  eyes  scintillated 
like  bits  of  glass  under  the  rays  of  a  hot 
sun. 

"I    know    how    you've    missed    Eliza. 


216     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

You're  not  one  to  talk  much,  but  you've 
got  a  good  heart  in  you,  and  you  and  Eliza 
thought  a  heap  of  each  other.  I'm  pretty 
much  the  same  way  myself  —  not  much  for 
words,  but  pretty  deep  on  feelings.  If  any 
of  the  folks  should  speak  to  you,  you  tell 
them  how  broke  up  I've  been  —  never  got 
over  my  great  loss.  That  all  I  live  for  is 
the  hope  that  I'll  find  my  little  girl.  You 
speak  up  in  that  way,  Jane,  if  folks  should 
bring  the  matter  up,  you  know."  He 
looked  sharply  at  her. 

She  nodded.  "It  won't  be  a  word  dif- 
ferent than  what  you  say,"  she  said. 

"Well,  you've  heard  how  I  said  it,"  was 
the  rejoinder.  Again  she  nodded.  They 
understood  each  other.  There  was  no  need 
for  further  speech. 

There  was  silence  for  some  time.  Abner 
Stout's  shoulders  bent  forward  until  they 
were  bow-shaped.  He  propped  his  head  on 
his  upturned  hands,  and  his  keen  eyes 
pierced  the  semi-darkness  of  the  kitchen. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     217 

Then  he  began  again  in  his  softest,  most 
sycophantic  tone. 

"I  never  ask  one  to  take  me  on  my 
word  alone.  That  hain't  business.  I  ex- 
act pledges  and  proofs,  and  I  do  for  others 
as  much  as  I  expect  them  to  do  for  me. 
But  here's  you  with  your  word.  Your 
word's  as  good  any  time  as  the  words  of 
another.  There's  Herman  Loeb,  the  money- 
lender, and  there's  William  Shearer,  both 
well-known.  They'll  remember  Eliza,  how 
she  looked,  and  what  she  wore  that  day 
she  took  Ruth  and  left  home.  Herman  has 
a  great  head  for  dates.  He'll  know  the 
time  to  the  hour." 

Jane  pressed  her  thin  lips  together,  folded 
her  arms  across  her  bony  chest,  and  rocked 
slowly  for  several  minutes  before  she  spoke. 
"I'd  make  sure,  I'd  make  quite  sure  about 
him  remembering,  Abner.  Folks  will  for- 
get." 

"He'll  remember.  Don't  lose  sleep  on 
that,  Jane.  I'm  sending  Joel  off  to  New 


218     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

York  this  very  night  to  see  that  Herman 
remembers.  Eh?  Joel?"  He  turned  to 
address  his  eldest  son  who  had  that  moment 
entered  the  room  in  an  overcoat,  and  hat  in 
hand.  He  wasted  no  energy  in  words.  He 
understood  the  situation  fully.  He  was  to 
go  to  New  York  to  see  to  it  that  Herman 
Loeb  and  the  man  Shearer  remembered  his 
mother,  and  the  details  of  her  disappearance 
as  Joel  would  describe  them,  and  also  to 
bring  to  the  minds  of  the  two  gentlemen 
certain  little  discrepancies  of  their  own 
which  were  yet  clear  in  the  mind  of  Abner 
Stout. 

Joel  took  a  late  train  for  the  city.  Abner 
instructed  his  daughters  if  customers  should 
inquire  for  Joel,  to  say  he  was  laid  up  with 
neuralgia.  He  knew  no  reason  for  the 
public  knowing  that  Joel  was  in  New  York 
on  business. 

The  next  day  Debby  Alden  came  into 
the  store.  Abner  himself  hastened  to  wait 
upon  her.  She  attended  strictly  to  her 


X 

THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     219 

purchasing  with  as  few  words  as  possible. 
The  shopkeeper  looked  upon  her  with  ad- 
miration, and  when  she  departed  his  eyes 
followed  her.  To  think  of  her,  a  woman, 
having  foresight  sufficient  for  such  work; 
and  ability  enough  to  keep  the  secret  to 
herself  for  sixteen  years!  What  a  wonder- 
ful creature  she  was!  He  would  like  to 
know  her  better.  He  might  learn  from  her, 
and  what  wonderful  results  they  might 
accomplish  if  they  might  work  together  for 
the  same  end  1 


CHAPTER  XI 

TPvEBBY  ALDEN  was  much  concerned 
•^-^  about  Hester's  future  in  the  high 
school.  She  suspected  that  Mary  Bower- 
man  had  taunted  her  as  being  a  child  who 
had  been  reared  on  the  charity  of  strangers, 
and  what  Mary  had  done  became  a  possi- 
bility with  every  other  pupil.  Debby  saw 
clearly  that  the  following  three  or  four 
years  would  be  critical  ones  for  Hester's 
peace  of  mind.  Until  this  time  the  girls 
who  were  friends  were  but  children,  without 
a  thought  of  a  moment  beyond  the  present, 
and  with  no  knowledge  of  certain  phases  of 
life.  Now  they  had  come  to  the  place 
where,  with  their  half-knowledge,  came  self- 
assertion  and  self-confidence.  They  were 
willing  now  to  blurt  out  what,  in  the  course 
of  several  years,  they  would  consider  well 
before  repeating. 

220 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     221 

As  children  they  had  been  too  innocent 
to  tell  Hester  that  she  by  rights  belonged 
at  the  county  home,  and  as  women  they 
would  have  been  too  self-respecting,  too  con- 
siderate of  others,  not  to  have  kept  such 
knowledge  to  themselves.  It  was  the  years 
between,  when  they  were  neither  women 
nor  children,  that  Debby  Alden  dreaded. 
It  was  now  the  first  of  March.  School 
would  close  the  first  week  in  June.  Debby 
felt  that  it  would  be  better  for  Hester  to 
complete  the  freshman  year,  and  that  would 
give  her  time  enough  to  consider  what  was 
best  to  be  done  before  the  opening  of  an- 
other term. 

Miss  Richards,  who  spent  her  winters  in 
the  South,  had  not  yet  returned.  She  had 
always  been  a  help  to  Debby,  and  her  sug- 
gestions in  regard  to  Hester  had  been  in- 
valuable. Debby  gave  Miss  Richards  credit 
for  much  that  was  fine  in  the  girl. 

The  winter  had  passed  quickly  for  both 
aunt  and  niece.  The  freshman  class  had 


222     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

taken  the  preliminary  Latin,  and  were  deep 
in  the  translation  of  Caesar.  This  work 
had  been  extremely  difficult  for  Debby,  but 
she  clung  to  it  with  a  tenacity  of  purpose 
which  had  been  a  characteristic  mark  of 
the  Aldens  for  generations.  Had  the  work 
been  easy,  she  might  have  laid  it  aside 
without  any  pricks  of  conscience;  but  with 
conditions  as  they  were,  it  looked  too  much 
to  her  like  being  conquered  by  a  few  pages 
of  printed  matter.  Her  tenacity  of  pur- 
pose and  faithfulness  exerted  an  influence 
over  Hester.  Debby  realized  this,  and  for 
Hester's  sake  never  grew  faint-hearted, 
whatever  the  task  before  her. 

Hester's  mind  was  quicker  than  hers, 
especially  along  the  line  of  literature  and 
language,  as  these  never  had  been  Debby's 
strong  points.  She  might  have  been  a 
mathematician,  for  she  was  logical,  far- 
sighted,  and  judicious.  In  order  that  she 
could  keep  step  with  her  niece,  she  pur- 
chased her  own  set  of  books,  and  put  in 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     223 

every  spare  moment  that  the  housework 
and  sewing  did  not  claim.  Her  sense  of 
humor  never  failed  her.  She  often  smiled 
grimly  as  she  sat  alone  translating  the 
Latin.  A  dozen  years  before  had  any  one 
told  her  that  she  would  do  just  the  thing 
she  was  doing  now,  she  would  have  put  his 
assertion  by  as  not  worth  considering. 
Looking  back  upon  what  she  had  accom- 
plished during  these  years  was  a  never- 
failing  source  of  delight  to  her.  Her  mind 
had  developed  and  broadened  in  a  way  she 
would  not  have  believed  possible.  Her 
social  life  had  become  something  worthy  of 
the  name.  She  had,  through  Miss  Richards's 
introduction,  become  a  member  of  a  read- 
ing club.  For  several  years  she  had  met 
and  mingled  with  a  conservative,  cultivated 
set  of  women  who  were  friends  of  Miss 
Richards. 

Debby  had  never  been  at  a  disadvantage. 
From  the  first  she  had  been  one  with  them; 
for  she  had  within  her  all  the  essentials  of 


224     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

high-breeding,  and  a  high  ideal  of  honor. 
The  thought  of  a  lie  appalled  her;  an  im- 
pure thought  had  never  entered  her  mind 
nor  a  coarse  word  crossed  her  lips.  Al- 
though at  first  she  was  ignorant  of  the 
niceties  of  manners  which  marked  the 
polished  women  she  had  met,  yet  they 
recognized  that  she  had  within  her  that 
which  was  the  mark  of  nobility,  and  greater 
than  all  the  surface  culture  that  the  world 
could  give. 

She  had  gone  back  to  her  forgotten 
music  since  Hester  was  old  enough  to  wish 
to  sing.  She  had  taught  herself  much 
about  dainty  needlework  since  that  day  she 
had  made  Hester's  first  white  dress.  With 
Hester  in  school  and  her  friends  coming  in 
for  visits  and  calls,  Debby  had  had  young 
life  about  her.  This  company  meant  extra 
work  and  extra  steps  for  the  home-maker, 
but  it  bore  with  it  its  own  compensation, 
as  it  kept  her  in  touch  with  that  "  world 
of  buoyant  spirits  to  whom  the  world  was 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     225 

green;  with  every  goose  a  swan,  and  with 
every  lass  a  queen." 

It  was  Debby  Alden  who  took  charge  of 
them  when  the  sleighing  parties  were  made 
up,  and  who  chaperoned  the  moonlight 
walks  and  corn  roasts.  Before  she  knew 
what  had  happened,  her  spirits  were  as 
light  and  girlish  as  Hester's,  while  her 
judgment  and  ideals  had  not  lowered  their 
standard. 

"She  has  done  wonders  for  Hester,"  was 
the  common  expression  among  the  people 
of  the  country-side.  Debby  heard  and  at 
first  accepted  it  without  reservation.  But 
lately  she  had  added  to  this  judgment  of 
the  people,  "I  have  done  some  things  for 
her,  but  think  what  she  has  done  for  me ! " 

While  awaiting  Miss  Richards's  return, 
Debby  took  inventory  of  her  financial  con- 
dition. The  Aldens  had  ever  been  thrifty 
folk,  who  would  have  gone  in  calico  all 
their  lives  rather  than  to  exceed  their  in- 
come by  so  much  as  a  penny.  Indeed,  they 


226     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

had  laid  a  little  aside  each  year  for  the 
"  rainy  day."  So  it  was  that  Debby,  in 
addition  to  the  farm,  had  been  left  a  sum 
well  invested.  With  the  exception  of  the 
yard,  and  her  own  little  garden,  the  place 
had  been  hired  out.  The  income  from  this 
had  been  sufficient  to  supply  Hester  and 
herself  with  their  necessities.  So  far,  they 
had  had  no  longing  for  luxuries.  Debby 
had  never  lived  up  to  the  full  amount  of 
her  interest  money. 

When  she  considered  Hester's  future,  she 
gave  forth  an  expression  of  thankfulness 
that  she  had  not  been  slack  with  her  money. 
She  believed  that  she  would  have  enough, 
without  touching  the  original  principal,  to 
send  Hester  to  school  for  two  years.  She 
herself  would  live  on  very  little  while  Hes- 
ter was  away.  But  at  this  point  of  think- 
ing her  courage  always  failed  her.  She 
could  not  think  of  what  the  house  would 
be  without  Hester. 

"Fifteen  years,  and  she  with  me  every 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     227 

day  of  that  time!  Well,  one  can  get  in 
the  habit  of  things  in  fifteen  years." 

Debby  Alden  had  done  that.  In  fifteen 
years  she  had  lived  only  for  Hester,  and 
looked  forward  to  the  hour  of  her  coming 
from  school.  Every  act  which  she  per- 
formed, every  thought  that  came  to  her, 
had  Hester  as  the  centre  about  which  they 
revolved.  There  had  been  a  time  when 
Debby  Alden  had  hoped  that  Hester's  rela- 
tives would  find  and  claim  her.  Now  she 
feared  such  a  thing,  and  hugged  to  her 
heart  the  comforting  thought  that  the  laws 
of  the  land  had  made  the  child  hers,  and 
the  love  between  them  had  grown  so  strong 
that  unknown  relatives,  however  near  of  kin, 
could  never  come  between. 

When  Miss  Richards  returned  from  the 
South,  Debby  Alden  at  once  called  upon  her. 

"I'm  troubled  about  Hester,"  she  said. 

"Isn't  she  well  and  happy?  From  your 
letters  I  judged  she  was  both." 

"She  is  just  now,  but  I  dread  the  future." 


228     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

Then  she  told  what  had  occurred  during 
the  winter.  She  did  not  mention  Mary 
Bowerman's  name.  Nothing  could  be 
gained  by  making  known  to  Miss  Richards 
that  young  person's  shortcomings,  and 
Debby  Alden  was  not  one  who  traduced 
for  the  mere  satisfaction  of  repeating  ill  of 
those  whom  she  called  neighbor. 

"That  has  happened  once,  Eva,"  she 
said.  "My  little  girl  is  proud;  as  proud 
as  she  can  be  of  those  things  which  a  girl 
should  be  proud  of.  That  is,  of  her  good 
name,  and  her  freedom  from  obligations, 
and  then  to  be  told  that  the  name  isn't 
hers,  and  that  she's  under  great  obligations 
to  those  who  are  not  even  kin!  I  tell 
you,  Eva,  it  cut  her  deep.  She  never  told 
me  a  word,  but  I  could  see  how  she  was 
hurt." 

"It  never  happened  before,  Debby,  and 
it  may  never  again.  I  think  you  worry 
needlessly." 

But    Debby    Alden,    as    far    as    outside 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     229 

practical  affairs  were  concerned,  was  more 
far-sighted  than  Miss  Richards. 

"I  think  it  will,  Eva.  I  think  it  will 
occur  more  times  in  the  next  two  years 
than  it  has  or  will  again." 

"Your  reasoning  may  be  logical,  Debby; 
but  it  is  beyond  my  comprehension.  I  feel 
as  you  do  concerning  Hester.  I  would  not 
have  her  hurt  in  that  way.  There  is  no 
reason  why  she  should  bear  the  taunts  of 
some  malicious,  ill-bred  person."  These 
were  strong  adjectives  for  Miss  Richards. 
She  observed  her  companion's  look  of  sur- 
prise. "I  am  not  speaking  without  thought, 
Debby.  I  mean  what  I  say.  No  one  but 
a  malicious,  ill-bred  person  would  speak 
tauntingly  of  such  matters  to  the  person 
who  is  most  interested.  Hester  should  be 
spared  a  recurrence  of  such  an  experience. 
But  I  believe  it  will  not  come  to  her  again." 

There  was  always  peace  and  calm  in 
Miss  Richards's  presence.  No  phase  or 
condition  held  fear  or  terror  to  her.  She 


230     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

performed  graciously  those  duties  which 
lay  near  at  hand;  and  her  energy  never 
expended  itself  in  anticipating  the  difficul- 
ties of  the  future.  She  knew  no  social 
standing.  The  woof  and  warp  of  her  friend- 
ship was  formed  upon  her  moral  worth. 
She  visited  as  gladly  at  the  three-room 
cottage  as  she  did  at  the  mansion.  Neither 
did  she  make  distinctions  of  years.  Her 
friends  were  among  old  ladies  and  women 
of  mature  years.  Hester  enjoyed  a  visit 
with  Miss  Richards  as  much  as  Debby  did, 
and  once,  without  considering  the  force  of 
her  speech,  she  remarked  after  a  day  with 
Miss  Richards,  "Well,  Miss  Eva  is  a  Chris- 
tian who  is  working  hard  at  the  business." 

Now  she  was  conscientious  in  her  efforts 
to  see  Hester's  position  from  the  same 
point  of  view  that  Debby  was  seeing  it. 
She  did  not  wish  by  so  much  as  a  word  to 
make  it  possible  for  Hester  to  be  hurt 
again  in  the  same  way. 

"I    think    you   are  worrying    needlessly, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     231 

Debby,"  she  continued,  after  a  moment's 
consideration.  "For  this  reason.  Among 
all  the  girls  with  whom  Hester  is  intimately 
acquainted,  but  one  may  be  so  maliciously 
inclined.  I  know  that  Jane  and  Edith 
and  Janet  would  suffer  to  the  limit  rather 
than  do  such  a  thing.  Perhaps  in  all  that 
set  of  girls  one  only  lacks  self-control  and 
breeding.  Hester  has  learned  who  that  is. 
Will  she  not  keep  from  her?  I  think, 
Debby,  that  Hester  will  never  again  put 
herself  in  a  position  for  that  girl  to  speak 
to  her  so." 

"You  haven't  been  with  girls  as  much 
as  I  have,  Eva.  I  remember  grandmother 
Palmer  used  to  talk  about  young  people 
climbing  fools'  hill.  I  thought  then  it  was 
merely  an  old  lady's  saying,  but  I  must 
confess  now  that  I  believe  there  is  a  good 
bit  of  philosophy  in  those  old  saws." 

"  Perhaps  a  grain  of  wheat  in  a  bushel 
of  chaff,  Debby.  Much  husk  and  little 
meat." 


232     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"In  some  old  sayings,  perhaps.  But 
I'm  learning  that  this  has  more  than  one 
grain  of  wheat  in  it.  You  see  it's  this 
way,  Eva.  The  greater  number  of  the 
girls  have  been  well  reared.  But  up  to 
this  time  they've  been  disciplined  at  home, 
and  have  had  no  responsibility,  no  choice 
in  their  line  of  conduct,  which  was  right 
and  proper,  for  no  child  has  judgment 
enough  to  know  what  is  best  to  do  or  be 
left  undone.  They  have  been  children  all 
these  years.  But  now  they've  reached  the 
place  where  they've  begun  to  think  and  act 
for  themselves,  and  their  law  of  judgment 
and  reason  begins  to  show.  They'll  do 
silly,  reckless  things  now,  that  they'll  be 
ashamed  of  in  three  or  four  years.  They're 
not  babies,  to  have  reason  spanked  into 
them,  and  they're  not  old  enough  to  be 
talked  to  as  one  talks  to  women.  It's 
these  two  or  three  years  on  fools'  hill  that 
I'm  dreading  for  Hester." 

"Yes,  I  understand,  Debby.     Have  you 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     233 

thought  of  any  plans?  Have  you  any- 
thing in  view?" 

"I  have  thought  a  great  deal,  but  I 
waited  until  you  had  come  back  before 
I'd  made  up  my  mind  to  anything.  She 
must  go  to  school.  I  stopped  when  I  was 
sixteen ;  but  schools  were  not  what  they  are 
now,  and  I  intend  that  Hester  shall  be 
educated.  I  thought  of  several  places,  — 
boarding-schools,  I  mean,  —  but  I  haven't 
decided.  There's  Arlington,  and  Exeter, 
and  a  school  where  some  of  Jane  Orr's 
friends  went.  Petrikin  Hall,  I  think,  is 
the  name." 

"Yes,  I've  had  several  young  friends  who 
went  there.  It  is  excellent  in  many  ways. 
What  do  you  wish  most  of  all,  Debby?" 

Debby  Alden  considered  well  before  re- 
plying. It  was  difficult  to  put  into  words 
what  she  wished  for  Hester. 

"I  wish  her  to  know  a  good  deal  about 
books,  but  I  don't  wish  her  to  get  the  idea 
that  they  are  the  best  and  only  things  in 


234     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

the  world.  I  wish  her  to  take  them  as 
incidentals  in  life,  not  as  the  chief  end  to 
be  attained."  She  looked  up  quickly  at 
her  companion.  Miss  Richards  could  not 
restrain  a  smile  at  Debby's  terseness.  "I 
understand  what  you  mean,  Debby.  What 
else?" 

"I  wish  a  school  where  she  will  be  taught 
that  high  ideals  and  doing  one's  duty  are 
worth  more  than  brains.  Now  I  admire 
bright  people,  Eva.  I'm  not  wishing  to 
detract  one  iota  from  those  who  have  great 
brain  power.  But  I  hold  that  there's  some- 
thing greater.  When  I  study  the  people 
who  were  brought  up  here,  whom  I've 
known  since  I  was  a  toddler,  I've  found  that 
it  isn't  always  the  smart,  brainy  ones  who 
have  accomplished  the  most  good.  I  wish 
Hester  to  know  about  books  and  to  be 
trained  how  to  use  them.  But  I  wish  her 
to  be  taught  to  be  honest  and  honorable, 
to  do  her  share  of  work  wherever  she  is,  and 
I  wish  her  to  have  her  own  ideas  about 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     235 

things,  and  not  to  do  so  and  so  because 
Jane  Brown  or  Jane  Smith  or  some  one  else 
has  done  it." 

"I  think  Petrikin  Hall  is  such  a  place. 
What  a  student  is  counts  there  for  more 
than  what  she  has.  They  pay  a  great  deal 
of  attention  to  manners,  though.  Girls 
are  trained  in  many  of  the  nice  little  ways 
observed  in  cultivated  society." 

"I  wish  Hester  to  be  well-mannered. 
I've  always  wished  her  to  be  like  you,  Eva. 
I  should  be  satisfied  if  she'd  be  another 
Miss  Richards." 

"I  hope  she  will  be  a  better,  stronger 
woman  than  I  have  been,"  was  the  reply. 
"But  I  have  not  wanted  in  the  effort, 
Debby.  I  think  I  have  made  of  Eva  Rich- 
ards as  much  as  Eva  Richards  could  be. 
But  Hester  is  stronger  both  physically 
and  mentally  than  I  have  been.  She  has 
a  strength  of  will  which  I  lacked."  She 
hesitated  just  a  moment,  and  then  looking 
into  her  friend's  face  continued,  "  You'll 


236     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

understand  me,  Debby,  I  think,  that  Hester 
must  belong  to  good  people.  You  have 
trained  her  well,  I  know.  But  all  the  train- 
ing in  the  world  would  not  eradicate  the 
traces  of  a  low  and  weak  people.  Blood 
will  tell,  and  Hester  shows  that  her  people 
were  honest  and  upright." 

Her  words,  in  place  of  pleasing  Debby 
Alden,  depressed  her  greatly.  She  was 
no  longer  worried,  but  distressed.  She  her- 
self firmly  believed  that  ancestry  spoke 
in  the  descendants.  But  with  what  she 
believed  she  knew  of  Hester's  people,  she 
was  ready  to  combat  such  an  idea.  "Non- 
sense, Eva.  Give  a  child  training,  and  you 
can  make  what  you  wish  of  it.  You  can  take 
a  puny,  dwarf  plant  and  develop  it  into  a 
giant  of  its  kind.  Why  not  with  children?" 

"But,  Debby,  you  cannot  cultivate  a 
thistle  until  it  becomes  a  rose,  nor  can  you 
convert  a  sour  apple  into  a  sweet  one.  I 
should  think  you  would  be  glad  to  believe 
such  a  theory,  for  with  Hester  the  kind  of 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     237 

a  girl  she  is,  you  might  take  it  for  granted 
that  her  people  were  the  best  in  the  land. 
But  let  us  return  to  the  school  question. 
Is  there  any  particular  line  of  work  you 
wish  Hester  to  take  up?" 

"I  had  not  thought  so  far.  I  have  been 
looking  at  the  money  side  of  the  question 
first.  I  can  let  her  finish  at  some  good 
school  without  denying  myself  too  much. 
After  that  will  be  time  enough  for  her  to 
consider  work  of  any  kind.  She  must 
learn  something,  Eva,  by  which  she  can 
provide  for  herself.  As  long  as  I  am  with 
her  there  will  be  enough  for  us  both,  but 
the  greater  part  of  my  income  dies  with 
me,  and  what  is  left  will  not  be  all  that 
Hester  needs.  So  I  intend  that  she  shall 
learn  something  that  will  keep  her  happy 
and  contented,  and  at  the  same  time  in- 
crease her  income." 

Debby  Alden  was  one  who  considered 
the  future  from  a  practical  standpoint. 
Yet  she  was  not  one  given  to  worry  and 


238     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

dim  forebodings.  She  did  take  thought 
for  the  morrow,  but  not  worrying,  distract- 
ing thought. 

"I've  been  perplexed  about  what  work 
to  have  her  undertake.  As  yet  she  has 
shown  no  particular  inclination  toward  any- 
thing. Not  that  she  is  idle.  She  is  never 
that.  She  helps  me  with  the  housework, 
and  does  her  share,  and  she  is  speedy  about 
it,  but  I  mean  that  she  showed  no  incli- 
nation toward  a  profession,  or  life-work. 
But,  of  course,  she's  young  yet." 

"  Perhaps  housework  and  home-making 
may  be  her  life-work.  She  may  have  a 
home  of  her  own,  Debby.  Indeed,  I 
think  it  is  very  possible,  for  Hester  is  surely 
an  attractive  and  lovable  girl.  And  if  she 
made  a  very  happy  home,  she  could  find  no 
nobler  profession." 

"I  don't  doubt  that,  but  it's  not  to  be 
for  Hester.  I  shall  never  allow  Hester  to 
marry.  She  must  never  be  allowed  to  get 
that  idea  in  her  head." 


THE   COMING   OF  HESTER     239 

"Why,  Debby!  I  am  surprised.  Of 
course  you  love  Hester,  and  we  do  not 
wonder  at  that.  It  is  natural  that  you 
should  wish  to  keep  her  with  you,  but  you 
may  not  always  be  with  her.  You  should 
think  of  her  loneliness  when  you  are  gone. 
Isn't  it  a  wee  bit  selfish,  Debby,  not  to 
wish  her  to  have  a  home  of  her  own?" 

"It  isn't  selfish.  It's  anything  but  that. 
But  Hester  must  live  as  you  and  I  have 
lived.  It  hasn't  been  a  lonely  life  for  me. 
The  days  are,  all  too  short,  and  even  if  it 
should  be  lonely,  there's  to  be  no  choice 
for  Hester.  She  must  be  Miss  Hester  Alden 
to  the  very  last  of  her  days." 

Miss  Richards  shook  her  head.  "I  do 
not  understand  you  to-day,  Debby.  You 
do  not  seem  like  yourself.  You  have 
strange  notions,  but  Hester  is  a  little  girl 
yet,  and  the  time  for  such  questions  is  a 
long  way  off." 

"But  the  proper  time  to  settle  some 
questions  is  before  they  ever  come  up. 


240     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

Never  by  any  word  must  Hester  be  given 
such  ideas.  If  she  should  talk  to  you  on 
such  matters,  —  I  know  the  young  girls 
come  to  you  with  half  their  worries,  —  I 
wish  you  to  discourage  her.  Don't  coun- 
tenance any  idea  of  sentiment  that  may 
come  to  her." 

"Very  well,  Debby,  if  you  think  best. 
Hester  belongs  to  you,  and  you  are  the 
one  to  decide  as  to  her  training.  I  shall 
not  allow  her  to  talk  to  me  on  some  subjects. 
I  do  that  out  of  respect  to  your  wishes, 
Debby,  yet  I  do  not  agree  with  you.  I 
would  not  think  too  much  about  Hester's 
future.  We  can  make  preparations  and 
do  our  planning,  yet  her  life  is  beyond  our 
control.  A  greater  power  will  put  to 
naught  our  work.  Plan  for  Hester's  school, 
and  forget  other  matters.  They  may 
never  be  for  you  or  me  to  decide." 

Debby  Alden  leaned  her  head  wearily 
back  upon  the  back  of  the  chair.  She  closed 
her  eyes,  and  for  a  time  sat  without  speak- 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     241 

ing.  By  nature  she  was  frank  and  open. 
The  Aldens  had  never  been  secretive. 
There  had  been  nothing  in  their  lives 
which  would  have  caused  them  to  blush 
had  it  been  heralded  to  the  world.  To 
know  that  which  a  friend  could  not  know, 
to  feel  that  there  was  one  thing  that  she 
had  not  told  because  of  shame  and  fear, 
had  hung  over  Debby  Alden  for  fifteen 
years.  When  she  thought  of  what  she 
was  concealing,  she  felt  like  a  criminal. 
Her  keeping  this  secret  and  rearing  Hester 
under  false  pretence  was  bearing  with  it 
its  own  compensation.  Her  friends  would 
misunderstand  and  misjudge  her  as  Eva 
Richards  was  doing  now;  and  as  time 
passed,  and  she  of  necessity  must  train 
Hester  as  she  knew  it  must  be,  she  would 
be  yet  more  misunderstood  and  reproached. 
For  the  first  time  she  longed  to  ease  her 
conscience  of  its  burden  and  rest  it  upon 
some  one  else,  if  but  for  a  moment.  She 
looked  up  at  her  friend.  Her  lips  quivered 


and  her  eyes  filled  with  tears,  but  she 
forced  them  back.  "I've  been  wanting 
to  tell  you  something,  Eva,"  she  said, 
"something  I've  known  for  fifteen  years, 
since  the  very  day  that  Hester's  mother 
came  to  my  home  and  asked  to  rest.  I've 
kept  it  a  secret  for  Hester's  sake.  I  know 
enough  of  the  child's  parentage  —  more 
than  any  one  has  ever  suspected  I  know  — 
to  feel  that  I  would  commit  a  crime  should 
I  allow  her  to  marry  one  whom  I  or  my 
friends  could  receive  into  their  homes.  It 
is  not  selfishness  in  me;  I  wish  to  protect 
and  guard  my  little  girl.  I  cannot  explain. 
Fve  carried  the  secret  for  fifteen  years,  and 
must  carry  it  all  the  rest  of  my  life." 

"Very  well,  Debby.  It  is  not  my  place 
to  judge  what  you  have  done.  Yet  I 
would  not  anticipate  the  future.  You  will 
do  as  you  have  always  done,  perform  each 
duty  faithfully  and  cheerfully.  You  can 
do  no  more.  Perhaps  it  is  well.  For 
Hester's  life  may  be  ordered  on  higher, 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     243 

broader  lines  than  it  is  given  to  us  to  con- 
template." 

She  laid  her  hand  upon  Debby's  bowed 
head.  There  was  silence  for  a  moment. 
Then  Miss  Richards,  with  a  sprightly,  viva- 
cious manner,  began  to  talk  of  other  matters. 
So  the  subject  of  Hester's  family  was  closed 
between  them,  and  never  reopened. 


CHAPTER   XII 

accident  which  occurred  during 
the  returning  skate  from  Hyner  was 
only  an  incident  in  the  lives  of  the  young 
people.  They  had  been  brought  up  by  the 
water,  and,  although  they  realized  its  dan- 
gers, they  also  enjoyed  hugely  the  recrea- 
tion and  sport  which  it  afforded  them.  The 
experience  caused  them  to  be  more  watch- 
ful, but  it  did  not  cause  one  to  be  fearful 
enough  to  keep  from  the  ice. 

The  winter  was  long  and  severe.  The 
skating  lasted  until  the  last  of  March. 
Along  the  river,  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
carry,  the  ice  swarmed  with  skaters.  At 
night  bonfires  were  built  alongshore,  torches 
were  carried,  and  the  sport  continued. 

The  girls  came  home  tired  but  happy. 
Their  muscles  grew  strong  and  flexible, 
and  the  rhythm  and  motion  of  skating  move- 

244 


THE  COMING  OF. HESTER     245 

ments  gave  a  new  grace  and  ease  to  them. 

One  Saturday  morning,  several  days  after 
Joel  Stout  had  returned  from  New  York, 
where  he  had  gone  to  tell  Herman  Loeb 
and  Will  Shearer  what  they  were  to  re- 
member, Hester  and  her  friends  started 
out  for  the  river.  The  ice  directly  op- 
posite the  Alden  home  had  been  in  con- 
stant use,  and  was  so  cut  up  that  it  was 
impossible  to  longer  skate  on  it.  On  this 
account,  the  girls  went  to  the  river  near  the 
west  end  of  the  town,  where  the  ice  had 
been  little  used. 

During  the  walk  through  town,  Janet 
had  been  fussing  and  grumbling  about  the 
condition  of  the  front  levers.  They  had 
not  been  at  all  satisfactory,  and  had  tripped 
her  several  times  the  previous  evening. 

"Your  soles  are  not  heavy  enough," 
said  Mary  Bowerman,  giving  a  quick  side- 
wise  glance  at  Janet's  slender,  shapely  foot. 
"It's  perfectly  silly  trying  to  skate  in  shoes 
several  sizes  too  small." 


246     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Janet  laughed.  Mary's  sharp  remarks 
merely  amused  her.  She  replied  to  her 
lightly.  "But  what  can  I  do  ?  They  are  the 
very  broadest  my  Cinderella  feet  can  wear." 

"My  front  levers  wouldn't  close  tight 
enough  either,"  said  Jane.  "I  screwed 
them  as  tight  as  I  could.  I  told  Ralphie, 
and  he  cut  off  part  of  the  screw.  It  took 
him  almost  an  hour,  but  my  skates  fit  nicely 
now.  If  you  would  tell  him  — " 

"I  will,  Jane.  I'd  give  a  farm  to  have 
a  pair  fit  as  they  should.  But  Ralph's 
changing  them  to-night  will  not  make  them 
fit  this  morning.  Why,  last  night,  every 
time  I'd  try  to  take  a  long  glide  and  lift 
my  foot,  there  would  be  my  skate  dangling 
from  the  heel  strap.  The  toe-lever  wouldn't 
hold  at  all.  The  only  way  I  could  skate 
was  to  take  little,  mincing  steps,  and  not 
lift  my  foot." 

"Use  a  strap  across  the  toe,"  said  Hester. 
"I  have  several  good  ones  at  home.  If 
I'd  thought,  I'd  have  brought  them." 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     247 

Janet  sighed,  and  then  looked  up  at 
them  with  woe  pictured  upon  her  face. 
"You  are  surely  the  most  sympathizing 
people.  There  have  been  two  suggestions 
for  making  those  miserable  skates" — she 
shook  them  fiercely  —  "stay  on,  but  neither 
plan  is  working  just  at  present.  I've  made 
up  my  mind  to  go  skating  and  do  some  of 
that  fancy  rolling.  I  think  it  looks  fine, 
and  I'll  do  it  if  I'm  compelled  to  strap  my 
skates  on  my  hand." 

"You  can  buy  straps,"  said  Edith.  "If 
they'll  make  the  matter  right,  why  not 
stop  in  the  store  and  buy  two  short  ones? 
They'll  not  cost  more  than  ten  cents 
apiece." 

Janet  stopped  and  looked  at  the  speaker. 

"Edith  Rank,"  she  said  with  mock 
gravity,  "do  you  realize  that  your  sug- 
gestion is  far  worse  than  either  of  the  others  ? 
It  can't  be  carried  out.  Besides  that,  it 
makes  me  acknowledge  my  financial  con- 
dition in  the  world.  I  haven't  a  penny 


248     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

with  me.  How  can  I  buy  two  straps  even 
at  the  ridiculously  low  rate  of  ten  cents 
each?" 

Janet  was  always  looked  upon  as  the 
humorous  girl  of  the  crowd.  Such  was 
her  reputation,  and  her  slightest  remark 
was  accepted  as  funny,  and  called  forth 
either  smiles  or  laughter.  The  girls  laughed 
now.  Janet  looked  annoyed. 

"It's  true,"  she  exclaimed.  "I  am 
financially  embarrassed  —  I  haven't  a 
penny  with  me,  and  allowance  day  is  a 
week  distant." 

"Then  allow  me,"  said  Hester,  present- 
ing her  purse.  "Help  yourself,  Janet. 
But  I'm  sure  you'll  not  find  more  than  fifty 
cents  in  it." 

Janet  did  not  hesitate  to  accept  the  offer. 

"How  good  you  are,  Hester.  You've 
made  me  happy  for  the  morning,  provided 
I  can  get  the  straps  at  Stout's,  and  they 
work  as  you  say  they  will.  Come,  let  us 
turn  down  Fourth  Street,  and  the  store  will 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     249 

be  right  on  our  way.  We  can  get  on  the 
ice  from  Fourth  as  well  as  Fifth  Street." 

As  usual,  Abner  Stout's  clerks  were  busy. 
The  girls  made  their  way  to  the  depart- 
ment where  the  straps  would  likely  be. 
Hester  and  Janet  were  in  advance.  Abner 
was  waiting  upon  a  customer  when  the 
girls  came  in.  The  moment  his  glance 
rested  upon  them,  he  turned  and  spoke  in 
an  undertone  to  his  daughter  Mary. 

The  girl  made  no  response.  She  did 
not  raise  her  eyes  toward  the  group  of  girls 
by  the  counter,  but  silently  and  quickly 
left  the  store  and  went  in  the  direction  of 
the  kitchen. 

She  was  gone  but  a  few  moments  when 
Jane  stuck  her  head  through  the  doorway, 
glanced  about  her,  and  then,  coming  up 
to  her  brother-in-law,  said  plaintively, — 

"  Abner,  hain't  you  cut  me  off  that  cheese 
yet?" 

Abner  was  slow  to  answer,  so  Jane  walked 
across  the  room  to  the  front  of  the  counter. 


250     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

This  brought  her  face  to  face  with  Hester. 
She  gave  a  sudden  cry,  threw  her  apron 
over  her  face,  and  began  swaying  her  body 
to  and  fro  as  though  overcome  by  sudden 
and  intense  grief.  The  attention  of  cus- 
tomers and  clerks  was  attracted  to  her. 
Hester  and  Jane  drew  back,  uncertain  what 
to  do.  The  people  who  were  buying  in  the 
front  of  the  store  hurried  back  to  know 
the  cause  of  the  trouble. 

Jane  swayed  back  and  forth,  her  face 
hidden  by  the  blue-checked  gingham  apron, 
and  all  the  while  she  gave  a  peculiar  cry  of 
distress. 

"What  is  ever  the  matter  with  the 
woman?"  cried  Abner  in  well-feigned  alarm, 
as  he  hurriedly  came  from  behind  the 
counter.  "I  never  knew  her  to  carry  on 
so.  She's  quiet  and  peaceful,  Jane  is." 

He  laid  his  hand  upon  her  shoulder. 
"Jane,  look  here!  What's  the  trouble 
with  you?  What  ails  you?  You  act  as 
though  you  were  crazy.  Go  on  in  the 


house,  and  don't  raise  such  a  fuss.  Mary 
can  take  care  of  you  if  you  are  ill." 

He  had  one  hand  on  her  shoulder,  and 
with  the  other  he  drew  away  the  apron 
from  her  face.  She  shrieked,  and  her  body 
shook  with  sobs,  but  the  eyes  which  she 
raised  to  meet  Abner  Stout's  glance  were 
quite  dry. 

"What's  ailin'  you,  Jane?"  he  repeated. 
"What  do  you  mean  by  scaring  customers 
into  fits  until  they  shake  as  though  they 
had  the  ague?  If  you're  sick,  go  back  into 
the  house,  and  Mary  will  see  to  you." 

At  this  Jane  yelled  and  shrieked  louder 
than  before. 

"Ails  me?  What's  been  ailin'  you 
right  along  ?  What's  been  the  matter  with 
your  eyes?  You've  all  been  blind  as  bats. 
Can't  you  see  Eliza's  child?  She  looks 
just  like  Eliza  when  we  used  to  play  to- 
gether —  before  you  ever  met  her,  Abner." 

She  raised  herself  and  pointed  to  the 
girls,  who,  absorbed  in  what  was  going  on, 


252     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

were  wholly  unconscious  of  their  own  con- 
spicuous position,  quite  at  the  front  of  the 
crowd  of  shoppers. 

At  these  words  Abner  raised  his  eyes 
and  looked  at  the  girls.  He  gave  a  hasty 
glance,  and  then,  leaning  forward,  stared 
at  Hester. 

"Land  of  love!"  he  cried.  "Jane,  I 
believe  you're  right.  Never  was  there  such 
a  likeness.  It's  Eliza  herself  come  back 
to  me."  Then  he  pressed  his  thin  lips 
together,  clasped  his  hands  as  though  with 
a  mighty  effort  he  was  controlling  him- 
self, and  all  the  while  kept  his  eyes  upon 
Hester  as  if  he  could  not  remove  them. 

Customers  came  in,  and,  attracted  by  the 
cries  and  the  crowd,  pushed  forward.  The 
main  aisle  of  the  store  was  jammed.  Hester 
and  Jane  looked  about  them,  eager  to  es- 
cape. But  behind  them  was  a  crowd  of 
people  so  closely  packed  in  that  a  passage 
among  them  would  have  been  impossible, 
while  before  them  stood  the  figures  of  the 


THE  COMING   OF   HESTER     253 

old  man  and  his  sister-in-law,  swaying 
their  bodies  and  gazing  upon  Hester  as 
though  she  had  hypnotized  them. 

Janet's  mind  was  upon  her  skating. 
She  was  growing  impatient  of  this  delay. 
She  looked  about  her,  hoping  to  find  some 
means  of  escape,  but  every  thoroughfare 
was  closed.  She  sighed  and  turned  to 
Hester  with  the  remark,  "Oh,  had  I  the 
wings  of  a  dove !  "  She  looked  over  the 
heads  of  the  people  as  though  selecting  a 
course  to  follow,  should  her  wish  come  true. 
The  remark  was  so  like  Janet.  Hester 
laughed  aloud.  At  this  Jane  Farwell  gave 
forth  a  louder  shriek.  "Did  you  see  that 
smile  —  that  heavenly  smile?  It  was  just 
like  poor  Eliza  used  to  smile.  Abner,  how 
dull  you've  been  not  to  know  your  own 
little  Ruth." 

"Lord!  I  believe  you're  right,  Jane. 
It's  Ruth,  sure  enough.  There's  no  mis- 
take about  that." 

They  came  close  to  the  girls,  who  tried 


254     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

to  push  back,  but  could  not  for  the  pressing 
crowd.  The  man  came  close,  and  bending 
his  body  stuck  his  face  close  up  into  Hester's. 
She  gave  a  gesture  of  repulsion  and  drew 
herself  back. 

" How  dare  you!"  she  cried.  "Let  us 
get  out  of  here." 

"How  dare  I?  Listen  to  her,"  he  cried 
brokenly,  as  though  his  finer  feelings  had 
been  touched  by  her  words.  "How  dares 
a  father  look  on  the  face  of  his  long-lost 
child?  It  grieves  me  to  hear  you  speak  so. 
I'm  your  father,  child.  You  are  the  little 
Ruth  Stout  who  was  lost  sixteen  years  ago. 
Thank  God,  I've  found  you  at  last." 

"Nonsense!  I'm  Hester  Alden.  Will 
you  let  us  pass?"  She  spoke  with  dignity 
and  decision,  but  even  as  she  did  so  her 
heart  failed  her.  She  was  not  really  Hester 
Alden.  Dim  forebodings  seized  her  that 
she  might  be  this  Ruth  that  some  place 
and  at  some  time  had  been  lost.  When 
this  thought  came  to  her,  she  showed  the 


"How  DARE  YOU!"  SHE  CRIED.  —  Page  254- 


THE   COMING   OF   HESTER     255 

spirit  that  Debby  Alden  would  have  shown 
under  similar  circumstances.  If  there  were 
truth  to  be  known,  she  wished  to  know  it 
all.  She  would  not  push  the  issue  aside. 
She  would  know  the  best  or  the  worst,  and 
know  it  at  once.  She  did  not  flinch  now. 
The  color  left  her  cheek.  She  drew  herself 
as  far  as  possible  from  the  revolting  features 
of  the  old  man.  But  she  waited.  Janet 
slipped  her  hand  into  Hester's  and  whis- 
pered: "Come,  let's  push  back  through  the 
crowd.  There's  a  jam,  but  we'll  be  able 
to  make  our  way  through  if  we  keep  at  it." 

Hester  shook  her  head  in  negation.  She 
had  no  desire  to  leave  now.  She  wished 
to  hear  what  Abner  Stout  had  to  say. 
Janet  could  not  have  dragged  her  from  the 
place. 

The  man  had  not  been  in  business  with 
all  sorts  and  conditions  of  folk  for  forty  years 
without  reading  the  girl's  expression.  He 
knew  what  she  feared.  He  knew,  too, 
that  it  would  not  be  Debby  Alden  alone 


256     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

with  whom  he  would  have  to  contend. 
Hester  would  be  more  difficult  to  manage 
than  the  elder  woman.  He  read  in  her 
face  the  dislike  for  him  and  the  antipathy 
toward  his  family.  But  this  did  not  deter 
him.  He  chuckled  at  her  assertion  that 
she  was  Hester  Alden.  "So  you  think, 
Ruth,  my  dear  child.  But,  I  swear  you 
belong  to  me.  I  might  have  known  before. 
Every  time  you  came  into  the  store  I  could 
not  take  my  eyes  from  you.  I  couldn't 
understand.  It  was  nature.  Flesh  and 
blood  was  calling  to  its  own.  Jane  knew 
you  the  minute  she  clapped  her  eyes  on  you. 
It's  strange  how  things  come  around.  I'd 
just  about  given  up  hope  of  ever  finding 
you,  and  here  Jane's  eyes  light  on  you  the 
first  thing.  It's  great  how  things  do  come 
around." 

"Fifteen  years.  Yes,  it  was,"  wailed  the 
old  woman.  "I  know  the  day.  Can  lever 
forget  it  ?  It  was  the  fourth  day  of  June, 
and  poor  Eliza  was  all  wrought  up  and  mad 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     257 

at  Abner  for  something  he  had  said,  and 
off  she  starts  with  Ruth." 

Abner  affirmed  her  words  with  nods  and 
gestures.  He  had  seized  Hester's  plump 
hand  within  his  bony  talons.  She  made 
an  effort  to  withdraw  it  from  his  grasp,  but 
he  clung  tightly  to  her. 

"  Just  fifteen  years  last  June,"  he  repeated, 
"'Liza  went  through  this  place  on  her  way 
to  Chicago,  with  little  Ruth  just  a  year  old." 

Jane  had  come  closer  and  laid  her  worn, 
wrinkled  hand  upon  Hester's  arm.  The 
woman  was  old  and  infirm,  but  age  had 
not  glorified  her.  She  was  repulsive.  The 
girls  instinctively  shrank  from  her.  She 
whimpered  and  cringed.  "  'Liza's  little  girl," 
she  began,  looking  up  into  Hester's  face 
with  a  look  meant  to  be  compassionate 
and  loving,  but  which  was  sly  and  insinuat- 
ing. 

"My  poor,  poor  sister  Eliza,"  she  whined. 
"How  we  did  love  each  other,  and  how  dear 
her  babies  were  to  me.  But  little  Ruthie 


258     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

was  dearest  of  all.  The  dear  little  child! 
How  I've  been  worried  all  these  years 
wondering  where  you  were  and  if  you  were 
provided  for.  I  never  could  relish  my 
meals,  thinking  all  the  time  that  mebbe 
my  sister  and  her  baby  were  going  hungry. 
How  I've  longed  to  see  her  and  her  child 
no  one  knows." 

She  came  nearer  to  the  girl,  and  sticking 
her  face  up  close  said  with  assumed  tender- 
ness: "You're  my  only  sister's  little  girl. 
Come,  give  a  loving  kiss  to  your  poor  Aunt 
Jane." 

Hester  gave  a  gasp  of  horror  and  pushed 
the  woman  away.  "How  dare  you!  Will 
you  move  away  and  allow  us  to  pass?" 

Her  voice  was  strong  and  fearless  enough, 
but  her  courage  went  no  further  than  this. 
Her  knees  were  shaking,  and  her  muscles 
refused  to  obey  her  will.  She  stood  still, 
unable  to  move.  She  might  have  fallen 
had  not  Janet's  grasp  been  upon  her  and 
Janet's  arm  about  her  waist. 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     259 

At  this  the  curious  crowd  back  of  them 
parted,  and  Doctor  Heins  pushed  his  way 
through.  Taking  hold  of  Janet  and  Hester, 
he  turned  them  about  and  helped  them  to 
make  their  way  through  the  crowd.  But 
as  he  left  he  turned  to  Abner  Stout  and  said 
with  energy:  — 

"Let  this  happen  again,  Ab,  and  I'll  see  to 
it  that  you  get  your  just  reward  !  It's  out- 
rageous !  This  heaping  insults  upon  two 
people  who  cannot  protect  themselves!" 

With  as  little  commotion  as  possible  he 
escorted  the  girls  from  the  store  and  on 
to  the  street.  "  Hester  and  Janet  are  not 
going  to  skate  this  morning,"  he  said  to 
the  others  of  the  party.  "I  wish  to  talk 
with  them.  They'll  walk  down  the  street 
with  me." 

Without  more  ado  he  escorted  the  girls 
down  a  street  leading  from  the  skating 
place.  When  they  came  to  a  less  crowded 
thoroughfare,  where  conversation  was  pos- 
sible, he  turned  to  Hester.  "Now  tell 


260     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

me  how  that  fuss  began  and  all  that  old 
skinflint  said  to  you." 

Hester  began  her  story.  She  was  not 
excited  or  nervous  now,  but  a  great  depres- 
sion was  upon  her.  She  would  have  laughed 
at  the  scene  had  she  not  felt  that  truth 
lay  in  the  man's  speech.  If  she  were  his 
daughter,  if  she  belonged  to  him,  he  would 
claim  her.  She  shuddered  at  the  thought. 
If  Abner  Stout  were  her  father,  he  would 
compel  her  to  live  in  his  home.  Joel  would 
be  her  brother,  and  the  girls,  —  the  thought 
was  revolting.  From  the  innermost  fibre 
of  her  composition  she  loathed  all  that  this 
family  stood  for;  their  chicanery,  their 
greed,  their  cringing  and  fawning,  their 
disorder  of  household,  and  carelessness  of 
attire.  They  knew  neither  truth  nor  friend- 
ship if  the  betrayal  of  either  might  add  a 
penny  to  their  hoard.  And  she,  Hester 
Alden,  belonged  to  them  and  would  be  com- 
pelled to  live  with  them  and  make  their 
interests  hers! 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     261 

She  began  to  tremble.  In  the  middle 
of  her  story  she  flung  her  arms  about  the 
old  doctor's  and  cried,  "  You'll  never  let 
them  take  me,  will  you?" 

He  answered  her  promptly  and  with  con- 
viction. "  Never,  Hester.  I'll  abduct  you 
first  myself  rather  than  let  that  villain  take 
you.  But  there  is  no  danger.  He's  a 
subtle  one.  I  don't  quite  see  his  purpose 
now,  but  it  will  be  clear  later.  Come  into 
my  office.  The  street  is  not  a  good  place 
for  tears.  I  must  hear  the  remainder  of 
the  story,  and  you  must  dry  those  tears. 
You  do  not  wish  to  frighten  Aunt  Debby 
with  such  a  woe-begone  countenance." 

He  led  the  girls  into  his  private  office. 
He  spoke  lightly  to  reassure  them.  Yet 
he  was  not  satisfied  with  what  he  had  heard. 
He  knew  that  Abner  Stout  was  keen  and 
crafty.  He  knew  that  the  man  would  not 
have  caused  such  a  scene  unless  he  felt 
secure  in  proving  his  statement  and  main- 
taining the  position  which  he  had  assumed. 


262     THE   COMING   OF   HESTER 

But  why  should  he  wish  to  claim  a  child 
who  had  no  money  nor  estate  ?  The  reason 
might  be  that  parental  affection  had  as- 
serted itself,  but  Doctor  Heins  did  not 
give  the  man  credit  for  such  feeling.  He 
felt  that  Abner  Stout  loved  nothing  so 
much  as  he  did  the  circles  of  silver  and 
gold  which  poured  into  his  till,  and  to  his 
ear  no  music  was  so  sweet  as  the  jingle  of 
the  silver  as  he  tested  its  genuineness  with 
a  toss  upon  the  counter. 

Doctor  Heins  heard  the  story.  He 
laughed  and  made  light  of  it  to  encourage 
Hester  and  Janet,  and  kept  the  girls  with 
him  until  they  had  recovered  their  usual 
composure.  Then  he  dismissed  them  with 
the  advice  to  Hester:  "I  believe,  Hessie, 
I  wouldn't  bother  your  Aunt  Debby  with 
that  man's  story.  He  may  forget  it  in  a 
day  or  two,  but  if  he  shouldn't  and  should 
bother  either  of  you,  come  to  me.  I'll 
send  him  to  the  right-about." 

"You'll  never  let  him  take  me?" 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     263 

"Never."  Doctor  Hems  laughed  with  as- 
sumed gay  spirits,  squared  his  shoulders, 
and  said  with  an  air  of  bravado:  "Like 
the  hero  in  the  dime  novel,  Hessie,  I  shall 
allow  him  to  take  you  over  my  dead  body. 
There !  run  home,  girls !  I've  patients 
awaiting  me." 

Doctor  Heins  had  learned  one  fact  from 
hearing  the  story.  Hester  knew  then  that 
she  was  not  an  Alden,  and  did  not  belong 
to  her  Aunt  Debby. 

Janet,  whose  principle  was  not  to  desert 
a  friend  when  that  friend  was  in  need, 
walked  with  Hester  the  entire  distance 
home.  When  they  came  to  the  railroad 
crossing,  Hester  paused. 

"My  mother  was  killed  here,"  she  said 
quietly.  "Do  you  think,  Janet,  that  she 
was  that  man's  wife  —  that  Jane's  sister  ? " 

"Never!"  said  Janet  with  conviction. 
"Any  one  to  look  at  you  could  see  that 
you  were  not  of  such  a  family.  It's  so 
ridiculous  that  I  can't  keep  from  laughing." 


264     THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

At  this  she  forced  a  laugh  more  noticeable 
for  its  volume  than  any  suggestion  of  light 
spirits. 

"But  my  hair  is  dark  and  wavy  — " 
began  Hester,  determined  to  probe  the  mat- 
ter to  the  furthest. 

"So  is  mine  —  much  curlier  than  yours, 
and  about  as  black.  But  that's  no  reason 
for  saying  that  I  belong  to  them.  I  defy 
any  one  to  tell  me  that  I  do." 

Her  voice  was  so  determined  and  her 
manner  so  aggressive  that  Hester  smiled 
in  spite  of  her  grief.  Janet  continued  her 
nonsense,  turning  into  ridicule  Hester's 
fears,  until  they  reached  the  Alden  home. 
Hester  was  so  much  herself  that  Debby 
did  not  perceive  that  anything  had  gone 
wrong. 

She  inquired  why  they  had  not  gone 
skating.  Janet  began  her  story  of  the  skates 
which  would  not  hold  fast  to  the  soles  of 
her  shoes.  Debby  Alden  listened.  With 
all  her  astuteness  she  did  not  perceive  that 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     265 

Janet  had  not  answered  the  question  which 
she  had  put  directly  to  them. 

Janet  spent  the  entire  day  with  Hester. 
When  she  saw  the  troubled  look  come  to 
her  friend's  eyes,  she  grew  merry  and  gay. 
There  was  no  rest  for  Hester  that  day. 
Janet  kept  her  playing,  or  singing,  or  on  a 
hunt  for  eggs,  or  a  search  for  pansies  in 
the  flower  bed  which  had  been  covered  with 
straw  and  boards.  Now  Janet  knew  more 
of  Hester's  story  than  Mary  Bowerman 
did,  but  a  sense  of  honor  was  within  her. 
She  would  not  by  so  much  as  a  look  let 
Hester  suspect  that  she  knew  aught  of  her 
history. 

After  Doctor  Heins  had  escorted  the  girls 
from  the  store,  the  crowd  went  about  its 
own  affairs.  Jane  disappeared  into  the 
basement  kitchen,  and  made  up  her  savory 
messes  as  serenely  as  though  she  had  not 
found  the  child  of  her  dearly  beloved  sister. 
Abner  went  back  to  the  counter  and  dis- 
posed of  bargains  all  day  long  and  far  into 


266     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

the  night.  So  far  as  they  were  concerned, 
all  interest  in  Eliza  and  her  child  had  gone 
from  their  minds. 

But  those  who  had  made  up  the  crowd 
had  seen  and  heard.  The  incident  had 
been  too  unusual  not  to  cause  comment. 
It  was  discussed  in  many  homes  that 
evening.  Hester  Alden's  history  was  well 
known.  There  was  much  discussion  as  to 
whether  she  was  Abner  Stout's  daughter. 
But  all  advanced  this  question  to  substan- 
tiate his  claims;  if  she  were  not  his,  why 
should  the  money-loving,  greedy  old  man 
wish  to  claim  a  penniless  girl?  It  would 
mean  but  expense  and  responsibility  to 
him.  This  view  of  the  question  caused 
many  to  believe  that  he  was  honest  in  his 
words,  and  that  the  scene  of  the  morning 
was  unplanned  and  natural.  But  the  con- 
versation between  Abner  and  his  son  Joel, 
which  took  place  that  same  night  after  the 
store  had  closed,  and  Jane  and  the  girls  were 
deep  in  slumber,  was  a  key  to  the  problem. 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     267 

A  smirk  of  satisfaction  was  upon  the  face 
of  the  elder  man.  He  rubbed  his  hands 
together  and  chuckled  gleefully.  The  re- 
sults of  the  morning's  work  pleased  him. 
The  ability  which  Joel  had  shown  in  this 
affair  was  highly  gratifying  to  him.  Joel 
was  shrewd;  Joel  was  to  be  depended 
upon;  Joel  knew  when  to  speak  and  when 
to  be  silent.  The  father  thought  of  these 
matters  and  looked  with  favor  upon  the 
oldest  child. 

"Come,"  he  said  ingratiatingly.  "Come, 
sit  awhile  and  talk.  I  mean  to  take  you  into 
the  business,  Joel.  You've  been  a  good 
son.  I'll  change  the  sign.  I  will  have  it 
read  in  big  gold  letters,  "Abner  Stout  and 
Company." 

But  Joel  would  have  none  of  that.  "No 
company  for  me,  father.  So  help  me,  no. 
It's  Stout  and  Stout  —  full  and  equal. 
Herman  Loeb  has  promised  me — " 

Abner  waved  his  words  aside. 

"Stout  and  Stout  it  shall  be,  Joel.    No 


268     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

matter.  All  I  have  will  be  yours  some  day. 
But  about — ?"  He  looked  wise  and 
rubbed  his  hands.  "You're  sure,  my  son?" 

"Sure,  father.  I  went  to  the  house 
myself."  Abner  had  heard  the  story  be- 
fore, but  the  sounds  of  the  words  were  as 
music  to  his  ears.  Joel  described  again 
the  magnificent  house  with  its  acres  of 
lawn,  and  the  fine  carriages  with  men  in 
livery. 

"And  what  did  you  say,  Joel?"  asked 
Abner. 

"I  told  them  I  lived  on  the  East  Side. 
I  gave  Herman's  address.  I  told  them 
about  finding  the  old  newspaper."  He 
made  a  queer  little  gesture  with  his  hand. 
"They  thought  it  was  but  lately  I  found  it." 

"Fifteen  years  ago  —  fifteen  years  ago. 
Eliza,  sorting  rags  and  paper,  ran  across  it. 
I  put  it  aside  —  no  one  can  tell,  Joel,  when 
such  things  come  in  good.  Keep  a  thing 
seven  years,  you  know." 

"I  told  the  woman  I  thought  I  knew  of 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     269 

the  child  —  a  relative  of  mine  had  adopted 
her  and  had  brought  her  up  like  a  lady. 
I'd  search  for  him  —  I  had  lost  track  of 
him  —  and  I'd  come  to  her  with  the  child." 

"And  she  —  she?"  Abner  leaned  eagerly 
forward. 

"She  said  if  I  came  with  the  child  and 
with  the  proofs,  she  would  give  me  ten 
thousand  dollars  cash." 

Abner  smacked  his  lips.  A  smirk  of 
satisfaction  spread  over  his  face. 

He  took  from  his  wallet  a  dirty,  greasy 
cutting  from  a  newspaper.  His  eyes 
glinted  with  joy  as  he  read.  It  was  an 
advertisement,  fifteen  years  old,  offering 
a  large  reward  for  information  concerning 
a  woman  named  Rosa  Williams.  Then 
followed  a  description  of  the  woman's  ap- 
pearance, dress,  and  the  time  and  place 
where  she  was  last  known  to  be. 


CHAPTER   XIII 

T  TESTER  had  regained  thorough  control 
-L -L  of  herself  by  the  time  she  went  to 
school  Monday  morning.  She  realized  that 
a  number  of  people  had  witnessed  the  scene 
in  the  store  Saturday  morning,  and  that  the 
whole  town  had  heard  it  by  this  time.  She 
felt  that  Miss  Watson  treated  her  with  a 
greater  kindness  than  ever  before  —  the 
woman's  way  of  expressing  a  silent  sym- 
pathy. Since  the  encounter  between  them 
in  the  early  fall,  Hester  had  kept  as  far  as 
possible  from  Professor  Sanderson.  For- 
tunately she  was  in  none  of  his  classes,  and 
never  came  directly  under  his  authority, 
so  outward  harmony  at  least  had  been 
maintained. 

But  this  Monday  morning,  as  he  came 
into  the  assembly-room  to  take  part  in  the 
devotional  exercises,  she  felt  that  he  was 

270 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     271 

making  a  study  of  her.  His  eyes  were  upon 
her  with  a  critical,  uncertain  expression. 
"He's  trying  to  see  if  I  resemble  the  Stout 
family/'  she  said  to  herself,  and  her  face 
flushed  crimson. 

Janet  Collum  and  Jane  Orr,  during 
Hester's  troubles,  maintained  the  letter 
and  the  spirit  of  true  friendship.  They 
walked  home  with  Hester,  they  gave  her 
choice  in  the  selection  of  the  library  books, 
and  by  every  power  in  their  means,  except 
the  power  of  words,  they  made  her  feel 
that  she  would  always  be  one  of  them  and 
that  their  love  and  friendship  were  about 
her  now,  stronger  and  more  disinterested 
than  ever. 

Orpha  was  too  dull  of  perception,  too 
lacking  in  those  finer  feelings  to  realize  what 
these  days  meant  to  Hester.  She  would 
have  been  willing  to  do  what  she  could,  had 
she  been  able  to  realize  one  part  of  what  a 
sensitive,  proud  nature  might  feel  in  know- 
ing that  she  was  the  subject  of  discussion 


272     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

throughout  the  town,  but  Orpha  knew 
nothing  of  such  feeling. 

Tuesday  afternoon  Miss  Watson  sent 
Hester  on  an  errand  to  the  library.  There 
was  a  reference  to  be  looked  up,  and  Hester 
Alden  was  a  reliable  person  to  send  forth  in 
search  of  technical  information.  She  had 
taken  her  tablet  with  her  and  was  about 
finishing  a  copy  of  the  distinction  between 
synonyms  when  Professor  Sanderson  came 
into  the  room.  He  nodded  curtly  to  the 
girl,  went  over  to  the  bookcases,  and  began 
his  search.  He  looked  up  suddenly  to 
address  her.  "Let  me  offer  my  congratu- 
lations, Miss  Alden." 

"Congratulations!"  she  repeated,  look- 
ing up  in  surprise.  "I  do  not  quite  under- 
stand." 

He  laughed.  "I  think  you  would  if 
you'd  consider.  Of  course,  we've  all  heard 
the  news.  You  are  a  fortunate  young  lady, 
and  will  be  quite  an  heiress  when  Abner 
Stout  is  called  to  his  fathers.  They  say 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     273 

that  he's  worth  a  million  now,  and  is  still 
collecting." 

"His  money  is  nothing  to  me.  I  care  not 
how  many  millions  he  has."  She  closed 
the  book  and  walked  to  the  door.  She 
had  no  wish  to  talk  with  Professor  Sander- 
son on  any  subject,  and  this  one  least  of  all. 

"It  will  be.  If  you're  his  daughter,  as 
he  says  you  are,  you'll  have  your  share. 
I've  never  known  any  one  yet  who  refused 
a  hundred  thousand  dollars.  You  are  very 
fortunate." 

Hester  left  the  room  without  replying. 

"I'd  rather  have  Aunt  Debby,  and  belong 
to  her  and  her  people,  than  to  have  ten 
millions  of  dollars,"  she  said  to  herself. 
"There  wouldn't  be  money  enough  in  the 
world  to  make  up  for  leaving  her.  And  I 
will  not.  I  do  not  know  what  I'll  do,  but 
I'll  not  leave  her  unless  they  chain  me  and 
drag  me  away." 

That  thought  comforted  her.  She  straight- 
ened out  her  shoulders  and  raised  her  head 


274     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

as  she  entered  the  class  room.  She  had  no 
intention  of  letting  all  the  school  world 
know  that  she  was  worried  and  sorrowful. 
She  would  keep  her  affairs  to  herself,  and 
smile  and  appear  as  happy  as  she  could. 
She  had  her  Aunt  Debby's  pride  in  her. 

It  was  toward  the  last  of  the  week  when 
her  hope  and  her  courage  had  revived  that 
she  found  a  letter  for  her  Aunt  Debby  among 
the  mail.  This  was  nothing  unusual  in 
itself,  but  it  set  her  heart  to  beating  rapidly, 
for  the  envelope  bore  the  business  card  of 
Abner  Stout.  It  had  been  her  habit  to 
stop  for  the  mail  on  the  way  from  school, 
as  she  did  this  day. 

The  evening  meal  was  ready  to  be  served 
when  she  entered  the  house,  and  her  Aunt 
Debby  was  awaiting  her. 

"There's  letters,  auntie,"  she  said,  placing 
them  in  Debby  Alden's  hand. 

Debby  glanced  at  them,  smiling.  "  Noth- 
ing important,"  she  said.  "I'll  not  bother 
reading  them  now.  Come,  Hester,  while 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     275 

your  meat  is  hot.  I  have  a  veal  loaf.  I 
remembered  that  you  like  that  new  recipe 
I  tried." 

"I  think  I  like  everything  you  try,  Aunt 
Debby,"  she  said  simply  as  she  sat  down  to 
the  table.  Debby  Alden  smiled.  These  ex- 
pressions of  affection  from  Hester  pleased 
her. 

"Do  you,  Hester?"  she  said.  "I'm 
very  glad  you  do.  It  wouldn't  be  a  pleas- 
ant life  for  either  of  us  if  we  did  not  like 
what  each  other  did." 

She  served  the  meal,  ate  a  little,  and  then 
took  up  the  letters  which  had  been  lying 
beside  her  plate.  She  read  the  business 
heading  and  smiled  grimly.  "What  is 
Abner  Stout  writing  to  me  for?  I  owe 
him  no  bills." 

Hester's  eyes  sought  her  plate.  She 
made  a  brave  attempt  to  continue  her  eat- 
ing, that  her  aunt  might  not  observe  her 
perturbation.  Debby  opened  the  note,  read 
it,  and  laughed.  Laying  the  letter  aside, 


276     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

she  said  lightly,  "Mr.  Stout  wishes  to  see 
me  on  business  of  great  importance,  and 
asks  me  to  call  at  his  store  to-morrow 
afternoon." 

"Will  you  go,  Aunt  Debby?"  Hester's 
eyes  were  big  with  alarm.  He  meant  to 
tell  her  Aunt  Debby.  They  meant  to  take 
her  if  they  could.  "But  I  will  not  go. 
They  cannot  make  me,"  was  her  thought. 

Debby  Alden  had  no  suspicion  of  what 
that  business  could  be.  She  looked  at 
Hester  and  smiled  grimly.  "Hessie,  your 
Aunt  Debby  has  not  spent  years  studying 
her  Caesar  without  learning  something.  Do 
you  remember  the  reply  that  Ariovistus, 
the  German  king,  gave  to  Caesar  when  the 
latter  bade  him  come  to  the  Roman  camp?" 

Hester  shook  her  head.  She  could  not 
at  that  moment  have  said  her  letters,  had 
she  been  asked. 

"Forgotten  already,  Hessie?  His  reply 
was,  '  If  Ariovistus  wishes  anything  of  Caesar, 
he  will  go  to  Caesar;  should  Caesar  desire 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     277 

anything  of  Ariovistus,  let  him  go  to  Ario- 
vistus.'  So,  if  Abner  Stout  wishes  to  talk 
with  Debby  Alden  on  business,  he  must 
come  to  Debby  Alden." 

She  looked  at  Hester  and  smiled.  Then, 
noticing  the  child's  worn,  harassed  look, 
she  said :  — 

"You  haven't  eaten  enough,  Hester. 
Are  you  ill?  Try  to  eat  your  veal  loaf. 
Put  this  hot  gravy  on  it.  I'm  afraid  that 
high  school  work  is  too  much  for  you,  Hes- 
ter. I've  thought  so  all  along.  I  have 
never  looked  with  favor  upon  third  and 
fourth  floor  schoolrooms.  Three  and  four 
long  flights  of  stairs  will  not  add  to  the 
health  of  young  girls.  I've  told  you  about 
going  slowly.  Are  you  sure  you  do  not 
run  up  and  down  ?  Do  you  take  the  trouble 
to  put  your  feet  on  the  steps,  as  I  told 
you?" 

"'Most  always,  Aunt  Debby.  Sometimes 
I  forget  and  go  in  a  hurry." 

"Well,  I've  made  up  my  mind  that  this 


278     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

shall  be  your  last  year  at  the  high  school. 
You've  never  been  away.  It  will  do  you 
worlds  of  good.  I  intend  sending  you  to  a 
boarding-school  next  winter." 

But  this,  instead  of  pleasing  Hester,  as 
Debby  Alden  supposed  it  would,  caused  her 
great  alarm. 

"Aunt  Debby,  don't  ever  send  me  from 
you.  I'd  rather  be  with  you  than  know 
all  the  books  that  were  ever  printed.  You 
will  not  send  me  away?" 

"I  thought  you  would  enjoy  it,  Hester. 
I've  been  planning  all  winter.  Girls  have 
lovely  times  at. boarding-schools.  I  thought 
you  would  like  it." 

"I  should  like  the  boarding-school  well 
enough  and  the  study,  too;  but  it  would 
mean  leaving  you,  and  I  don't  like  that." 

"Well,  since  you  feel  so  about  it,  I  shall 
not  insist,  but,  -  "  after  a  moment's  thought, 
—  "we  both  need  a  change.  I've  kept 
house  for  almost  thirty  years.  It  may  do 
me  good  to  go  away  for  a  while.  We'll 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     279 

think  the  matter  over,  Hester,  during  the 
summer.  There  will  be  time  enough." 

The  following  morning,  as  Hester  was 
preparing  to  go  to  school,  Debby  Alden 
came  into  the  hallway  and  called  up  to 
her:  "Hester,  if  you  have  time,  stop  into 
the  store  and  tell  Mr.  Stout  that  if  he  wishes 
to  see  me,  he  will  find  me  at  my  home  any 
afternoon  of  the  week.  Do  you  hear, 
Hester?" 

"Yes."  There  was  a  pause.  Debby 
stood  waiting  to  hear  Hester's  promise. 
"Wait  until  I  come  down,  Aunt  Debby," 
she  said;  "I'll  tell  you  something." 

"Very  well.  You  must  hurry.  It  is 
past  eight  o'clock  now." 

She  was  in  the  kitchen  busy  with  the 
breakfast  work  when  Hester  came  in. 
"Aunt  Debby,  if  you  would  just  as  soon 
write  a  note  to  that  man,  I'll  mail  it.  I 
don't  like  to  go  in  the  store,  Aunt  Debby. 
I  —  I  —  those  people  make  me  shudder." 

"Just  as  you  will,   Hester.    Perhaps  a 


280     THE   COMING   OF   HESTER 

written  reply  would  be  more  courteous." 
She  dried  her  hands  and  went  to  the  writ- 
ing-desk in  the  living-room,  where  she 
wrote  a  note  to  Abner  Stout,  in  which  she 
replied  to  his  request  as  the  old  German 
had  replied  centuries  before  to  the  Roman 
leader. 

Miss  Watson  had  spent  years  in  the 
schoolroom  with  young  people.  She  under- 
stood them  as  thoroughly  as  she  did  the 
text-books  from  which  she  had  been  teach- 
ing for  twenty  years.  She  had  heard  of  the 
scene  of  the  previous  Saturday  morning. 
She  appreciated  the  position  in  which  Hes- 
ter was  placed,  and  knew  what  a  proud 
and  sensitive  nature  would  suffer  under 
conditions  such  as  these.  She  saw  the 
effort  which  Hester  made  to  keep  a  smiling, 
cheerful  countenance  to  the  school,  and 
admired  her  for  it,  as  one  must  ever  ad- 
mire strength  of  character  and  self-control. 

Miss  Watson  was  a  great  student,  and 
loved  study  in  any  form.  Yet  she  was 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     281 

liberal-minded  enough  to  put  a  proper 
estimate  upon  books.  She  knew  that 
they  could  never  be  first  in  affairs  of  life. 
Lessons  were  very  well,  but  there  were 
times  when  they  should  go  to  the  wall. 
She  believed  that  this  time  had  come  for 
Hester.  The  child  was  not  in  a  condition 
to  study.  Yet  Miss  Watson  could  not  tell 
her  so  and  excuse  her  from  recitations. 
That  would  throw  Hester's  thoughts  back 
upon  herself  and  set  the  hundred  pupils 
surmising  and  wondering.  School  had 
barely  been  called  when  Miss  Watson  spoke 
to  Hester.  "Miss  Alden,  would  you  and 
Miss  Orr  go  on  an  errand  for  me?  I've 
left  my  books  at  home."  She  named  the 
books,  and  told  the  girls  where  in  her  house 
they  could  be  found.  Hester  and  Jane  set 
forth.  Miss  Watson  lived  on  the  South 
Side.  A  walk  to  her  home  took  them 
across  the  river  bridge  and  down  long, 
broad  streets  for  a  great  distance.  They 
went  on  their  way  rejoicing,  for  the  morn- 


282     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

ing  was  fine  and  the  lessons  left  in  the 
schoolroom  were  tedious  and  long. 

Jane  was  in  the  best  of  humor,  and  was 
a  constant  source  of  droll,  good-natured 
talk.  When  they  turned  down  Eighth 
Street,  which  led  to  the  bridge,  they  met 
Ralph  coming  from  the  college  building  and 
hurrying  to  the  athletic  grounds. 

Jane  stopped  to  look  at  his  retreating 
form.  Her  face  was  expressive  of  the 
greatest  admiration.  "Ralphie  is  the  best 
boy,"  she  said.  "I'm  always  glad  I  have 
him.  Girls  without  brothers  do  not  know 
what  they  miss." 

"Oh,  yes,  they  do !  I've  always  wanted 
a  brother,  ever  since  I  was  a  little  girl,  and 
since  I've  grown  up,  I  want  one  more  than 
ever.  I'd  give  — "  She  stopped  suddenly. 
Perhaps  she  had  a  brother,  after  all.  But 
not  such  a  brother  as  Ralph.  Before  her 
came  a  picture  of  Joel  Stout  with  a  smirk 
upon  his  face,  and  his  fawning,  ingratiating 
manner.  The  thought  of  his  presence,  redo- 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     283 

lent  with  musk,  and  his  talon-like  fingers, 
which  showed  no  knowledge  of  manicure  or 
brush,  was  repulsive. 

Quick  as  a  flash,  Jane  observed  Hester's 
change  of  expression  and  understood  its 
cause.  "But  every  one  cannot  have  a 
brother  like  Ralph,"  she  said  quickly. 
"There  wouldn't  be  enough  to  go  around. 
I'm  one  of  the  lucky  girls,  and  I  don't  in- 
tend being  selfish.  I'll  divide  whenever 
you  need  a  brother,  Hester;  just  send  me 
word,  and  I'll  lend  you  Ralph." 

Hester  laughed.  "What  would  Ralph 
say  about  that?  He  might  object." 

"No,  indeed.  That  is  what  makes  him 
what  he  is.  He  does  what  I  ask  without 
even  asking  why." 

"He  must  be  uncommon,"  said  Hester, 
with  conviction. 

"He  is,"  responded  Jane,  earnestly.  Then 
Jane  laughed  at  herself  for  being  such  a 
braggart  about  her  brother.  From  this  she 
went  on  to  other  conversation,  turning  each 


284     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

detail  about  that  Hester  might  see  the 
brighter  side,  or  repeating  incidents  that 
were  far  removed  from  matters  which 
troubled  Hester.  Jane  understood  Miss 
Watson's  purpose  in  sending  them  on  this 
errand.  She  did  not  hurry,  but  loitered  by 
the  roadside  to  see  if  by  chance  there  might 
be  some  early  green  on  the  protected  side 
of  the  hill.  The  view  from  the  bridge  at- 
tracted, and  she  hung  over  the  railing  for 
several  minutes  to  enjoy  its  beauty.  So,  by 
her  skilful  loitering,  it  was  almost  dismissal 
time  before  they  reentered  the  class  room. 

"Miss  Watson  will  reprimand  us,"  said 
Hester.  "We  have  been  gone  twice  as  long 
as  was  necessary." 

"Don't  you  believe  it,"  said  Jane,  with 
conviction.  "Hasn't  she  always  advocated 
our  cultivating  a  love  for  outside  life?  If 
she  speaks  to  me  about  the  time  we  spent 
in  our  errand,  I'll  explain  to  her  that  I  was 
drinking  in  the  beauties  of  nature.  She'll 
not  resist  that."  Jane  smiled  blandly  at 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     285 

this,  walked  up  to  Miss  Watson's  desk,  de- 
posited the  book,  and  said:  "It  was  so 
beautiful  on  the  bridge,  Miss  Watson,  that 
I  could  not  hurry.  I  walked  up  the  old 
road  a  little  way.  It  was  so  inviting.  I 
was  the  laggard  —  not  Hester.  She  did  her 
best  to  hurry  me." 

"You  did  very  well,  Jane.  I'm  glad  that 
you  saw  fit  to  loiter."  Hester  heard  the 
words  with  surprise.  Miss  Watson  was 
charming,  and  the  pupils  loved  her,  but  her 
most  devoted  admirers  had  never  been 
able  to  say  that  her  discipline  was  not 
rigid.  What  had  come  to  her  that  she  was 
taking  matters  so  lightly? 

While  she  was  wondering  at  the  change 
in  Miss  Watson,  the  letter  she  had  mailed 
that  morning  had  been  delivered  to  Abner 
Stout,  and  he  and  his  son  had  eagerly  de- 
voured it. 

They  read  and  looked  at  each  other. 
Joel  spoke  first.  "What  do  you  think 
about  that,  father?" 


286     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

"Joel,  I'm  not  sure  what  to  think.  This 
Miss  Alden,  Joel,  is  not  like  other  women. 
She  will  be  —  be  —  difficult  to  manage, 
Joel,  I'm  thinking.  Why,  she  has  kept 
this  secret  for  fifteen  years."  He  looked 
up  at  his  son  as  though  he  expected  some 
show  of  surprise  upon  hearing  this  state- 
ment. Abner  Stout  stood  in  awe  of  Miss 
Alden.  This  feeling  was  brought  about  by 
the  fact  that  she  had  trusted  no  one,  and 
had  kept  her  own  secrets.  Surely  that 
showed  strength  and  power  not  found  in 
the  average  person. 

"Do  you  think  she  knows  all  this, 
father?"  Abner  shook  his  head  in  negation. 

"No,  Joel.  She  does  not  know  all.  I'm 
pretty  sure  of  that.  If  she  did,  our  plans 
would  be  worth — "  He  snapped  his 
fingers.  "But  she  knows  something.  She 
so  much  as  told  that  Bowerman  woman 
who  lives  down  her  way.  She  knows  that 
the  girl's  people  are  able  to  pay  for  all 
this  care  and  clothes  and  sending  to  school. 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     287 

No  woman  would  take  all  this  trouble  for 
nothing,  Joel." 

Joel  was  not  easily  convinced.  He  could 
not  understand  why  Debby  Alden  would 
not  make  herself  known  to  the  child's 
family.  Fifteen  years  is  a  long  time  to 
wait.  He  expressed  himself  to  his  father. 

Abner  saw  the  matter  in  a  different 
light.  It  was  his  opinion  that  Debby  Alden 
knew  only  that  the  child  belonged  to  wealthy 
people,  and  had  perhaps  a  general  idea  as 
to  their  whereabouts.  He  believed,  also, 
that  the  woman  expected  Hester  to  fall 
heir  to  immense  wealth.  With  the  child 
under  her  control,  she  could  manipulate 
matters  as  she  wished.  That  she  was 
awaiting  a  proper  time  for  the  climax  of 
affairs,  he  did  not  doubt.  His  mind  and 
training  had  been  such  that  he  could  not 
conceive  of  a  person  who  could  sacrifice  for 
the  sake  of  affection,  or  from  a  high  idea  of 
duty  to  one's  fellow-creatures.  Because  he 
could  not  conceive  of  a  nature  such  as 


288     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Debby  Alden's,  he  misconstrued  her  acts  in 
his  mind,  and  placed  her  upon  the  same 
level  as  himself  and  his  son. 

They  discussed  fully  the  reason  for  Debby 
Alden  replying  to  them  as  she  had  done. 
The  note  was  courteous,  so  far  as  that 
went,  but  it  was  also  independent.  That 
she  was  not  ready  to  cringe  and  make 
terms  with  them  was  what  they  read  be- 
tween the  lines.  She  had  faith  in  herself 
and  her  ability  to  maintain  the  position  she 
had  assumed,  the  note  told  them.  They 
admired  her  subtlety  and  her  bravado,  for 
they  did  not  for  an  instant  think  that  Hes- 
ter had  not  repeated  to  her  Aunt  Debby 
all  that  had  taken  place  that  Saturday 
morning  in  the  store.  Again,  they  were  un- 
able to  conceive  of  a  girl  who  would  keep 
such  matters  to  herself,  and  suffer  silently, 
rather  than  cause  a  moment  of  uneasiness 
to  one  whom  she  loved. 

Joel  was  eager  to  sit  down  at  once  and 
answer  Miss  Alden's  note,  but  his  father 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     289 

would  not  hear  to  it.  He  shook  his  head 
solemnly,  while  his  keen  eyes  glinted.  "It 
would  not  do,  Joel.  It  would  not  do.  We 
will  call  upon  Miss  Debby  Alden,  since  it  is 
the  only  way,  but  I  talk  better  when  I 
have  my  own  people  about  me.  I'd  rather 
she  came  here;  I'm  on  my  own  ground 
when  I'm  in  my  own  store  and  my  own 
house.  Yet,  since  there's  no  way  of  getting 
around  it,  we'll  go,  but  not  to-day.  She'll 
think  that  we're  over  anxious,  and  I  don't 
want  her  to  think  that.  We'll  go  to-morrow, 
Joel.  We'll  not  walk.  We'll  drive.  There's 
times  when  spending  a  dollar  is  money  in 
your  pocket.  And  to-morrow  will  be  one 
of  the  times." 

"I'll  write  and  tell  her  we'll  be  there 
to-morrow,"  said  Joel,  seizing  his  pen. 
Joel,  who  could  write  with  many  flourishes 
and  much  shading  on  the  downward  strokes, 
looked  upon  his  penmanship  as  his  one 
accomplishment,  and  was  always  eager  to 
flaunt  it  in  the  face  of  an  admiring  public. 


290     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

But  Abner  laid  a  restraining  hand  upon 
the  young  man's  arm.  "What's  the  use  of 
writing?"  he  asked.  "You  act  as  though 
you  had  lost  your  mind.  The  very  last 
thing  we  want  that  Alden  woman  to  know 
is  that  we're  coming  to  talk  business  with 
her.  Take  her  unawares  and  off  her  guard, 
and  there's  no  telling  how  much  she'll  let 
slip.  But  let  her  know  that  we're  coming, 
and  she'll  have  her  mind  made  up  as  to  what's 
best  to  tell  and  what's  best  to  keep  to  one's 
self.  She'd  have  a  few  sharp  words  ready 
on  the  end  of  her  tongue.  She's  a  mighty 
smart  woman,  and  as  deep  as  the  Lord  ever 
made  any  one.  But  you'd  let  her  know, 
and  give  her  a  chance  to  be  ready  for  us." 
He  glowered  at  his  son,  and  let  his  voice  ring 
out  sharply.  "That's  what  you  would  do 
with  your  infernal  letter-writing.  But, 
you're  never  happy  unless  you've  got  a  pen 
in  your  hand.  There's  one  thing  you've 
got  to  keep  in  your  mind  when  you  deal 
with  this  Alden  woman;  that's  to  think 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     291 

twice  and  speak  once.  And  there's  another 
business  rule  you'd  do  well  to  get  into  your 
head:  save  the  ink  in  your  own  well,  and 
let  the  other  fellow  do  the  writing." 

With  such  practical  advice  Abner  Stout 
closed  his  heart-to-heart  talk  with  his  son. 


CHAPTER  XIV 

riTBE  story  of  Abner  Stout's  claim  upon 
"*-  Hester  Alden  came  to  Miss  Richards. 
She  was  greatly  troubled  for  Debby's  sake. 
She  would  not  have  given  the  story  credence 
had  she  not  remembered  Debby's  words  but 
a  short  time  before  in  regard  to  Hester's 
parentage.  She  deliberated  some  time  be- 
fore she  drove  down  to  the  Alden  home, 
uncertain  whether  Debby  might  wish  her 
to  come  at  such  a  time. 

But  after  thinking  over  the  matter,  she 
decided  to  do  by  this  friend  as  she  would 
wish  to  be  done  by,  were  their  positions 
interchanged.  She  had  not  expected  to  find 
Debby  either  in  tears  or  sitting  down  be- 
wailing, for  such  had  never  been  the  way 
of  the  Aldens,  and  this  last  member  of  the 
family  was  capable  of  great  self-control, 
but  she  was  surprised  to  find  her  exceedingly 

292 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     293 

cheerful  and  with  a  buoyancy  of  spirit  in 
her  manner  and  voice  which  came  to  Debby 
only  when  she  was  feeling  her  best. 

"I'm  glad  you  came,"  was  her  greeting, 
as  she  came  to  the  gate  to  welcome  her 
guest.  "I  have  just  finished  my  weekly 
cleaning.  When  I  saw  the  carriage  come 
over  the  hill,  I  wished  it  was  some  one  to 
spend  the  day  with  me."  She  turned  to 
the  coachman.  "Come  after  Miss  Richards 
sometime  this  evening,  Herrick.  She  will 
spend  the  day  with  me."  She  laughed,  and 
waved  aside  all  Miss  Richards's  words  about 
coming  only  for  a  call. 

"This  day  suits  me  best  of  all,"  she  said. 
"I've  put  my  house  in  order  and  have  a 
nice  fat  hen  ready  for  the  roaster.  Hester 
and  I  cannot  manage  such  a  large  fowl.  It 
will  be  an  act  of  charity  to  stay  and  help 
us  dispose  of  it." 

They  went  together  into  the  great  old-fash- 
ioned living-room.  The  windows  commanded 
a  view  of  the  road  from  town  as  it  descended 


294     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

the  hill  after  crossing  the  tracks.  There 
was  a  bright-striped  rag  carpet  upon  the 
floor,  white  dimity  curtains  at  the  windows, 
and  scarlet  bunches  of  geraniums. 

"Have  you  any  sewing  on  hand?"  asked 
Miss  Richards,  as  she  sat  in  the  great  wooden 
rocker  by  the  west  window. 

"I've  cut  out  some  shirt-waists  for  Hes- 
ter, enough  to  last  her  through  the  summer. 
I'm  not  in  a  hurry  to  finish  them.  She  will 
not  begin  to  wear  them  until  summer  is 
really  here.  So  I  mean  to  take  my  time. 
I'm  putting  my  best  needlework  on  them. 
I  think  it  looks  daintier  than  so  much 
bought  lace." 

Miss  Richards  nodded  her  agreement. 

"There's  nothing  daintier  than  hand- 
work. Get  out  the  waists,  Debby,  and  I'll 
take  a  few  stitches.  I  always  like  to  feel 
that  I  have  a  little  interest  in  Hester." 

"You  always  will  have,  Eva.  Hester 
feels  the  same  toward  you.  I  believe,  after 
me,  that  she  loves  you.  I  told  her  about 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     295 

going  to  school  next  winter.  She  likes  the 
idea  of  school  well  enough,  but  declares  she 
will  not  leave  me." 

Her  face  lighted  up.  Hester's  words  had 
pleased  her  more  than  any  other  thing  the 
girl  could  have  done.  She  left  the  room 
to  get  the  sewing,  leaving  her  guest  alone 
for  a  few  minutes. 

Miss  Richards  was  in  a  dilemma.  Debby 
did  not  know  then  of  what  had  occurred  in 
Stout's  store  the  previous  Saturday  morn- 
ing! The  story  was  the  property  of  the 
entire  town,  and  had  been  rolled  between 
hundreds  of  tongues  and  turned  about  like 
a  delectable  morsel,  while  she  who  was  the 
most  vitally  interested  knew  nothing  of 
the  matter.  Miss  Richards  understood  the 
reason  for  this.  No  one  would  have  come 
to  Debby  with  this  story,  for  she  was  one 
of  whom  many  stood  in  awe,  while  Hester 
had  kept  the  matter  to  herself,  lest  her  aunt 
should  be  unnecessarily  worried. 

"There  may  nothing  come  of  it,"  thought 


296     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

Miss  Richards.  "The  Stouts  may  have  acted 
so  for  some  purpose  of  their  own,  and  with  no 
idea  of  carrying  the  matter  further." 

Debby  came  in  at  this  with  her  arms 
filled  with  shirt-waists. 

"If  you  will  make  French  knots,  Eva," 
she  said,  "I  shall  be  glad.  Mine  never  look 
quite  as  well  as  yours." 

Miss  Richards  consented,  and  soon  the 
two  women  were  interested  in  the  sewing, 
with  now  and  then  a  sentence  by  way  of 
conversation. 

"I  had  a  letter  this  week  which  was 
rather  out  of  the  ordinary,"  said  Debby, 
pausing,  as  she  snapped  a  new  thread  from 
the  spool. 

Miss  Richards  looked  up  from  her  work, 
her  face  expressing  her  interest. 

"From  Abner  Stout.  He  wished  to  see 
me  on  a  matter  of  business,  and  asked  me 
to  call  at  his  store." 

"Did  you,  Debby?"  There  was  a  trace 
of  anxiety  in  Eva  Richards's  voice. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     297 

"Scarcely.  I  have  no  business  interests 
with  him.  If  he  wishes  to  see  me,  he  knows 
where  I  live.  I  sent  him  word  to  that 
effect." 

"When  was  that?" 

"I  mailed  the  letter  Tuesday  morning." 

"And  this  is  Friday.  Has  he  called  here 
yet?" 

"No,  I  fancy  he  will  not.  No  doubt  he 
had  some  goods  in  the  store  he  thought  he 
might  be  able  to  persuade  me  into  taking. 
I'm  confident  that  his  business  was  of  no 
more  importance  than  that.  Don't  you 
fancy  so?" 

Miss  Richards  made  no  reply.  But  her 
lack  of  response  awakened  no  suspicion  in 
Debby's  mind. 

The  conversation  languished,  for  Miss 
Richards's  mind  was  busy  with  her  ques- 
tion of  ethics,  as  to  whether  she  should  or 
should  not  make  known  to  her  friend  the 
business  which  Abner  Stout  might  have  in 
common  with  her.  To  touch  upon  an- 


298     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

other's  personal  affairs  is  a  delicate  matter, 
and  Eva  Richards  questioned  what  was  best 
to  do,  and  hesitated  between  two  decisions. 

But  the  decision  was  taken  from  her. 
Debby  looked  up  from  her  work,  and  across 
the  field  to  the  road  over  the  hill,  along  the 
mountain  side.  "  Another  carriage  coming 
over  Paddy's  Run  road,"  she  said.  "I 
wonder  if  it  is  coming  here.  If  it  is,  I'll 
have  this  as  a  reception  day."  She  laughed 
lightly  as  she  added:  "Perhaps  it  is  Abner 
Stout  coming  to  pay  me  a  visit.  If  it  is, 
I'm  sure  I  shall  be  overwhelmed  with  the 
honor.  You  must  assist  me  to  receive  him 
with  due  ceremony,  Eva." 

Miss  Richards  laid  down  her  sewing.  Her 
hands  trembled  with  nervousness.  "It  may 
be,  Debby.  It  may  be,  and  if  it  is,  I  must 
tell  you  what  his  business  is.  It  is  not 
right  that  you  should  meet  him  unpre- 
pared. He's  too  subtle,  too  crafty,  for  you 
to  deal  with.  I  must  tell  you  why  he 
comes." 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     299 

"Yes,"  said  Debby  Alden.  She  threaded 
her  needle  and  took  a  buttonhole  stitch  as 
firmly  and  as  evenly  as  though  her  guest 
had  made  no  comment  more  pretentious 
than  one  on  the  conditions  of  the  weather. 
"Yes,"  she  repeated,  for  Miss  Richards  had 
hesitated. 

"I  thought  you  knew.  I  gave  no  thought 
but  Hester  would  come  directly  home  to 
tell  you.  Poor  child,  I  suspect  she  wished 
to  spare  you,  and  —  perhaps  she  did  not 
believe  it  after  all." 

Then  without  interruption  she  told  Debby 
Alden  of  the  scene  between  Hester  and 
Abner  Stout,  and  how  Doctor  Heins  had 
led  the  girls  away  and  had  spoken  sharply 
to  the  man. 

Debby  Alden  listened  without  comment. 
She  had  continued  her  buttonhole-making 
while  the  story  was  told.  The  sole  expres- 
sion of  the  anger  and  indignation  which 
were  filling  her  heart  was  shown  in  the 
quick,  sharp  way  in  which  she  drew  her 


300     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

thread.  Miss  Richards  understood  her  well, 
and  expected  nothing  more  than  this. 

"I  felt  that  you  must  be  prepared  when 
you  met  this  man,  or  I  would  not  have 
told  you,"  said  Miss  Richards,  as  she  con- 
cluded the  story. 

"I  understand.    I  understand." 

Laying  aside  her  work,  Debby  moved 
nearer  to  the  window,  that  she  might 
watch  the  progress  of  the  carriage  as  it 
by  turns  appeared  and  disappeared  as  the 
road  rose  on  the  brow  of  the  hill  or  lay 
hidden  in  the  depressions  of  the  valley. 

"They  have  turned  down  between  here 
and  Bowermans1,"  she  said  at  last.  "One 
of  us  is  to  be  favored."  She  did  not  leave 
her  place  at  the  window  until  she  saw  that 
the  carriage  had  stopped  at  her  own  gate. 

"You  are  right,  Eva.  Abner  Stout  and 
his  son,  Joel,  in  all  the  glory  of  bright  ties 
and  plaid  suits  are  about  to  honor  us  with 
a  call.  They  have  hired  a  livery  rig.  My ! 
what  extravagance ! " 


THE  COMING   OF  HESTER     301 

Miss  Alden  opened  the  door  in  response 
to  their  knock,  and  the  two  men  entered 
without  invitation,  selected  the  easiest 
chairs  in  the  room,  and  seated  themselves, 
while  Debby  Alden  stood  looking  upon 
them  with  an  inscrutable  smile  upon  her 
lips  and  a  dignity  of  manner  which  would 
have  put  to  rout  the  self-assertive  manners 
of  less  confident  persons. 

They  had  arrayed  themselves  regardless 
of  expense.  They  had  done  so  with  the 
intent  of  impressing  Miss  Alden.  They  im- 
pressed, but  not  just  in  the  way  they 
thought.  She  observed  each  detail  of  their 
attire,  for  it  clamored  aloud  to  be  noticed; 
the  room  became  filled  with  the  odor  of  a 
powerful  scent.  As  their  hands  jangled 
their  many-sealed  watch  chains,  it  was  evi- 
dent that  their  nails  were  in  mourning  for 
the  death  of  an  orange-wood  stick,  a  file, 
and  a  brush. 

"I  got  your  letter  Tuesday,"  began 
Abner.  His  present  position  was  so  un- 


302     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

usual  that  it  confused  him.  A  perspiration 
broke  upon  him.  He  mopped  his  brow, 
and  the  odor  of  musk  was  wafted  with  the 
wave  of  his  handkerchief.  If  only  Miss 
Alden,  grave  and  serene  and  quiet,  would 
not  stand  and  look  at  him!  He  repeated 
his  statement  with  a  slight  variation  in 
order  of  the  words. 

"Your  letter  reached  me  Tuesday." 

"So  I  suppose.  The  United  States  mail 
is  generally  reliable." 

"You  said  that  we  would  find  you  home 
when  we  came." 

"So  I  remember  having  written.  My 
being  present  now  proves  the  truth  of 
my  statement." 

This  was  too  much  for  Abner.  He  could 
not  grasp  the  gentle  irony  of  such  speech. 
He  had  dealt  with  many  people,  but  never 
one  who  spoke  so  enigmatically,  and  smiled 
so  inscrutably  as  Miss  Debby  Alden.  He 
knew  no  precedent  in  the  dealing  with  such 
people.  For  the  time  he  was  disconcerted, 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     303 

and  blurted  out,  "I  suppose  Rut  hie  —  that 
is,  Hester,  —  told  you  that  we  talked  with 
her?" 

"Miss  Hester  and  I  have  never  discussed 
you  in  any  way.  There  has  never  been 
occasion  to  do  so." 

"Didn't  she  say  what  business  was 
bringing  us  here?" 

"As  I  have  said,  my  niece  and  I  have 
never  discussed  you.  Therefore  it  would 
be  impossible  for  her  to  tell  me  the  reason 
for  this  call,  even  should  it  chance  that 
she  knew  it." 

Abner  smiled  sardonically.  Not  for  one 
instant  did  he  believe  that  Hester  Alden 
had  not  related  in  detail  all  that  had  tran- 
spired that  Saturday  morning.  He  pressed 
his  thin  lips,  and  looked  at  Miss  Alden  with 
a  sneer. 

"She  knows  it  all  right  from  A  to  Z, 
and  you  do,  too.  I  see  no  use  in  trying  to 
pretend  you  don't.  The  truth's  bound  to 
come  out  sooner  or  later.  I'll  see  that  it 


304     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

does.  You've  kept  my  little  girl  for  fifteen 
years,  and  now  I  mean  to  have  her."  Then 
feeling  that  a  show  of  emotion  would  be 
in  keeping  with  his  part,  he  let  his  head 
fall  on  his  breast,  assumed  what  he  thought 
was  a  sorrowful  expression ;  which  was  not 
dissimilar  to  that  which  a  starving  wolf 
might  assume  when  it  was  desirous  of  win- 
ning the  confidence  of  a  young  lamb.  "No 
one  knows  how  dreadful  these  fifteen  years 
have  been  to  me,"  he  said  brokenly.  "No 
one  knows  how  I  feel  about  this." 

The  serenity  of  Miss  Alden  was  not  dis- 
turbed. Feeling  that  some  reply  was  ex- 
pected of  her,  she  said  calmly,  "If  you  felt 
as  bad  as  you  look,  it  must  have  been  dread- 
ful." 

She  had  no  sooner  spoken  than  the  double 
meaning  in  her  words  came  to  her.  She 
had  not  intended  saying  all  that  the  speech 
implied.  She  could  not  restrain  a  smile. 
She  glanced  quickly  at  Miss  Richards  and 
saw  that  her  eyes  were  twinkling. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     305 

Although  Abner  Stout  had  spent  his  life 
in  America,  and  Joel  had  been  educated  in 
its  great  public  school  system,  neither  were 
able  to  grasp  the  subtleties  of  its  humor. 
Miss  Alden's  words  were  accepted  in  good 
part. 

"Yes;  that's  just  how  I  felt.  I  have 
spent  fifteen  years  grieving  over  the  loss  of 
that  child,  and  here  she's  been  comfortable 
all  this  time.  You  did  wrong,  Miss  Alden, 
in  not  publishing  in  the  papers  about  the 
child  and  her  mother.  I  don't  doubt  that 
the  law  would  hold  you  guilty  of  fraud. 
However,  that  is  past  and  gone.  You  may 
have  acted  in  ignorance.  But  whatever 
led  you  to  it,  I'm  willing  to  overlook  it  all. 
All  that  I  can  think  of  now  is  that  the  girl 
known  as  Hester  Alden  is  my  little  daughter, 
Ruth.  I  know  that  you'll  be  glad  to  hear 
that  the  fatherless  has  found  a  father." 

"Well,  no,  Mr.  Stout.  I  cannot  honestly 
say  that  such  a  piece  of  news  would  awaken 
any  such  feeling." 


306     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

"No?"  He  looked  upon  her  in  surprise 
as  though  to  say:  "Is  it  possible?  Do  you 
lack  all  natural  feeling?  Are  you  less  than 
human?" 

She  returned  his  furtive  glance  with  a 
steady  gaze.  He  let  his  head  sink  upon 
his  breast  as  if  overcome  by  her  lack  of 
proper  feeling. 

"Haven't  I  made  it  plain  to  you?"  he 
continued  after  a  moment's  pause.  "This 
girl  you  call  Hester  Alden  is  my  child 
Ruth.  She  is  the  child  of  my  wife  Eliza 
who  was  killed  at  the  crossing.  Ruth  must 
come  to  her  father's  house.  There'll  be 
room  for  her.  There  is  no  one,  Miss  Alden, 
so  near  as  your  own  flesh  and  blood." 

"I  agree  heartily  with  you,  Mr.  Stout. 
No  one  can  be  so  dear  to  us  as  our  own 
people." 

Abner,  believing  that  such  a  concession 
was  a  show  of  weakness,  became  encouraged 
and  continued  his  talk,  interspersing  it  with 
many  gestures  and  sidewise  airing  of  his 


THE  COMING  OF   HESTER     307 

hands.  In  the  earnestness  of  his  conver- 
sation he  drew  nearer  and  nearer  to  Debby 
Alden,  until  he  stood  directly  before  her, 
his  sharp  eyes  peering  up  into  her  face, 
and  his  talon-like  fingers  almost  touching 
her.  Debby  Alden  drew  herself  erect  and 
moved  back.  The  man  was  too  self-satisfied 
to  read  the  repulsion  which  her  movement 
manifested.  But  Joel  understood.  He  laid 
a  detaining  hand  upon  his  father's  arm, 
and,  drawing  him  back,  took  up  the  thread 
of  conversation  himself.  "My  father  is  so 
excited  that  he  forgets  himself.  What  he 
means  to  say,  Miss  Alden,  is  that  he's 
ready  to  take  Ruth  —  that  is,  Hester,  and 
take  care  of  her  as  he  does  his  other  chil- 
dren. It  will  be  a  great  saving  to  you,  as 
it  costs  something  to  keep  a  girl  her  age. 
Father  knows  that,  but  he'll  do  what's 
right  for  Rut  hie." 

"He  is  surely  very  kind  —  very  generous," 
Debby  Alden  replied. 

"Of  course,  we  know  you'll  miss  her  and 


308     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

hate  to  part  with  her,  but  then,  there's  the 
money  it  has  cost  to  keep  her.  There's  no 
use  of  your  having  the  trouble  longer. 
This  is  Friday.  If  Hester  could  come  to 
her  new  home  Saturday  evening  — " 

" Sabbath,  her  first  day  at  home!  How 
lovely!  How  appropriate!"  cried  Abner, 
rubbing  his  hands  together. 

"I  will  drive  down  for  her  myself.  I 
will  not  ask  her  to  walk." 

"I  would  not  take  that  trouble.  Con- 
sider the  livery  bill,"  said  Miss  Alden,  dryly. 

But  Joel  explained  that  on  such  an  occa- 
sion as  this,  money  would  not  be  considered. 
Hester  would  receive  a  royal  welcome  and 
be  given  her  proper  place  in  the  household 
of  Abner  Stout. 

Miss  Alden  allowed  them  to  finish  their 
story  before  she  addressed  them.  "You 
have  talked  a  great  deal  of  nonsense.  Hes- 
ter Alden  is  Hester  Alden,  and  will  remain 
so.  I  cannot  understand  your  reason  for 
coming  to  me  with  such  a  story,  but  I  take 


THE   COMING  OF   HESTER     309 

it  for  granted  that  you  have  some  purpose 
in  view.  The  subject  is  stopped  right  here, 
also  your  discussion  of  it  among  the  people 
who  come  to  your  store.  If  you  so  much 
as  address  the  child  again,  I  shall  take 
means  to  prevent  her  being  annoyed.  If 
that  is  all  the  business  you  have  with  me, 
I'll  bid  you  good  afternoon." 

She  moved  to  the  outside  door  and  laid 
her  hand  on  the  knob,  as  about  to  open  it 
for  the  egress  of  the  callers.  But  the  two 
were  not  to  be  put  aside  so.  Abner  straight- 
ened his  shoulders  and  said  sharply:  "We 
will  not  go.  We  will  not  be  put  off  in  this 
way.  There's  a  law,  madam.  Remember 
that  there  is  a  law  which  will  put  aside 
your  weak  words." 

Again  Joel  calmed  him,  and,  turning  to 
Miss  Alden,  said,  "  You  think  we  are  talking, 
but  we  mean  to  have  our  little  Rut  hie.  If 
you  give  her  up  without  trouble,  very  well, 
but  if  you  don't,  then  we'll  have  the  law 
make  you  give  her  up.  We've  friends  in 


310     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

New  York  who  knew  my  mother  and  all 
about  the  time  she  disappeared.  We  can 
prove  that  she  was  the  woman  who  was 
killed  and  brought  here.  We'll  prove  it." 

"Do  you  think  so?"  Miss  Alden  showed 
admirable  self-control.  She  was  not  so 
much  alarmed  as  she  was  angry. 

She  continued,  as  she  opened  wide  the 
door:  " Prove  it  if  you  can.  I  am  quite 
sure  that  you  cannot  do  so.  For/'  with  a 
sweet  smile  and  gracious  bow,  "I  know 
more  about  Hester's  people  than  you  sus- 
pect. Not  a  drop  of  your  blood  is  in  her 
veins." 

"I  shall  have  the  law  on  you.  I  shall 
employ  a  lawyer." 

"As  you  will,  but  it  seems  a  pity  to 
waste  a  fee.  Good  afternoon." 

They  would  have  said  more,  but  Debby 
did  not  wait  to  hear.  She  closed  the  door 
after  her,  and  turned  to  Miss  Richards. 

"Are  you  surprised  at  my  discourtesy?" 
she  asked  with  a  smile.  "Those  people 


"I   KNOW   MORE   ABOUT    HESTER'S   PEOPLE   THAN   YOU   SUSPECT." 

Page  310. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     311 

have  always  been  offensive  to  me,  but  when 
they  enter  my  house  ready  with  lies  for 
my  undoing,  they  merit  more  than  dis- 
courtesy." 

"But,  Debby,  are  you  sure?  It  couldn't 
be  possible  that  these  people  are  correct?" 

"  Utterly  impossible.  Does  Hester  look 
or  act  as  they  do?  Does  she  show  one  of 
their  traits?" 

"No,  but—" 

" There  is  no  question  about  it.  I  am 
sure  of  my  statement.  Hester  hasn't  one 
drop  of  Stout  blood  in  her  veins.  But 
we've  spent  the  greater  part  of  the  after- 
noon in  the  discussion.  I  must  see  to  my 
dinner,  if  you  will  excuse  me." 

The  freshman  class  was  dismissed  early 
Friday  afternoon.  Hester  Alden  was  trudg- 
ing along  over  the  hill  when  she  saw  a 
carriage  come  down  the  lane  between  her 
home  and  the  Bowermans'.  She  felt  at  once 
that  it  must  be  Abner  Stout,  and  her  heart 
failed  her.  In  a  few  minutes  the  carriage 


312     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

passed  her.  Joel  was  driving,  while  Abner 
was  talking  excitedly  and  gesticulating  with 
both  hands,  the  palms  upturned.  She 
glanced  at  him  and  hurried  on.  As  she 
entered  the  kitchen,  Debby  Alden  was  just 
taking  the  chicken  from  the  oven.  She 
looked  up  and  smiled. 

"  You're  in  time,  Hester.  You  did  not 
have  much  of  a  lunch  to-day,  so  I  thought 
I'd  have  an  early  dinner.  Miss  Richards  is 
in  the  living-room,  Hester.  Go  in  and 
speak  to  her." 

Hester  had  stood  like  one  dumfounded. 
She  could  not  account  for  her  Aunt  Debby's 
lightness  of  manner  and  cheerfulness  of 
voice.  Without  a  word  she  passed  into 
the  living-room. 

Miss  Richards  observed  the  troubled  look 
in  the  girl's  eye,  and  understood  the  reason. 
She  arose  to  greet  her. 

"Your  friends  have  been  here,  Hester, 
and  your  Aunt  Debby  has  sent  them  right 
about.  Don't  give  them  another  serious 


THE  COMING   OF   HESTER     313 

thought.  But  this  evening,  after  I'm  gone, 
tell  your  Aunt  Debby  what  happened  last 
week.  It  is  right  that  she  should  know." 
She  drew  Hester  to  her  and  kissed  her.  At 
the  words  the  troubled  look  left  the  girl's 
eyes,  and  she  gave  a  sigh  of  relief. 


CHAPTER  XV 

T^EBBY  ALDEN  did  a  great  deal  of 
•*-^  thinking  during  the  days  which  fol- 
lowed, but  she  did  not  put  her  thoughts 
into  action,  as  she  wished  to  be  on  the  de- 
fensive rather  than  the  offensive  side  should 
the  subject  of  Hester's  parentage  again  be 
brought  up.  She  knew  not  what  course 
Abner  Stout  might  take.  She  did  not  be- 
lieve one  word  of  their  story,  yet  she  could 
not  understand  why  they  should  wish  to 
take  Hester  into  their  family.  She  had  a 
feeling  that  something  lay  back  of  their 
action,  and  determined  that  she  would  keep 
herself  in  touch  with  all  they  did,  in  the 
hope  of  discovering  the  reason  for  this 
scheme. 

She  was  not  long  left  in  doubt  as  to  the 
stand  they  would  take.    Within  a  week  she 

314 


THE   COMING  OF  HESTER     315 

received  a  formal  notice  from  Hinter  and 
Hendig,  attorneys-at-law,  asking  her  to  ap- 
pear before  them  and  give  reason  for  the 
detention  in  her  home  of  one  Ruth  Stout, 
generally  known  as  Hester  Alden.  The 
date  for  her  appearance  was  fixed  for  the 
following  Saturday  morning  at  eleven-thirty. 

Debby  read  the  letter  at  the  supper  table, 
for  Hester,  as  usual,  had  brought  the  mail 
home  with  her.  She  smiled  grimly,  and 
after  a  moment's  hesitation  tossed  the  single 
sheet  of  paper  across  to  Hester. 

"There's  interesting  reading  for  you," 
she  said.  Hester  read  and  then  looked  up 
in  alarm.  "You  will  not  let  them  take 
me,  Aunt  Debby?  I  will  not  go  with 
them." 

"Don't  give  that  a  thought.  There  is 
not  a  possibility  of  your  going.  I'm  sorry 
for  them  that  they  employed  Hinter  and 
Hendig.  They  will  have  a  pretty  fee  to 
pay.  Giving  up  money  is  worse  on  Abner 
Stout  than  drawing  blood." 


316     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

"They  must  think  they  can  make  me  go, 
Aunt  Debby,  or  they  would  not  employ 
such  men.  Perhaps  they  know  more  than 
they  told  you.  They  may  know — " 

"One  thing  they  do  not  know,  Hessie. 
That  one  thing,  no  one  but  myself  knows. 
I  have  no  fear  of  what  either  Abner  Stout 
or  his  son  Joel  can  do." 

She  dropped  the  subject  then  and  asked 
Hester  concerning  the  lessons  of  the  day. 
They  had  been  uncertain  regarding  a  sen- 
tence in  Latin,  and  Debby  wished  to 
know  how  the  Latin  teacher  had  trans- 
lated it. 

The  subject  of  what  Abner  Stout  might 
do  was  not  brought  up  again  until  Friday 
morning.  Despite  her  aunt's  encourage- 
ment, Hester  was  worried.  She  could  not 
understand  why  these  men  should  care  to 
claim  her  unless  she  really  belonged  to  them. 
This  lack  of  understanding  made  her  fearful. 
Then,  too,  she  was  inclined  to  believe  that 
her  Aunt  Debby's  confidence  was  partly 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     317 

assumed  for  her  encouragement.  She  tried 
to  keep  her  mind  upon  her  lessons,  but  her 
efforts  resulted  in  failure.  Her  recitations 
were  scarcely  worthy  of  the  name.  Miss 
Watson  understood,  and  made  the  way 
easier  for  her  by  explaining  matters  to  the 
other  teachers. 

Jane  Orr  and  Janet  Collum  walked  with 
her  on  her  way  home,  and  brought  out  their 
gayest  spirits,  and  kept  them  on  dress-pa- 
rade for  Hester's  benefit.  She  could  not  be 
dull  in  their  company,  and  before  she  knew 
what  was  happening  the  Stouts  were  for- 
gotten and  she  was  laughing  as  light-hearted 
and  merry  as  the  others. 

When  Hester  started  to  school  Friday 
morning,  Debby  Alden  came  out  to  the 
porch  and  handed  her  two  notes  enclosed 
in  small  envelopes.  "One  to  Mrs.  Orr  and 
one  to  Mrs.  Collum,  Hessie.  Give  them  to 
the  girls  to  carry  to  their  mothers.  I've 
asked  permission  for  Jane  and  Janet  to 
spend  the  day  with  you.  You  know  I 


must  be  in  town  to-morrow,  and  it  will  be 
dull  for  you  to  be  alone." 

^May  I  go  with  you,  Aunt  Debby? 
I'll  worry  dreadfully  while  you  are  gone." 

"That  would  be  very  foolish,  to  worry 
about  nothing.  I  cannot  see  that  you  will 
gain  by  it.  No,  Hester;  you  may  not  go. 
Now,  don't  look  so  at  me  or  I  shall  say 
yes  when  my  judgment  says  the  other 
thing."  She  put  her  hands  before  her  eyes  as 
though  to  shut  out  the  face,  then  laughed  and 
turned  toward  the  door.  But  before  entering 
she  turned  to  smile  and  wave  good-by. 

Kate  Bowerman's  ears  had  been  tickled 
with  the  news  of  the  disturbance  which 
Abner  Stout  was  about  to  make.  She  set 
forth  this  Friday  morning  on  what  she 
called  a  visit  of  sympathy  for  Debby  Alden. 
She  found  her  in  the  kitchen,  rolling  out  a 
batch  of  cookies,  while  a  heap  of  some 
fresh  from  the  oven  were  spread  out  on  the 
bread  cloth  on  the  table  to  cool. 

Kate    came    in   without    knocking,    and 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     319 

seating  herself  near  the  table  helped  her- 
self to  a  cookie.  "Sour  milk?"  she  asked 
by  way  of  greeting. 

"Good  morning,  Kate.  Yes,  I  used  sour 
milk  and  soda.  I  like  it  better." 

"I  can  always  taste  soda,"  was  the  re- 
joinder. "I've  never  seen  the  cook  yet 
who  could  fool  me  on  soda.  It  always 
leaves  a  sort  of  slippery  taste."  She  had 
finished  her  cookie  by  this  time,  and  reached 
for  another. 

Debby  did  not  reply.  She  had  long  since 
learned  the  wisdom  of  keeping  quiet  when 
the  issue  was  of  as  little  importance  as  this. 
Then,  too,  she  knew  Kate's  weakness  in 
always  taking  the  opposite  side  of  any 
question.  She  did  not  doubt  that  had  she 
told  Kate  that  baking-powder  had  been 
used,  Kate  would  have  begun  an  argument 
in  favor  of  soda. 

Mrs.  Bowerman  talked  for  some  minutes 
on  the  subject,  munching  cookies  all  the 
while,  and  then  she  turned  to  Debby  with 


320     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

the  remark,  "I  hear  you  are  having  trouble 
with  the  Stouts." 

"You've  been  misinformed.  I'm  not 
having  trouble  with  them."  She  rolled  out 
another  ovenful  of  cakes  and  prepared  to 
cut  them. 

"You  haven't!"  Kate  looked  incredu- 
lous. "Well,  from  all  the  reports  that  I've 
heard,  you  must  be  having  a  peck  of  trouble 
with  them." 

"Not  a  bit.  On  the  contrary,  they  are 
having  trouble  with  me." 

Kate  sniffed,  stuck  out  her  tongue  —  as 
was  her  habit  when  surprised  or  excited. 
But  she  had  come  over  there  to  sympathize 
with  Debby  Alden,  and  sympathize  she 
would,  whether  Debby  desired  it  or  not. 

"Well,  either  way  you  put  it,  it's  bad 
enough.  It  would  have  been  an  excellent 
thing,  Debby  Alden,  if  you  had  listened  to 
my  advice  years  ago.  I  was  against  you 
keeping  the  child.  You  know  that.  Here, 
after  all  your  trouble  and  expense,  it  turns 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     321 

out  that  she  belongs  to  that  dirty,  low  set 
of  people.  It  wouldn't  have  seemed  so  bad 
if  you'd  discovered  her  parents  and  found 
them  to  be  good  reliable  folks.  But  your 
time  and  money  wasted  on — '  She  did 
not  finish  her  sentence,  but  made  a  gesture 
of  disgust  as  she  reached  forth  to  take  an- 
other cookie. 

Debby  made  no  reply.  She  rolled  her 
dough  with  more  than  her  usual  amount  of 
energy,  and  cut  the  cakes  with  a  manner 
indicating  that  she  was  putting  her  power 
of  self-control  to  the  test.  Kate,  heedless 
of  the  signs,  continued:  "If  she  belonged  to 
one  of  the  good  old  families,  it  would  have 
been  different.  I  set  store  by  what  stock 
folks  come  from.  There's  nothing  like  old 
families,  I  say.  Don't  you  agree  to  that, 
Debby?" 

"Oh,  yes,  if  they're  not  so  old  that  they're 
mouldy,"  she  replied,  with  seeming  indif- 
ference. "When  it  comes  to  that,  I  prefer 


new  ones." 


322     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

She  stooped  before  the  oven,  dish  towel 
in  hand.  Her  cheeks  were  flushed  with 
heat. 

''You've  a  sharp  tongue  to-day,  Debby. 
Do  for  pity's  sake  learn  to  control  it,  or 
you'll  be  ugly-tempered  before  you  are  an 
old  woman.  I've  always  disliked  that  kind 
of  old  folks,  and  I've  watched  myself  like  a 
hawk.  But  to  go  back  to  our  subject 
about  Hester's  being  a  Stout.  Do  you 
know,  I've  noticed  the  resemblance  for 
years,  but  I  hated  to  speak  — " 

"Then  do  not  do  it  if  you  have  disliked 
it  so.  As  far  as  Hester  is  concerned,  she  is 
an  Alden  —  nothing  more  nor  less.  Not  a 
word  that  you  can  say  or  leave  unsaid  can 
alter  that  in  the  least.  So  why  not  drop 
the  subject,  Kate?" 

"My!  but  you're  touchy  this  morning, 
Debby.  A  neighbor  cannot  come  in  with 
a  word  of  sympathy  but  you  flare  up  like  a 
house  afire."  She  rose,  and  wrapping  her 
shawl  about  her,  moved  toward  the  door. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     323 

"There's  no  use  of  trying  to  talk  with  you 
in  such  a  humor;  I'll  go." 

"Come  again,  Kate,  when  Hester  is  not 
the  subject  to  be  discussed."  Repenting 
of  her  hasty  speech,  she  added,  as  she 
piled  a  dish  high  with  cakes:  "Take  these 
home  for  Sam's  dinner.  He  used  to  like 
my  sour-cream  cookies." 

So  the  treaty  of  peace  was  signed  be- 
tween them,  and  Kate  went  home  by  way 
of  the  lane,  lest  her  plate  of  cakes  should 
suffer  should  she  attempt  climbing  the 
fences. 

Janet  and  Jane  came  home  from  school 
with  Hester.  They  were  rejoicing  in  the 
possession  of  several  new  recipes,  and  were 
eager  to  try  them. 

"Mother  wouldn't  care  if  I  tried  them 
at  home,"  said  Janet,  "but  the  cook's  so 
cranky  about  our  going  into  the  kitchen. 
Edith  Rank  wrote  this  recipe  for  me.  She 
says  it's  fine.  There's  not  another  girl  in 
school  who  can  make  fudge  like  Edith." 


324     THE   COMING  OF  HESTER 

" There's  no  cook  here  to  bother  us," 
said  Debby.  "You  may  try  the  whole 
batch  of  recipes." 

"I  said  Aunt  Debby  wouldn't  care,"  said 
Jane,  addressing  Janet. 

"Thank  goodness,  there's  no  cook  to 
fear!"  cried  Janet.  "Let's  begin  the  in- 
stant we  have  finished  supper,  and,  Aunt 
Debby,  let  us  have  supper  early." 

There  was  no  refusing  Janet.  Her  plans 
were  carried  out.  Debby  Alden  took  part 
in  the  making  of  the  fudge  and  caramels  as 
though  she,  too,  were  going  through  a  new 
experience  of  the  freedom  of  the  kitchen. 
Janet  and  Jane  understood  without  explana- 
tion the  reason  for  their  invitation  at  this 
particular  time.  They  were  so  overflow- 
ing with  energy  and  high  spirits  that  Hester 
was  well  employed  keeping  up  with  them. 

Debby  Alden  started  forth  to  town  im- 
mediately after  breakfast  the  following 
morning.  The  three  girls  went  with  her  to 
the  gate. 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     325 

"  We'll  have  a  lovely  dinner  ready  for 
you,"  was  Jane's  parting  words.  "I'll  get 
it  myself." 

Janet  groaned.  "You  had  better  bring 
some  dyspepsia  tablets  along,  Aunt  Debby, 
if  Jane  does  the  cooking.  I'll  bake  a  cake, 
myself.  You'll  be  sure  of  one  good  bite." 

It  was  Jane's  turn  to  groan. 

"If  you  intend  eating  Janet's  cake,  you 
had  better  bring  a  doctor  with  you.  Dys- 
pepsia tablets  would  count  nothing  against 
her  angel-food  cake." 

"I  did  not  say  I  would  make  an  angel- 
food  cake." 

"No,  but  your  cake  would  make  an  angel 
of  any  one  who  would  eat  it." 

With  the  laughter  following  such  mild 
bantering  of  each  other,  Debby  Alden  left 
them  and  went  into  town. 

Her  first  visit  was  to  Doctor  Heins.  He 
knew  what  had  taken  place  during  the  last 
week,  and  expected  her  visit.  He  ushered 
her  into  his  private  office,  saw  that  she 


326     THE   COMING  OF   HESTER 

was  seated,  and  after  adjusting  his  glasses 
peered  at  her  and  began  the  conversation 
with,  "Well,  what  are  we  going  to  do  about 
Hester?" 

"They  can  do  nothing,  Doctor.  But 
their  efforts  have  set  me  thinking.  While  I 
am  living,  I  can  settle  such  matters.  But 
sometime  the  question  of  Hester's  people 
must  come  up  again.  It  must  come  up. 
Some  day  she  must  know,  and  the  papers 
must  be  so  arranged  that  it  will  be  attended 
to  whether  I  am  here  or  not." 

"Then  you  are  sure  she  does  not  belong 
to  the  Stouts?" 

"Quite  sure.  I  know  it,  and  you  do 
also,  Doctor  Heins." 

He  blinked,  cleaned  his  glasses,  and 
looked  at  her  with  surprise. 

"Indeed,  Debby  Alden,  I  know  nothing 
at  all  about  it,  and  never  for  one  moment 
did  I  suspect  that  you  did." 

"Yes,  you  know  as  much  as  I."  She 
paused  a  moment,  and  then  resting  her 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     327 

arms  on  the  office  table,  she  leaned  over 
and  spoke  to  him  in  a  tone  of  voice  and 
expression  quite  different  from  the  inde- 
pendent, self-reliant,  fearless  ones  which 
marked  the  Aldens. 

"You,  as  a  doctor,  hear  many  things  in 
confidence.  Because  I  believe  I  can  trust 
you,  I  am  going  to  bring  to  your  mind 
several  incidents  of  the  time  you  came  to 
my  home,  when  Hester's  mother  was 
brought  there.  Do  you  remember  what  it 
was  you  said  as  you  held  the  dead  woman's 
hands  in  yours?" 

"I  do  not,  Debby.  I  have  so  much  of 
that  work." 

"I  remember."  She  paused  again,  and 
then  bending  closer  to  him,  in  a  voice 
almost  a  whisper,  repeated  his  words  of 
fifteen  years  before.  He  looked  perplexed. 
"Does  it  not  come  to  you  that  there  might 
be  something  else  to  cause  the  condition 
which  you  remarked?"  she  said. 

His     expression     changed.      "Why,     of 


328     THE   COMING   OF  HESTER 

course.  I  gave  it  no  thought.  But  you 
are  right,  Debby.  And  you  knew  this  from 
that  time?" 

"I  discovered  it  from  something  which 
occurred  while  she  was  sitting  at  my  table. 
There  is  no  question  about  it." 

" There  cannot  be.  Then  the  advertise- 
ment for  the  child's  people  was  a  misrepre- 
sentation. No  wonder  no  one  ever  came 
to  claim  her." 

"I  did  not  attend  to  the  advertising.  I 
did  not  misrepresent  the  matter.  The  town 
officers  attended  to  that." 

"Then  she  is  not  a  Stout.  What  will  you 
do  to  convince  them?  Will  you  tell  them 
who  she  is?" 

"No.  The  story  would  be  abroad  before 
the  day  had  passed.  Mr.  Laffler  has  always 
attended  to  my  business  affairs.  He  will 
attend  the  meeting  with  Hintner  and  Hen- 
dig.  He  attended  to  the  matter  when  I 
legally  adopted  Hester." 

"You    really   adopted   her?    Well,    that 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     329 

clinches  the  matter  for  Abner.  He  could 
not  take  her  from  you,  even  were  she  the 
Ruth  he  claims  her  to  be.  We  never  knew, 
Debby,  whether  you  attended  to  having 
the  papers  drawn  up  or  not.  You  never 
mentioned  the  matter  to  any  one." 

"I  did  not  know  that  my  affairs  would 
interest  any  one,"  she  said.  "My  purpose 
here  to-day  was  not  to  tell  you  that.  But 
knowing  what  you  do  of  Hester's  mother, 
you  understand  that  sometime  my  girl 
must  know.  If  she  should  ever  think  of 
marrying,  she  would  have  to  be  told." 

"Yes,  yes.  It  would  not  do  at  all.  But 
how  are  you  going  to  mend  matters?" 

"You  and  I  may  be  gone  before  that 
time.  I  wish  you  to  write  down  and  sign 
what  you  know  of  the  child's  mother.  I 
will  do  the  same.  I  will  have  those  papers 
put  away  with  the  injunction  that  they 
must  be  read  when  she  reaches  the  age  of 
discretion." 

The  doctor  nodded  his  approval  of  the 


330     THE  COMING  OF  HESTER 

plan.  "I'll  attend  to  that  at  once,  Debby. 
I'll  bring  the  paper  to  you  before  Monday." 

"Very  well.  I  am  to  meet  Mr.  Laffler 
at  his  office.  I  presume  he  is  through  with 
the  conference  by  this  time." 

On  her  way  to  the  lawyer's  office  she  met 
Abner  and  his  son.  The  elder  man  was 
sawing  the  air  sidewise  with  his  upturned 
palms,  his  shoulders  were  hunched,  and  his 
sharp  face  stuck  forward.  As  he  passed 
Miss  Alden,  he  gave  her  a  look  in  which 
hatred,  fear,  and  admiration  were  alike  in 
evidence. 

On  arriving  at  the  office,  Miss  Alden  found 
that  there  had  been  no  difficulty  in  Mr. 
Laffler's  way.  Hintner  and  Hendig,  on 
being  informed  that  Hester  had  been  legally 
adopted,  dropped  the  case  at  once.  It 
may  have  been  that  they  were  glad  to  do 
so,  for  they  were  not  in  sympathy  with 
Abner  Stout  and  his  method  of  business, 
and  they  believed,  with  the  majority  of  the 
townspeople,  that  Hester  was  happier  and 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     331 

better  with  Debby  Alden  than  she  could  be 
with  the  other  family. 

Debby  started  home  immediately.  She 
appreciated  Hester's  feelings  during  the 
morning.  The  girls  had  had  dinner  pre- 
pared for  some  time,  and  were  eagerly 
watching  from  the  windows  for  her  coming. 
As  Debby  turned  from  the  main  road,  Jane 
saw  her  first.  With  a  tact  born  of  unselfish- 
ness, she  cried:  " There  she  is!  Hester, 
run  to  meet  her  while  Janet  and  I  serve 
the  dinner." 

Hester    was    already    from    the    kitchen 

and  flying  down  the  garden  path.    The  two 

met  at  the  gate.    Hester  flung  her  arms 

about  Miss  Alden.    "Tell  me,  Aunt  Debby, 

-did—" 

She  could  not  finish.  Her  fear  of  the 
answer  was  so  great  that  her  lips  trembled 
and  her  eyes  filled  with  tears.  Debby 
Alden  laughed  and  drew  Hester's  arm 
about  her,  holding  her  hand  in  her  own. 
"No,  they  didn't,  and  they  never  will,"  she 


332     THE  COMING  OF   HESTER 

replied,  nodding  her  head  gayly.  "  Didn't 
I  tell  you,  silly  child,  that  there  was  noth- 
ing to  fear?  The  court  gave  you  to  me 
with  the  name  of  Alden.  The  Stouts, 
from  a  mere  whim  of  their  own,  cannot 
take  you  from  me.  So,"  with  a  pressure 
of  the  hand,  "you  are  compelled  to  stay 
with  me,  whether  you  wish  to  or  not." 

"Oh!"  Then,  as  might  be  expected  of 
a  girl  who  would  not  cry  when  there  was 
reason  enough  for  tears,  Hester  sobbed 
aloud,  but  her  face  was  smile-wreathed  all 
the  while.  Debby  let  her  have  her  cry 
out.  They  had  come  to  the  steps  of  the 
side  porch,  and  stood  there  for  a  moment, 
Hester  leaning  her  head  against  Debby 
Alden's  shoulder  and  with  Debby  Alden's 
arms  about  her.  When  she  was  able  to 
control  herself,  she  looked  up  and  asked: 
"Aunt  Debby,  will  you  tell  me  something? 
Do  I  belong  to  those  people?  Am  I  Joel's 
sister?" 

"No;   you  are  not,  and  they  know  it.    I 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     333 

cannot  understand  why  they  wished  to  take 
you  from  me.  No  doubt  they  had  a  selfish 
reason  back  of  their  efforts."  She  waited 
a  moment.  The  time  was  one  suitable  for 
confidence. 

"There  is  one  matter  I  must  speak  to 
you  about,  Hester,  and  then  we'll  never 
mention  the  subject  again.  I  and  Doctor 
Heins  know  something  about  your  mother's 
people  that  no  one  else  knows  or  needs  to 
know.  I  may  not  always  be  with  you,  so 
I  have  made  provisions  for  that.  I  will 
give  Mr.  Laffler  a  written  account  which 
Doctor  Heins  and  I  have  signed.  But  I 
do  not  wish  you  to  read  that,  Hester,  un- 
less it  is  absolutely  necessary.  I'd  much 
prefer  that  you  would  remain  in  ignorance 
of  your  people.  Yet,  sometime,  the  occa- 
sion may  arise  when  it  will  be  best  for  you 
to  know.  I  wish  you  would  never  marry, 
Hester;  but  if  the  time  comes  when  you 
give  serious  thought  to  such  matters,  I  will 
tell  you  of  your  mother,  or  you  may  read 


334     THE  COMING   OF   HESTER 

the  paper  if  I  am  not  here.  Perhaps  my 
ideas  seem  peculiar  to  you,  Hester.  But 
all  my  thought  and  my  effort  is  to  do  the 
best  for  you.  Will  you  trust  and  believe 
in  me,  Hester?" 

"To  the  end  of  the  world,  Aunt  Debby. 
Why  should  I  not?  You  took  me  in,  a 
nameless,  helpless  child,  and  gave  me  the 
very  best  of  your  life,  even  to  the  name 
which  has  always  been  honored  and  re- 
spected. Don't  you  think  I  have  known 
for  a  long  while  what  sacrifices  you  have 
made?  That  name,  Aunt  Debby,  is  as 
dear  to  me  as  to  you,  and  I  promise  you  I 
will  suffer  anything  before  I  bring  dishonor 
or  shame  to  it.  Hester  Palmer  Alden. 
That  was  the  name  you  loved  best  —  your 
own  mother's.  I'm  proud  of  it  every  time 
I  write  it.  Trust  you!"  She  leaned  her 
soft  cheek  against  Debby  Alden's.  "Not 
trust  you,  who  have  done  everything  for  me, 
and  for  whom  I  have  done  nothing  ?  Oh ! 
Aunt  Debby!" 


THE  COMING  OF  HESTER     335 

"Done  nothing  for  me!"  Debby  Alden 
said  the  words  softly  and  tenderly,  and 
smiled  as  she  said  them.  She  looked  back 
over  the  fifteen  years  and  saw  what  Hester 
had  done  for  her.  She  saw  herself  as  she 
was  that  morning  when  the  stranger  came 
to  the  door.  She  had  been  an  old  woman 
at  twenty-five,  narrow  in  her  views  of  life, 
careless  of  her  language,  knowing  nothing 
but  the  daily  routine  of  housework,  with  no 
vital,  human  interest  to  draw  her  from 
herself.  There  had  come  fifteen  years  of 
study  and  discipline  with  Hester,  the  friend- 
ship of  young  girls  and  of  women  who 
lived  and  worked  —  not  worked  merely. 
She  was  a  young  girl  now  at  forty,  young 
in  spirits,  ambitions,  and  looks.  Her  horizon 
had  broadened.  She  could  not  only  see  the 
flowers  at  her  feet,  but  she  had  caught  the 
glow  of  Aurora's  rosy  fingers  on  the  eastern 
hilltops,  and  saw  in  every  shooting  star  the 
sacrifice  of  Berenice. 

This  came  to  Debby  Alden  as  she  stood 


336     THE   COMING   OF   HESTER 

with  Hester's  cheek  pressed  to  hers.  A 
soft  light  came  to  her  eyes.  She  turned, 
and  taking  the  girl's  face  between  her  hands 
looked  at  her  with  a  strange  new  light  in 
her  eyes,  as  she  said:  "Done  nothing  for 
me?  I  have  had  fifteen  years  of  love  and 
tenderness  from  my  little  girl.  Each  day 
has  been  filled  with  happiness;  my  heart 
has  grown  greater  and  my  mind  keener. 
The  narrow  way  where  I  was  walking  has 
grown  broader  and  higher  ever  since  the 
Coming  of  Hester." 


HELEN   GRANT  SERIES 

By  AMANDA   M.    DOUGLAS 

Illustrated  by  AMY  BROOKS     Cloth     Price  per  volume  $1.25 

Helen  Grant's  Schooldays 
Helen  Grant's  Friends 
Helen  Grant  at  Aldred  House 
Helen  Grant  in  College 
Helen  Grant,  Senior 
Helen  Grant,  Graduate 
Helen  Grant,  Teacher 


HELEN  GRANT  and  her  friends  represent  the  best  type  of  college 
girls,    those    of  the    highest   aims    and   ideals,    and   she    herself 
develops    to    admiration    in   each    successive    phase   of    her   career.  — 
Milwaukee  Free  Press. 

Helen  Grant  is  a  lovable  and  capable  American  girl,  and  the  young 
people  who  follow  her  experiences  as  depicted  by  Miss  Douglas  are  sure 
to  be  the  better  for  it. — Herald  and  Presbyter. 

Miss  Douglas  has  had  long  experience  in  writing  books  for  girls. 
Into  her  stories  she  puts  the  influence  of  high  ideals,  remembering  all  the 
time  that  girls  are  not  to  be  deprived  of  their  good  times,  but  that  play 
and  earnest  endeavor  contribute  each  a  share  to  the  making  of  womanly 
character. —  Christian  Register. 

In  "  Helen  Grant,"  Miss  Douglas  has  _ 
created  a  splendid  type  of  American  girlhood, 
strong,  energetic,  intelligent,  and  winsome. 
Her  progress  under  difficulties,  and  her  unusual 
power  to  win  and  keep  friends,  have  delighted 
her  readers.  —  Chicago  Advance. 


For   sale   by    all    booksellers    or    sent    postpaid    on 
receipt  of  price  by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO., 
BOSTON 


THE    RANDY    BOOKS 

By  AMY  BROOKS 

Iimo     CLOTH      ARTISTIC  COVER  DESIGN  IN  GOLD  AND  COLORS 
ILLUSTRATED  BY  THE  AUTHOR    PRICE  $1.00  EACH 

The  progress  of  the  "  Randy  Books  " 
has  been  one  continual  triumph  over  the 
hearts  of  girls  of  all  ages,  for  dear  little 
fun-loving  sister  Prue  is  almost  as  much 
a  central  figure  as  Randy,  growing  to- 
ward womanhood  with  each  book.  The 
sterling  good  sense  and  simple  natural- 
ness of  Randy,  and  the  total  absence  of 
slang  and  viciousness,  make  these  books 
in  the  highest  degree  commendable, 
while  abundant  life  is  supplied  by  the 
doings  of  merry  friends,  and  there  is  rich 
humor  in  the  droll  rural  characters. 


Randy's  Summer  Randy's  Good  Times 

Randy's  Winter  Randy's  Luck 

Randy  and  Her  Friends    Randy's  Loyalty 
Randy  and  Prue  Randy's  Prince 


"The  Randy  Books  are  among  the  Tery 
choicest  books  for  young  people  to  make 
a  beginning  with." 

'—Boston  Courier. 

"The  Randy  Books  of  Amy  Brooks 
have  had  a  deserved  popularity  among 
young  girls.  They  are  wholesome  and 
moral  without  being  goody-goody." 

—Chicago  Pose, 


I 


LOTHROP,   LEE    &    SHEPARD    CO.,   BOSTON 


BRAVE   HEART    SERIES 

By  Adele  E.  Thompson 

Betty  Seldon,   Patriot 

Illustrated     12  mo     Cloth     $1.25 

A  BOOK  that  is  at  the  same  time  fascinating  and  noble.     Historical 
events  are  accurately  traced  leading  up  to  the  surrender  of  Corn- 
wallis  at  Yorktown,  with  reunion  and  happiness  for  all  who  deserve  it. 

Brave  Heart  Elizabeth 

Illustrated    i2mo     Cloth     $1.25 

IT  is  a  story  of  the  making  of  the  Ohio  frontier,  much  of  it  taken  from 
life,  and  the  heroine  one  of  the  famous  Zane  family  after  which  Zanes- 
ville,  O.,  takes  its  name.    An  accurate,  pleasing,  and  yet  at  times  intensely 
thrilling  picture  of  the  stirring  period  of  border  settlement. 

A  Lassie  of  the  Isles 

Illustrated  by  J.  W.  Kennedy 
I2mo     Cloth     $1.25 

THIS  is  the  romantic  story  of  Flora  Macdonald, 
the  lassie  of  Skye,  who  aided  in  the  escape  of 
Charles  Stuart,  otherwise  known  as  the  "Young 
Pretender,"  for  which  she  suffered  arrest,  but 
which  led  to  signal  honor  through  her  sincerity 
and  attractive  personality. 

Polly  of  the  Pines 

Illustrated  by 

Henry  Roth    Cloth     12  mo   $1.25 

«  DOLLY  OF  THE  PINES"  was  Mary 
*•  Dunning,  a  brave  girl  of  the  Caro- 
linas,  and  the  events  of  the  story  occur  in 
the  years  1775-82.  Polly  was  an  orphan 
living  with  her  mother's  family,  who  were 
Scotch  Highlanders,  and  for  the  most  part 
intensely  loyal  to  the  Crown.  Polly  finds 
the  glamor  of  royal  adherence  hard  to  resist, 
but  her  heart  turns  towards  the  patriots  and 
she  does  much  to  aid  and  encourage  them. 

for  sale  by  all  booksellers,  or  sent  ptstyaid  on  receipt 
of  price  by  tht  publishers 

LOTHROP,   LEE   &   SHEPARD  CO.,  BOSTON 


We  Four  Girls 

By  MARY  G.  DARLING  i2mo  Cloth  Il- 
lustrated by  BERTHA  G.  DAVIDSON 
$1.25 

"  TT7E  FOUR  GIRLS  "  is  a  bright  story 
•  '  of  a  summer  vacation  in  the  coun- 
try, where  these  girls  were  sent  for  study 
and  recreation.  The  story  has  plenty  of 
natural  incidents;  and  a  mild  romance,  in 
which  they  are  all  interested,  and  of  which 
their  teacher  is  the  principal  person,  gives 
interest  to  the  tale.  They  thought  it  the 
most  delightful  summer  they  ever  passed. 


A  Girl  of  this  Century 

By  MARY  G.  DARLING    Cloth    Illustrated 
by  LILIAN  CRAWFORD  TRUE    $1.25 

nPHE  same  characters  that  appear  in 
*  "We  Four  Girls :'  are  retained  in 
this  story,  the  interest  centering  around 
"  Marjorie,"  the  natural  leader  of  the  four. 
She  has  a  brilliant  course  at  Radcliffe,  and 
then  comes  the  world.  A  romance,  long 
resisted,  but  worthy  in  nature  and  of  happy 
termination,  crowns  this  singularly  well- 
drawn  life  of  the  noblest  of  all  princesses  — 
a  true  American  girl. 


A  Story  of  School  and  Seminary  Life 
By  ADBLE  E.  THOMPSON    Cloth    Illustrated    $1.25 

TPHE  characters  in  this  book  seem  to  live,  their  remarks  are  bright  and 
*•  natural,  and  the  incidental  humor  delightful.  The  account  of  Beck's 
narrow  and  cheerless  early  life,  her  sprightly  independence,  and  unexpected 
competency  that  aids  her  to  progress  through  the  medium  of  seminary  life 
to  noble  womanhood,  is  one  that  mothers  can  commend  to  their  daughters 
unreservedly.  

For  sale  by  all  bookseller*  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt  of  price 
by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO.,  BOSTON 


THE  GIRL  WHO  KEPT  UP 


By  MARY  McCRAE  CUTLER 


fllustmted  by  C.  Louise  Williams.        12mo.       Cloth.       $1.25 


This  is  a  strong,  wholesome  story  of 
achievement.  The  end  of  a  high  school 
course  divides  the  paths  of  a  boy  and  girl 
who  have  been  close  friends  and  keen 
rivals.  The  youth  is  to  go  to  college, 
while  the  girl,  whose  family  is  in  humbler 
circumstances,  must  remain  at  home  and 
help.  She  sees  that  her  comrade  will 
feel  that  he  is  out-growing  her,  and  she 
determines  to  and  does  Tteep  up  with  him 
in  obtaining  an  education. 

"  The  story  is  human  to  the  least  phase  of  it,  and  it  is  told  with  such 
simple  force  and  vivacity  that  its  effect  is  strong  and  positive.  The 
pictures  of  college  and  home  life  are  true  bits  of  realism.  It  is  an 
excellent  piece  of  work." — Bookseller,  Newsdealer  and  Stationer, 
New  York. 

"The  story  is  well  told,  and  is  thoroughly  helpful  in  every  respect." 
—  Epworth  Herald,  Chicago. 

"  The  telling  of  the  story  is  attractive,  and  will  be  found  helpful  to 
all  readers."—  The  Baptist  Union,  Chicago. 

"Let  us  recommend  this  book  for  young  people  for  the  excellent 
lesson  of  honest  striving  and  noble  doing  that  it  clearly  conveys."  — 
Boston  Courier. 

"It  is  a  healthy  and  inspiring  story."—  Brooklyn  Eagle. 
"The  tale  is  full  of  good  lesson  for  all  young  people.  "—Boston  Beacon. 
"  The  story  will  be  both  pleasant  and  profitable  to  the  youth  of  both 
sexes." — Louisville  Courier-Journal. 


Par  $ale  by  all  booksellers,  or  tent  postpaid  on  receipt  of  price  by 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO.,  Boston 


Cordelia's  Pathway  Out 


By  EDNA  A.  FOSTER  Editor  of 
Children's  Page  in  the  "Youth's 
Companion"  Illustrated  by  Clara 
E.  At  wood  1 2  mo  Cloth  $1.00 

TN  "Cordelia's  Pathway  Out"  the  writer  has 
•*•  carried  along  the  brilliant  little  Hortense  and 
many  of  the  characters  of  that  story,  but  has 
brought  into  prominence  the  quiet  Cordelia,  whose 
admiration  and  love  for  Hortense  act  as  an  incen- 
tive to  study  and  cultivate  a  desire  for  growth. 
j  Early  in  the  story  she  is  transplanted  from  the 
village  in  which  we  first  find  her,  and  comes  into 
larger  living  and  the  bestowal  of  modest  "advan- 
tages." She  is  a  shy  country-bred  child,  but  she  observes,  imitates  and 
applies  the  best  of  her  own  life  and  the  .exercise  of  loving  and  homely 
qualities  brings  her  to  a  desirable  plane. 

"  It  is  a  perfect  book  for  children  from  ten  to  fifteen  years  of  age,  or  even 
older." — Universalist  Leader,  Boston. 

"The  book  is  a  good  one  for  growing^  girls.  Would  to  Heaven  there  were 
more  of  which  one  might  say  the  same.  It  is  quite  above  the  level  of  the  ordinary 
book  of  its  kind." — Cincinnati  Times  Star. 

Hortense 

By   EDNA   A.    FOSTER   Illustrated 
byMaryAyer    12  mo    Cloth   $1.00 

MISS  FOSTER  has  here  a  book  of  unusual 
excellence,  whether  viewed  as  a  tale  of 
entertainment  for  a  child's  reading  or  a  valuable 
and  suggestive  study  for  the  education  of  those 
who  have  to  do  with  children.  The  impulsive 
little  Hortense  wins  the  reader's  sympathy  at 
once,  and  the  experiences  of  the  well-meaning 
young  lady  relative  who  attempts  to  train  her  up 
according  to  set  rules  for  well-regulated  children 
are  very  interesting. 

"We  would  strongly  advise  all  mothers  of  growing  boys  and  girls  to  hasten 
to  procure  a  copy  of  this  delightful  book  for  the  home  library — and,  above  all,  to 
make  a  point  of  reading  it  carefully  themselves  before  turning  it  over  to  the 
juveniles." — Designer,  New  York,  N.  Y. 

"  It  is  a  truthful  and  discerning  study  of  a  gifted  child,  and  should  be  read  by 
all  who  have  children  under  their  care.  It  is  probably  the  best  new  girl's  book  of 
the  year." — Springfield  (Mass.)  Republican. 

For  tale  at  all  booksellers  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt 
of  price  by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,  LEE,  &  SHEPARD   CO.,   BOSTON 


WHEN  GRANDMAMMA 
WAS  FOURTEEN 

By  MARION  HARLAND 

WITH  FOUR    FULL-PAGE   ILLUSTRATIONS   AND   NUMEROUS    PICTURES 
IN    THE    TEXT     PRICE    $1.2$ 


Later  adventures  of  the  heroine  of 
"WHEN    GRANDMAMMA     WAS    NEW.- 


THOSE  who  recall  this  noted  author's  delightful  story,  "When 
Grandmamma  was  New,"  will  be  glad  to  hear  that  in  this 
book  are  the  adventures  of    the  heroine  at  a  later  period. 
Through   the   eyes  of  fourteen-year-old   Molly  Burwell,  the  reader 
sees  much  that  is  quaint,  amusing  and  pathetic  in  ante-bellum  Rich- 
mond, and  the  story  has  all  the  charm  of  manner  and  rich  humanity 
which   are  characteristic  of  Marion  Harland.     All  healthy- hearted 
children  will  delight  in  the  story,  and  so  will  their  parents. 


WHEN  GRANDMAMMA  WAS  NEW 

The  Story  of  a   Virginia    Girlhood  in  the  Forties 
By  MARION  HARLAND       12  mo      Illustrated     Price  $1.25 

The  BOSTON  JOURNAL  says: 

"  If  only  one  might  read  it  first  with  the  trained  enjoyment  of  the 
'  frown-up '  mind  that  is  '  at  leisure  from  itself,'  and  then  if  one  might  with, 
draw  into  ten-year-old-dom  once  more  and  seek  the  shadow  of  the  friendly 
apple-tree,  and  revel  in  it  all  over  again,  taste  it  all  just  as  the  child  tastes, 
and  And  it  luscious!  For  this  book  has  charm  and  piquancy.  And  it  is  in 
just  this  vivid  remembrance  of  a  child's  mental  workings,  in  just  the  avoid- 
ance of  all '  writing  down '  to  the  supposed  level  of  a  child's  mind,  that 
this  story  has  its  rare  attractiveness.  It  is  bright,  winsome,  and  magnetic." 

The  INTERIOR,  Chicago,  says: 

11 '  Grandmamma  '  may  have  charmed  other  folks,  —  has  charmed  them  all, 
incontrovertibly,  —  but  she  has  never  tried  harder  to  be  vivid  and  dramatic 
and  entertaining,  and  to  leave  a  sweet  kernal  of  application,  withal,  than  in 
these  memory-tales  of  a  sunny  childhood  on  a  big  Virginia  plantation.  It  is 
a  book  which  will  delight,  not  children  alone,  but  all  such  as  have  the  child 
heart  and  a  tender  memory  of  when  they  were  '  new.' " 

AT  ALL  BOOKSELLERS,   OR   SENT   POSTPAID   ON   RECEIPT 
OF  PRICE  BY  THE  PUBLISHERS 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO.,  BOSTON 


Our  Own  Land  Series 

By  EVERETT  T.  TOMLINSON 

Illustrated     Cloth,  i2mo     $1.50  each 

FOUR  BOYS  IN   THE  YELLOWSTONE 

T7"OUR  boy  friends  who  chance  to  represent  respectively  the  northern, 
southern,  eastern,  and  western  sections  of  our  country,  join  in  a  trip  up 
the  Great  Lakes  to  Duluth,  where  they  take  a  private  car  furnished  by  the 
father  of  one  of  them  and  go  on  to  the  world-famous  Yellowtsone  Park, 
in  which  they  have  an  abundance  of  adventure  and  enjoyment.  The 
spirited  illustrations  by  Mr.  Edwards  are  worthy  of  special  mention. 

"The  book  has  a  decided  value  in  awakening  in  young  American!  an  interest 
in  some  of  the  marvels  of  their  own  land." —  The  Interior,  Chicago. 

FOUR  BOYS  IN  THE  LAND  OF  COTTON 


HTHE  four  boys  spend  their  next  long  vaca- 
tion in  a  southern  tour,  which  begins  in 
Virginia,  thence  to  the  Mississippi  river,  and 
on  through  Arkansas  to  Indian  Territory. 
They  come  to  appreciate  their  own  country  by 
seeing  it,  and  learn  history  by  visiting  historic 
places.  Above  all,  they  have  a  good  time, 
and  so  will  every  one  who  reads  this  book. 

"The  next  best  thing  to  visiting  these  places 
yourself  is  to  hear  about  them  from  Mr.  Tomlin. 
son." — Providence  News. 


FOUR  BOYS  INTHE 
[AND  OF  COTTON 


E.t.TOMUNSON 


FOUR     BOYS    ON    THE    MISSISSIPPI 

"THE  four  friends  of  the  previous  volumes  are  in  camp  on  the  Arkansas 
River,  and  are  so  fascinated  by  good  comradeship  and  interesting 
sights  and  experiences  that  they  prolong  their  travelling  by  a  most  enviable 
trip  on  the  mighty  Mississippi.  What  they  miss  rinding  out  or  enjoying 
would  not  be  worth  mentioning. 

"They  are  likable  lads  and  Ihe  story  of  their  holiday  is  a  vastly  entertaining  and 
instructive  one  for  boys." — Chicago  Daily  Ne-ws. 

For  salt  by  all  bookseller*  or  seat  postpaid  00  receipt  of 
price  by  the  publishers 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &  SHEPARD  CO.,  BOSTON 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000072138     1 


